2009 Chevrolet Tahoe, Suburban Owner Manual M

Seats and Restraint System ............................. 1-1 Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Head Restraints ......................................... 1-2 Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Front Seats ............................................... 1-4 Climate Controls ...................................... 3-22
Rear Seats .............................................. 1-14 Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 3-34
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-32 Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-51
Child Restraints ....................................... 1-54 Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-83
Airbag System ......................................... 1-81 Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Restraint System Check ............................ 1-98 Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ....... 4-2
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1 Towing ................................................... 4-43
Keys ........................................................ 2-3 Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Doors and Locks ...................................... 2-10 Service ..................................................... 5-3
Windows ................................................. 2-19 Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-22 Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-12
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-26 Rear Axle ............................................... 5-49
Mirrors .................................................... 2-52 Four-Wheel Drive ..................................... 5-51
Object Detection Systems .......................... 2-56 Front Axle ............................................... 5-52
OnStar® System ...................................... 2-68 Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-53
Universal Home Remote System ................ 2-71 Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-56
Storage Areas ......................................... 2-78 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-59
Sunroof .................................................. 2-81 Tires ...................................................... 5-61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Appearance Care ................................... 5-106 Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1
Vehicle Identification ............................... 5-114 Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7-2
Electrical System .................................... 5-114 Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-14
Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-122 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ........... 7-16
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1 Index ................................................................ 1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.

Canadian Owners
Canadian Owners (Propriétaires
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, Canadiens)
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and the
names TAHOE, SUBURBAN, and Z71 are registered A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
trademarks of General Motors Corporation. from your dealer/retailer or from:
This manual includes the latest information at the time it On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
was printed. GM reserves the right to make changes auprès du concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
in the product after that time without notice. For vehicles Helm, Incorporated
first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General P.O. Box 07130
Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division Detroit, MI 48207
wherever it appears in this manual.
1-800-551-4123
This manual describes features that may or may not be
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue française
on your specific vehicle.
www.helminc.com
Read this manual from beginning to end to learn about
the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures, symbols,
and words work together to explain vehicle operation.

Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 15911385 B Second Printing 2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

iii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid
or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.
To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the A notice tells about something that can damage the
index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical vehicle.
list of what is in the manual and the page number where
it can be found. Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
Safety Warnings and Symbols Many times, this damage would not be covered by the
vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The notice
A circle with a slash tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
through it is a safety There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
symbol which means “Do the same words, CAUTION or Notice.
Not,” “Do not do this,”
or “Do not let this happen.”
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about the text describing the operation or information
things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore relating to a specific component, control, message,
the warning. gage, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your

{ CAUTION: owner manual for additional instructions or information.

* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a

These mean there is something that could hurt you service manual for additional instructions or information.
or other people.

iv

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Vehicle Symbol Chart .: Fuel Gage
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information +: Fuses
on the symbol, refer to the index.
i: Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
0: Adjustable Pedals
j: LATCH System Child Restraints
9: Airbag Readiness Light
*: Malfunction Indicator Lamp
#: Air Conditioning
:: Oil Pressure
!: Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g: Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
g: Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar ®
}: Power
$: Brake System Warning Light
/: Remote Vehicle Start
": Charging System
>: Safety Belt Reminders
I: Cruise Control
7: Tire Pressure Monitor
B: Engine Coolant Temperature
_: Tow/Haul Mode
O: Exterior Lamps
F: Traction Control
#: Fog Lamps
M: Windshield Washer Fluid

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ✍ NOTES

vi

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Section 1 Seats and Restraint System
Head Restraints ...............................................1-2 Child Restraint Systems .................................1-61
Front Seats ......................................................1-4 Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-63
Manual Seats ................................................1-4 Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Power Seats ..................................................1-5 Children (LATCH) ......................................1-65
Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-6 Securing a Child Restraint in a
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-6 Rear Seat Position ....................................1-73
Heated Seats .................................................1-7 Securing a Child Restraint in the
Heated and Cooled Seats ................................1-8 Center Front Seat Position ..........................1-77
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals ....................1-8 Securing a Child Restraint in the
Reclining Seatbacks ......................................1-10 Right Front Seat Position ............................1-77
Center Seat .................................................1-13 Airbag System ...............................................1-81
Rear Seats .....................................................1-14 Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-83
Heated Seats ...............................................1-14 When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-86
60/40 Split Bench Seat (Second Row) .............1-14 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-87
Bucket Seats (Second Row) ...........................1-20 How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-88
Third Row Seat ............................................1-27 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-88
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-90
Safety Belts ...................................................1-32 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-96
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-32 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-37 Vehicle ....................................................1-96
Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-45
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-52 Restraint System Check ..................................1-98
Lap Belt ......................................................1-52 Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-98
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-53 Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash ...................................................1-99
Child Restraints .............................................1-54
Older Children ..............................................1-54
Infants and Young Children ............................1-57
1-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Head Restraints
The front seats have adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.

{ CAUTION:
With head restraints that are not installed and
adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a
crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all
occupants are installed and adjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint

is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
in a crash.

1-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Push down on the head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is locked in place.
The head restraints are not designed to be removed.
The rear seat has head rests that can be adjusted
up and down.

Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower the head

restraint, press the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the restraint down.

1-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Front Seats If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved
forward or rearward.
1. Lift the bar to unlock
Manual Seats the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
{ CAUTION: release the bar.

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to

adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.

1-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Power Seats Your vehicle may have additional features to adjust your
vehicle’s power seat:
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire
control up or down.
On seats with power reclining seatbacks, the control is
located behind the power seat control on the outboard
side of the seats. See “Power Reclining Seatbacks”
under Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-10.
A vehicle with a memory function allows seat settings to
be saved and recalled. See Memory Seat, Mirrors,
and Pedals on page 1-8 for more information.
Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control, Power
Recline, and Power Lumbar shown

On a vehicle with power seats, the controls used to

operate them are located on the outboard side of
the seats.
Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.

1-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Manual Lumbar Power Lumbar

On vehicles with this feature the control is located on

the outboard side of the seat.
Increase or decrease lumbar support by turning the
knob forward or rearward. On seats with power lumbar, the controls used to
operate this feature are located on the outboard side of
the seats.
• To increase lumbar support, press and hold the
front of the control.
• To decrease lumbar support, press and hold the
rear of the control.

1-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The vehicle may have additional features to adjust your Heated Seats
vehicle’s power seat:
• To raise the height of the lumbar support, press On vehicles with heated front seats, the controls are
and hold the top of the control. located on the driver and passenger doors.

• To lower the height of the lumbar support, press I (Heated Seatback): Press to turn on the heated
and hold the bottom of the control. seatback.
Release the control when the lower seatback reaches
the desired level of lumbar support.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press to turn on the
heated seat and seatback.
Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows
seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory The light on the button will come on to indicate that the
Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 1-8 for more feature is working. Press the button to cycle through
information. the temperature settings of high, medium, and low and
to turn the heat to the seat off. Indicator lights will
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes, as show the level of heat selected: three for high, two for
it may during long trips, so should the position of medium, and one for low.
your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
The heated seats will be canceled 10 seconds after the
ignition is turned off. To use the heated seat feature
after restarting the vehicle, press the heated seat
or seatback button again.

1-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Heated and Cooled Seats This symbol will appear on the climate control display to
indicate that the feature is on. Press the button to cycle
If the front seats have the heated and cooled seat through the temperature settings of high, medium, and
feature, the buttons used to control this feature low and to turn the heated seat off. Indicator bars next to
are located on the front doors near the door handle. the symbol designate the level of heat selected: three for
high, two for medium, and one for low.
{ (Cooled Seat): To cool the entire seat, press
The heated and cooled seats will be canceled after the
the button with the cooled seat symbol. ignition is turned off. To use the heated and cooled
This symbol will appear on the climate control display to seat feature after the vehicle is started, you will need to
indicate that the feature is on. Press the button to press the appropriate seat button again.
cycle through the temperature settings of high, medium,
and low and to turn the cooled seat off. Indicator Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals
bars next to the symbol designate the level of cooling
selected: three for high, two for medium, and one Your vehicle may have the memory package.
for low.
The controls for this
+ (Heated Seatback): To heat only the seatback, feature are located on the
press the button with the heated seatback symbol. driver’s door panel, and
are used to program
This symbol will appear on the climate control display to and recall memory settings
indicate that the feature is on. Press the button to cycle for the driver’s seat,
through the temperature settings of high, medium, and outside mirrors, and the
low and to turn the heated seatback off. Indicator bars adjustable throttle and
next to the symbol designate the level of heat selected: brake pedal.
three for high, two for medium, and one for low.

z (Heated Seat and Seatback): To heat the entire

seat, press the button with the heated seat and seatback
symbol.

1-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To save seating positions in memory: If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to enter
your vehicle and the remote recall memory feature
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback is on, automatic seat, adjustable mirror, and adjustable
recliner and lumbar, both outside mirrors, and pedal movements will occur. See “MEMORY SEAT
the throttle and brake pedals to a comfortable RECALL” under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC
position. Buttons) on page 3-74 for more information.
See Outside Power Mirrors on page 2-53 and To stop recall movement of the memory function at any
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 2-30 time, press one of the power seat controls, memory
for more information. buttons, power mirror buttons, or adjustable pedal
Not all mirrors, adjustable throttles and brake switch.
pedals, or power lumbar will have the ability to save
If something has blocked the driver’s seat and/or the
and recall their positions.
adjustable pedals while recalling a memory position, the
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps sound to driver’s seat and/or the adjustable pedals recall may
indicate that the position has been stored. stop working. If this happens, remove the obstruction
A second seating, lumbar, mirror, and throttle and brake and press the appropriate control for the area that is not
pedal position can be programmed by repeating the responding for two seconds. Try recalling the memory
above steps and pressing button 2. position again by pressing the appropriate memory
button. If the memory position is still not recalling, see
To recall the memory positions, the vehicle must be in your dealer for service.
PARK (P). Press and release either button 1 or button 2
corresponding to the desired driving position. The
seat, outside mirrors, and adjustable throttle and brake
pedals will move to the position previously stored.
You will hear a single beep.

1-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Easy Exit Seat Reclining Seatbacks
The control for this feature is located on the driver’s
door panel between buttons 1 and 2.
With the vehicle in PARK (P), the driver’s seat exit { CAUTION:
position can be recalled by pressing the exit button. You
will hear a single beep, and the driver’s seat will You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
move back. adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
If the easy exit seat feature is programmed in the Driver moving. The sudden movement could startle and
Information Center (DIC), automatic seat movement confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
will occur when the key is removed from the ignition. do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
See “EASY EXIT SEAT” under DIC Vehicle the vehicle is not moving.
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-74 for
more information.
The memory seat and easy exit features can also be
programmed using the DIC. { CAUTION:
For programming information, see DIC Vehicle
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-74. If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.

1-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 { CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts cannot do their job when you
are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.

1-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Manual Reclining Seatbacks To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the recline lever.
On seats with manual reclining seatbacks, the lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard side of 2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
the seat(s). release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.

1-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Power Reclining Seatbacks If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, the control
used to recline them is located on the outboard side
of the seat behind the power seat control.
• To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control
rearward.
• To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the
control forward.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.

Center Seat
Your vehicle may have a front center seat. The seatback
doubles as an armrest and cupholder/storage area for
the driver and passenger when the center seat is
not used. Do not use it as a seating position when the
seatback is folded down.

1-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rear Seats M (Heated Seat): To heat the seat cushion, press the
button with the heated seat symbol.

Heated Seats A heated seat symbol will be shown in the RSA display
to indicate that the feature is on. Press the button to
cycle through the temperature settings of high, medium,
On vehicles with rear and low, and to turn it off. Indicator bars next to the
outboard heated seats, the symbol will designate the level of heat selected: three for
buttons used to control high, two for medium, and one for low.
this feature are located on
the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) The heated seats are off when the ignition is off.
panel.
60/40 Split Bench Seat
(Second Row)
If your vehicle has a 60/40 split bench, the seat(s) can
be folded for additional cargo space or folded and
Driver Side RSA Heated tumbled for easy entry and exit to the third row seats, if
Seat Button shown your vehicle has them. These seats will have either
the manual fold and tumble feature or the automatic seat
release fold and tumble feature.

1-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Manual Fold and Tumble Feature
Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s)
To fold and tumble the seat, do the following:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or
on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still
fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety
belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return
them to their normal stowed position before folding a
rear seat.

The seatback will fold forward automatically.

Leaving the seatback in this position creates a flat
load floor.
If the seatback cannot fold flat, try moving the front
seat forward and/or put the front seatback in the
upright position.

2. Lift the lever, located on the outboard side of the

seat, to release the seatback.

1-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. Lift the same lever
again to release the
rear of the seat { CAUTION:
from the floor. The seat
will tumble forward. If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there. Always push and
pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked.

2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and

pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.

Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting { CAUTION:

Position
To return the seat to the sitting position, do the following: A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly
attached, or twisted will not provide the protection
1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt
seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched could be seriously injured. After raising the rear
to the floor. seatback, always check to be sure that the safety
belts are properly routed and attached, and are not
twisted.

3. Make sure the safety belt in the center seating

position is not caught between the two seats
and is not twisted.

1-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) from the
Third Row Seats

{ CAUTION:
Using the third row seating position while the
second row is folded, or folded and tumbled, could
cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to
return the seat to the passenger seating position.
Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is
locked into place.

To fold and tumble the seat from the third rows, if your
2. Lift the lever(s), located on the bottom rear of the
vehicle has them, do the following:
second row seat(s) on the inboard side, to release
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or the seatback. The seatback will fold forward.
on the seat.
3. Lift the same lever again to release the rear of the
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts seat from the floor. The seat will tumble forward
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the automatically.
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.

1-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Power Release Fold and Tumble 2. From the front seats,
press one of the
Feature automatic seat release
The transmission must be in (P) Park for this feature buttons located on
to work. the overhead console.

Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s)

{ CAUTION:
Automatically folding and tumbling the seat when Overhead Console
someone is sitting in the seat, could cause injury Buttons shown, Panel
Button similar
to the person sitting there. Always make sure
there is no one sitting in the seat before pressing When accessing the third row seats, if your vehicle
the automatic seat release button. has them, from the outside of the vehicle, press
the button on the panel behind either rear door.
To fold and tumble the seat, do the following: One press of the button automatically folds
the seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward.
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or There will be a slight delay between the folding of
on the seat. the seatback and the tumbling of the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.

1-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting
Position { CAUTION:
To return the seat to the sitting position, do the following:

1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly
seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched attached, or twisted will not provide the protection
to the floor. needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that the safety
{ CAUTION: belts are properly routed and attached, and are
not twisted.
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could 3. Make sure that the safety belt in the center seating
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always position is not caught between the two seats and is
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they not twisted.
are locked.

2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and

pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.

1-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Folding and Tumbling the Second Row 2. Press the automatic
Seat(s) from the Third Row Seats or seat release button
located on the panel
Outside behind the rear doors.

{ CAUTION:
Using the third row seating position while the
second row is folded, or folded and tumbled, could
cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to
return the seat to the passenger seating position. Driver’s Side Rear Panel
Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is Button shown
locked into place.
One press of the button automatically folds the
seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward. There
To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats, if will be a slight delay between the folding of the
your vehicle has them, do the following: seatback and the tumbling of the seat.
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or Bucket Seats (Second Row)
on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts If your vehicle has bucket seats, the seatbacks can be
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the reclined, the seats can be folded for additional cargo
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts space, or folded and tumbled for easy entry and exit to
and return them to their normal stowed position the third row seats, if your vehicle has them. These
before folding a rear seat. seats will have either the manual fold and tumble feature
or the automatic seat release fold and tumble feature.

1-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Reclining Seatbacks To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.

{ CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is

locked.
1. Lift the lever located on the outboard side of
the seat.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.

1-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Manual Fold and Tumble Feature
Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s)
To fold and tumble the seat, do the following:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or
on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still
fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety
belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return
them to their normal stowed position before folding a
rear seat.

The seatback will fold forward. Leaving the seatback

in this position creates a flat load floor.
If the seatback cannot fold flat, try moving the front
seat forward and/or put the front seatback in the
upright position.

2. Lift the lever, located on the outboard side of the

seat, to release the seatback.

1-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. Lift the lever again to Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting
release the rear of the Position
seat from the floor.
The seat will tumble To return the seat to the sitting position, do the following:
forward.
1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The
seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched
to the floor.

{ CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.

2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and

pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.

1-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) from the 2. Lift the lever, located
Third Row Seats on the bottom rear of
the second row seat on
the inboard side, to
release the seatback.
{ CAUTION: The seatback will
fold forward.
Using the third row seating position while the
second row is folded, or folded and tumbled, could
cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to
return the seat to the passenger seating position.
Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is
locked into place.

3. Lift the lever again to release the rear of the seat

To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats, if from the floor. The seat will tumble forward.
your vehicle has them:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or
on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.

1-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Power Release Fold and Tumble 2. From the front seats,
press one of the
Feature automatic seat release
The transmission must be in (P) Park for this feature buttons located on
to work. the overhead console.

Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s)

{ CAUTION:
Automatically folding and tumbling the seat when Overhead Console
someone is sitting in the seat, could cause injury Buttons shown
to the person sitting there. Always make sure When accessing the third row seats, if your vehicle
there is no one sitting in the seat before pressing has them, from the outside of the vehicle, press
the automatic seat release button. the button on the panel behind either rear door.
One press of the button automatically folds
To fold and tumble the seat, do the following: the seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward.
There will be a slight delay between the folding of
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or the seatback and the tumbling of the seat.
on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.

1-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting Folding and Tumbling the Second Row
Position Seat(s) from the Third Row Seats or
To return the seat to the sitting position, do the following: Outside
1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The
seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched
to the floor.
{ CAUTION:
Using the third row seating position while the
second row is folded, or folded and tumbled, could
{ CAUTION: cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to
return the seat to the passenger seating position.
If either seatback is not locked, it could move Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could locked into place.
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked. To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats, if
your vehicle has them, do the following:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or
2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and
on the seat.
pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.

1-26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. Press the automatic Folding the Seatback(s)
seat release button
located on the panel To fold the seatback, do the following:
behind the rear doors. 1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat.
2. Remove all items on the seat cushion.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
Driver’s Side Rear Panel 3. Lift the release lever,
Button shown located on the bottom
rear of the seatback
One press of the button automatically folds the on the outboard side of
seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward. There the seat, and the
will be a slight delay between the folding of the seatback will fold forward.
seatback and the tumbling of the seat.

Third Row Seat

If the vehicle has a third row seat, the seatback(s) can
be folded and the entire seat can be tumbled, or
removed from the vehicle.

1-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Unfolding the Seatback(s) Tumbling the Third Row Seat
To return the seatback to the upright position, do the The seat can be tumbled forward for additional cargo
following: space.
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat. To tumble the seat, do the following:
2. Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the 1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat.
upright position. 2. Make sure the head rests are completely lowered,
there is nothing under, in front of, or on the seat,
and all items are removed from the cupholder
{ CAUTION: and storage bin, if the seat is a two-passenger seat.
3. Fold the seatbacks forward using the instructions
If either seatback is not locked, it could move previously listed under “Folding the Seatbacks”.
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could You will not be able to unlatch the seat from
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always the floor unless the seatback is folded down.
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
4. Unlatch the seat from
are locked.
the floor by lifting the
lever located next
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is to the carrying handle
locked. on the rear of the
seat near the bottom.

5. Lift the rear of the seat up from the floor.

1-28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6. Tilt the seat fully forward to lock it into place. 4. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The
7. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked. seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched
to the floor.
Put the seat in this position only when necessary for
additional cargo space. 5. Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the upright
position.
Returning the Third Row Seat from a
Tumbled Position
{ CAUTION:
To return the seat to the normal seating position, do the
following:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat. forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
2. Make sure there is nothing that could become cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
trapped under the seat. push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
3. Release the seat from the tumbled position by lifting are locked.
the lever located next to the carrying handle at the
bottom rear of the seat. 6. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.

1-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Removing the Third Row Seat Installing the Third Row Seat
To remove the seat, do the following: To install the seat, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat. 1. Open the liftgate to access the rear of the vehicle.
2. Fold the seatback forward using the instructions 2. Slide the front outboard seat wheels into the
listed under “Folding the Seatbacks” previously. track on the floor and roll the seat forward. The front
The seat cannot be removed unless the seatback is latches should lock into place. If the latches do
folded. not lock, try tilting the rear of the seat upward
slightly.
3. Unlatch the seat from
the floor by pulling the 3. Lower the rear of the seat and push down on the
carrying handle, seat to engage the rear floor latches.
located at the rear of
the seat, rearward.
{ CAUTION:
A seat that is not locked into place properly can
move around in a collision or sudden stop. People
in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to lock the
seat into place properly when installing it.

4. Roll the seat out of the vehicle. There is a track in

the floor to guide the seat wheels out of the vehicle. 4. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked
into place. The seatback cannot be raised to the
upright position unless the seat is secured to
the floor.
5. Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the upright
position.

1-30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 { CAUTION: { CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could attached, or twisted will not provide the protection
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they could be seriously injured. After raising the rear
are locked. seatback, always check to be sure that the safety
belts are properly routed and attached, and are
not twisted.
6. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
7. Make sure the safety belts are returned to the
original position over the seatbacks.

1-31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Safety Belts
{ CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
This section of the manual describes how to use inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
safety belts properly. It also describes some things not riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
to do with safety belts. injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is
{ CAUTION: in a seat and using a safety belt properly.

Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot

This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-36 for
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the additional information.
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have a
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive.
are restrained properly too. But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without safety belts, they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!

1-32

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.

Put someone on it.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on

wheels.

1-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
does not stop. a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

1-34

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.

1-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Questions and Answers About Safety Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
Belts home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
am wearing a safety belt? your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety control, such as bad drivers.
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
and get out, is much greater if you are belted. home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
upside down. (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.

1-36

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and infants. If a child will be
riding in the vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-54 or
Infants and Young Children on page 1-57. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know. Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you
would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.

1-37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as

much protection this way.

1-38

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.

A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as

much protection this way.

1-39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.

1-40

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The
belt force would then be applied on the abdomen,
not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes
under the armrests.

A: The belt is over an armrest.

1-41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also,
the belt would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal organs like your
liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should

be worn over the shoulder at all times.

1-42

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.

A: The belt is behind the body.

1-43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

1-44

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder
belt except for the center front passenger position, if
equipped, which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt on
page 1-52 for more information.
The lap-shoulder belts for the first and second row
seating positions are equipped with free-falling latch
plates. If the vehicle has a third row, the lap-shoulder
belts have either free-falling or cinching latch plates.
Use the following pictures to determine the latch
plate style: Cinching Latch Plate

The following instructions explain how to wear a

lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
Free-Falling Latch Plate

1-45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt with a
free-falling latch plate is pulled out all the way, the
child restraint locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go back all the way and
start again.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the
right front seating position may affect the passenger
sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 1-90 for more information.

3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. If

you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the
buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-53.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, for
lap-shoulder belts with cinching latch plates, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling the safety belt until
it can be buckled.

1-46

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section for instructions on use and important safety
information.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The

belt should return to its stowed position.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of
the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the belt and the vehicle.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.

1-47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster Safety Belt Pretensioners
The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
driver and right front passenger positions. outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the safety
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety belts
during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal,
from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
near frontal, or rear crash if the threshold conditions for
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could
pretensioner activation are met. And, if the vehicle has
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can help
Squeeze the buttons (A) tighten the safety belts in a side crash or a rollover event.
on the sides of the height Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
adjuster and move the activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, and
height adjuster to the probably other new parts for the vehicle’s safety
desired position. belt system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash on page 1-99.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides

Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt away
The adjuster can be moved up just by pushing up on from the neck and head.
the shoulder belt guide.
After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to
move it down without squeezing the buttons to
make sure it has locked into position.

1-48

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 There is one guide for each outside passenger position
in the second row seat and the third row, if the vehicle
has one. Here is how to install a comfort guide to the
safety belt:

Third Row

If your vehicle has a third row, remove the guide

from its storage pocket on the side of the seat.
Second Row

1. For the second row, remove the guide from its

storage clip on the interior body.

1-49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. Place the guide over the belt, and insert the two 3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide. The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.

1-50

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 { CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as

described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that the safety belt can be
removed from the guide. Slide the guide into its storage
clip on the interior body or storage pocket on the
side of the seat.

1-51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Lap Belt
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant This part is only for the lap belt. To learn how to wear a
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be lap-shoulder belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-45.
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts. You vehicle may have a center seating position.
When you sit in the center front seating position, you
have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and

the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the along the belt.
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
part of a lap-shoulder belt.
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.

1-52

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the extender will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use
it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The
extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for
securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the
regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown

until the belt is snug.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender
on page 1-53.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if necessary.
If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the
buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle. Be sure
that the latch plate clicks when inserted into the
buckle.

1-53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Child Restraints The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
Older Children belt until the child passes the below fit test:
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
Belt on page 1-45 for more information. If the
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for
length of trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should booster seat.
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide.

1-54

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and { CAUTION:
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face Never do this.
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It
should never be worn over the abdomen, which impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
a crash. belt must be used by only one person at a time.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under

Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-45.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.

1-55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 { CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.

1-56

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes { CAUTION:
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the law in every state in the United States and in the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
every Canadian province says children up to some age
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
children to play with the safety belts.

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for

adults and older children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor
its airbag system is designed for them. Every time
infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should
have the protection provided by appropriate child
restraints.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike
other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

1-57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 { CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will
suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a
person’s arms. An infant should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.

1-58

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 { CAUTION:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint
in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.

1-59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints? { CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types. To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
Selection of a particular restraint should take a crash, infants need complete support. This is
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height, because an infant’s neck is not fully developed
and age but also whether or not the restraint will and its head weighs so much compared with the
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
be used. rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
For most basic types of child restraints, there are so the crash forces can be distributed across the
many different models available. When purchasing a strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a rear-facing child restraints.
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.

1-60

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Child Restraint Systems
{ CAUTION: A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that with the seating surface
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain against the back of
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may the infant.
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body with the
harness.

1-61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle

{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.

A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to

improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
window. must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-65 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.

1-62

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the Where to Put the Restraint
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this According to accident statistics, children and infants are
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
from the manufacturer. seating position.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can We recommend that children and child restraints be
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
is in it. a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint

{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.

1-63

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the CAUTION: (Continued)
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear

{ CAUTION: seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
seriously injured or killed if the right front
in a rear seat.
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-90 for
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a additional information.
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position. { CAUTION:
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags
airbag will not deploy under some unusual if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the
circumstance, even though it is turned off. center front seat. It is always better to secure a
child restraint in a rear seat.
CAUTION: (Continued)

Do not use child restraints in the center front seat

position.

1-64

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When securing a child restraint in a rear seating Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
position, study the instructions that came with your child properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle. safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
the child restraint properly.
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint attached using only the top tether and anchor.
in your vehicle — even when no child is in it.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for The child restraint manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
Children (LATCH) attachments. The following explains how to attach a
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
or in a crash. This system is designed to make Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on and attachments.
the child restraint that are made for use with the
LATCH system.

1-65

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle. A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
position that will accommodate a child restraint with vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
lower attachments (B). restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.

1-66

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for j (Lower Anchor): Seating
use with or without the top tether being attached. Others positions with two lower
require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada, anchors.
the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be attached. Be sure to i (Top Tether Anchor):
read and follow the instructions for your child restraint.
Seating positions with
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can top tether anchors.
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Second Row — Bucket
Locations
j (Lower Anchor): Seating i (Top Tether Anchor):
positions with two lower Seating positions with top
anchors. tether anchors.

i (Top Tether Anchor):

Seating positions with
top tether anchors.

Second Row — 60/40 Third Row — Two

Passenger

1-67

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors. There is
one top tether anchor that
can be used for either the
third row center or driver
side seating position but
not both at the same time.

Third Row — Three

Passenger

For models with a three passenger third row seat, see Second Row Seat — Bucket
the information following for installing a child restraint
with a top tether in the third row, if your vehicle has one.
Never install two top tethers using the same top For models with bucket second row seating, the top
tether anchor. tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of the seat
cushion for each seating position in the second row.
For models with 60/40 second row seating, the rear Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of
right side passenger and center seating positions have the vehicle as the seating position where the child
exposed metal anchors located in the crease between restraint will be placed.
the seatback and the seat cushion.
For models with second row bucket seats, both rear
seating positions have exposed metal anchors located
in the crease between the seatback and the seat
cushion.

1-68

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Second Row Seat — 60/40 Third Row Seat — Two or Three Passenger

For models with 60/40 second row seating, the top For vehicles with a two passenger third row seat, there
tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of the seat is one top tether anchor located at the bottom rear
cushion for each seating position in the second row. of the seat cushion that can be used for the rear driver
Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of side seating position in the third row. Never install
the vehicle as the seating position where the child two top tethers using the same top tether anchor.
restraint will be placed. For vehicles with a three passenger third row seat, there
is one top tether anchor located at the bottom rear of
the seat cushion that can be used for either the third row
center or driver side seating position. Never install
two top tethers using the same top tether anchor.

1-69

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the LATCH System
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
{ CAUTION:
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
seating position. See Where to Put the Restraint anchors, the child restraint will not be able to
on page 1-63 for additional information. protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Install a
LATCH-type child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure
the restraint, following the instructions that came
with the child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.

1-70

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
{ CAUTION: these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety
belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
single anchor. Attaching more than one child buckled. This could damage the safety belt or
restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
or attachment to come loose or even break during stowed position, before folding the seat.
a crash. A child or others could be injured. To
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
crash, attach only one child restraint per anchor. lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
{ CAUTION: instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and 1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so the child restraint to the lower anchors.
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if
your vehicle has one, after the child restraint has
been installed.

1-71

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that If the position you are
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the using does not have a
top tether to the top tether anchor, if the vehicle has headrest or head restraint
one. Refer to the child restraint instructions and and you are using a
the following steps: dual tether, route the tether
2.1. Find the top tether anchor. over the seatback.
2.2. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint If the position you are
and you are using a using has an adjustable
single tether, route the headrest or head restraint
tether over the seatback. and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
around the headrest or
head restraint.

1-72

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If the position you are Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint Seat Position
and you are using a
single tether, raise the When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position,
headrest or head restraint study the instructions that came with the child restraint to
and route the tether make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
under the headrest or head If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
restraint and in between Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-65
the headrest or head for how and where to install the child restraint using
restraint posts. LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using
a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-65 for top
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different tether anchor locations.
directions to be sure it is secure.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.

1-73

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in
the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
Restraint on page 1-63.
The vehicle’s lap-shoulder belts for the first and second
row seating positions are equipped with free-falling
latch plates. If the vehicle has a third row, the
lap-shoulder belts have either free-falling or cinching
latch plates.
Use the following pictures to determine the latch plate
style:
Cinching Latch Plate

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.

Free-Falling Latch Plate

1-74

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 For third row seating positions, with cinching latch 3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
plates, tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed. Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.

1-75

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. For passenger seating positions with a lap-shoulder 5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
belt and a free-falling latch plate, pull the rest of the pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
set the lock. When installing a child restraint using belt back into the retractor. When installing a
a lap-shoulder belt and a cinching latch plate, forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to
skip Step 4 and proceed to Step 5. use your knee to push down on the child restraint as
you tighten the belt.

1-76

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child Securing a Child Restraint in the
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Right Front Seat Position
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-65 for more
information. This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different Put the Restraint on page 1-63.
directions to be sure it is secure.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety which is designed to turn off the right front passenger
belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger
tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it. Sensing System on page 1-90 and Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 3-38 for more information,
Securing a Child Restraint in the including important safety information.

Center Front Seat Position

{ CAUTION:
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags
if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the
center front seat. It is always better to secure a
child restraint in a rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in the center front seat

position.

1-77

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to CAUTION: (Continued)
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear

{ CAUTION: seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
seriously injured or killed if the right front
in a rear seat.
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-90 for
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a additional information.
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
position. page 1-65 for how and where to install the child restraint
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-65 for
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
top tether anchor locations.
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
CAUTION: (Continued) top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.

1-78

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when the vehicle is started.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 3-38.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat. 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder Position the release button on the buckle so that
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions necessary.
will show you how.

1-79

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of 6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
the retractor to set the lock. pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child restraint as
you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.

1-80

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger The vehicle may have the following airbags:
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when • A roof-rail airbag for the driver and passenger
the vehicle is started.
directly behind the driver.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the person seated directly behind that passenger.
Restraint” under Passenger Sensing System on
page 1-90 for more information. • If your vehicle has a third row seat, it will have a
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle third row roof-rail airbag.
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position. All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
Airbag System
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
The vehicle has the following airbags: middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
• A frontal airbag for the driver. on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger. With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.

1-81

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury { CAUTION:
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job. Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
Here are the most important things to know about the blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very
airbag system: close to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would be if you were
{ CAUTION: sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you with airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with possible while still maintaining control of the
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbags vehicle.
are not designed to deploy in every crash. In some Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
crashes safety belts are your only restraint. See door or side windows in seating positions with
When Should an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-86. roof-rail airbags.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.

1-82

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
{ CAUTION: problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-37
for more information.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or Where Are the Airbags?
killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can provide.
Always secure children properly in your vehicle. To
read how, see Older Children on page 1-54 or
Infants and Young Children on page 1-57.

There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the

steering wheel.

1-83

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side. If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right
front passenger, and second row outboard passengers,
they are in the ceiling above the side windows.

1-84

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 { CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag, and
do not attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag
covering.
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do,
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags and a third row
passenger seat, the airbags are located in the ceiling
above the rear windows for the outboard passenger
positions in the third row.

1-85

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When Should an Airbag Inflate? • If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or • If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
help restrain the occupants.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds. frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
For example: airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object does not deform.

1-86

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Your vehicle has a seat position sensor which enables What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
the sensing system to monitor the position of the
driver’s seat. The seat position sensor provides In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
information that is used to determine if the airbags electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
should deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment. inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
Your vehicle may or may not have roof-rail airbags. bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator, the
See Airbag System on page 1-81. Roof-rail airbags are airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes. module.
In addition, these roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact. Roof-rail wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the roof-rail airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling
system’s designed threshold level. The threshold level of the vehicle, near the side windows that have
can vary with specific vehicle design. occupant seating positions.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in rear
impacts. Both roof-rail airbags will deploy when either
side of the vehicle is struck or if the sensing system
predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over, or in
a severe frontal impact.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag
should have inflated simply because of the damage to a
vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. For
frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what the vehicle
hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle
slows down. For roof-rail airbags, deployment is
determined by the location and severity of the side
impact. In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag deployment is
determined by the direction of the roll.

1-87

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How Does an Airbag Restrain? What Will You See After an Airbag
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, Inflates?
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate,
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside so quickly that some people may not even realize an
of the vehicle. airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after they deploy. Some
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety components of the airbag module may be hot for
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the several minutes. For location of the airbag modules,
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-87.
stopping the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags
distribute the force of the impact more evenly over The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
the occupant’s upper body. may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to
seating positions in the first, second, and third rows, if steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving
equipped with a third row seat. The rollover capable the vehicle.
roof-rail airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
full or partial ejection in rollover events, although no
system can prevent all such ejections.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 1-86 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.

1-88

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
{ CAUTION: Additional windshield breakage may also occur
from the right front passenger airbag.
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the • Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle system will not be there to help protect you in
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If another crash. A new system will include airbag
you have breathing problems but cannot get out of modules and possibly other parts. The service
the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following an airbag • The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
deployment, you should seek medical attention. module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 7-16 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-17.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn the
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
airbag system will not work properly. See your
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and
dealer/retailer for service.
turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.

1-89

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Passenger Sensing System The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the The driver airbag and the roof-rail airbags (if equipped)
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag are not affected by the passenger sensing system.
status indicator will be visible on the overhead console The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
when the vehicle is started. are part of the right front passenger seat and safety
belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence
of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the
right front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.
United States Canada We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
will be visible during the system check. If you are seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance, if who are large enough, using safety belts.
equipped, you may not see the system check. When
the system check is complete, either the word ON A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
or OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible. See child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-38. the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

1-90

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag if:
{ CAUTION: • The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be • The system determines an infant is present in a
seriously injured or killed if the right front child restraint.
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the • A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be the seat for a period of time.
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a • Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously system or the passenger sensing system.
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.

1-91

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When the passenger sensing system has turned off the For some children, including children in child restraints,
right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator and for very small adults, the passenger sensing
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off. system may or may not turn off the right front passenger
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-38. frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
on (may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
anytime the system senses that a person of adult
person.
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and { CAUTION:
stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.

If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and

stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-37
for more information, including important safety
information.

1-92

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child 5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the
Restraint vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback
If a child restraint has been installed and the on and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to
indicator is lit: make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing
the child restraint into the seat cushion.
1. Turn the vehicle off.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle. under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or on page 1-2.
seat massagers. 6. Restart the vehicle.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions The passenger sensing system may or may not turn
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and off the airbag for a child in a child restraint depending
refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front upon the child’s seating posture and body build. It is
Seat Position on page 1-77. better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

1-93

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If the Off Indicator is Lit for an If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
Adult-Size Occupant passenger frontal airbag:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front

passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.

1-94

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Additional Factors Affecting System The on indicator may be lit if an object, such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
Operation electronic device, is put on an unoccupied seat. If this is
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the not desired remove the object from the seat.
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in { CAUTION:
the Index for additional information about the importance
of proper restraint use.
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
If the shoulder portion of the belt is pulled out all the between the passenger seat cushion and seatback
way, the child restraint locking feature will be engaged. may interfere with the proper operation of the
This may unintentionally cause the passenger sensing passenger sensing system.
system to turn the airbag off for some adult size
occupants. If this happens, let the belt go back all the
way and start again.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for
your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-96 for more
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.

1-95

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Adding Equipment to Your
Vehicle Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
service manual have information about servicing the from working properly?
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
on page 7-15. frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
{ CAUTION: of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off or pillar garnish trim, overhead console, front
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still sensors, side impact sensors, rollover sensor
inflate during improper service. You can be injured module, or airbag wiring can affect the operation of
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid the airbag system.
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
system for the right front passenger’s position, which
procedures, and make sure the person performing
includes sensors that are part of the passenger’s
work for you is qualified to do so.
seat. The passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GM
covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different
vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat
heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,

1-96

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also Q: What if I added a snow plow? Will it keep the
interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing airbags from working properly?
system. This could either prevent proper deployment
of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger A: We have designed our airbag systems to work
sensing system from properly turning off the properly under a wide range of conditions,
passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing including snow plowing with vehicles that have the
System on page 1-90. optional Snow Plow Prep Package (RPO VYU).
But do not change or defeat the snow plow’s
If you have any questions about this, you should
“tripping mechanism.” If you do, it can damage your
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
snow plow and your vehicle, and it may cause an
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for
airbag inflation.
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2. Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
If your vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 5-80
for additional important information. A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag
wiring.

1-97

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Restraint System Check Airbags
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
Checking the Restraint Systems maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-37 for more information.
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are
anchorages are all working properly.
any opened or broken airbag covers, have the
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. For
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing the location of the airbag modules, see What
its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-87. See your
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. dealer/retailer for service.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See
Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-36 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 5-109.

1-98

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Replacing Restraint System Parts If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH system
After a Crash parts.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was
{ CAUTION: not being used at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not in this section.
properly protect the person using it, resulting in Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
make sure your restraint systems are working stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
properly after a crash, have them inspected and driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-37.
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.

If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new

safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.

1-99

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ✍ NOTES

1-100

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Section 2 Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-3 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-26
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................2-4 New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-26
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Ignition Positions ..........................................2-26
Operation ...................................................2-5 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-28
Remote Vehicle Start ......................................2-8 Starting the Engine .......................................2-28
Doors and Locks ............................................2-10 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ................2-30
Door Locks ..................................................2-10 Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-30
Power Door Locks ........................................2-10 Active Fuel Management™ .............................2-31
Delayed Locking ...........................................2-11 Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-32
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-11 Tow/Haul Mode ............................................2-38
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-11 Four-Wheel Drive ..........................................2-40
Lockout Protection ........................................2-12 Parking Brake ..............................................2-45
Liftgate/Liftglass ............................................2-13 Shifting Into Park ..........................................2-47
Power Liftgate ..............................................2-15 Shifting Out of Park ......................................2-49
Power Assist Steps .......................................2-18 Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-49
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-50
Windows ........................................................2-19 Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................2-51
Power Windows ............................................2-20
Sun Visors ...................................................2-21 Mirrors ...........................................................2-52
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-52
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-22 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ................2-52
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-22 Outside Manual Mirrors ..................................2-52
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer .............2-24 Outside Towing Mirrors ..................................2-53
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-53
Operation .................................................2-24 Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .....................2-54

2-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Section 2 Features and Controls
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................2-54 Storage Areas ................................................2-78
Park Tilt Mirrors ............................................2-55 Glove Box ...................................................2-78
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-55 Cupholders ..................................................2-78
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-55 Center Console Storage .................................2-79
Object Detection Systems ...............................2-56 Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-79
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............2-56 Rear Storage Area ........................................2-80
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) .........................2-58 Rear Seat Armrest ........................................2-80
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) ............................2-62 Cargo Cover ................................................2-80
OnStar® System .............................................2-68 Sunroof .........................................................2-81
Universal Home Remote System ......................2-71
Universal Home Remote System Operation
(With Three Round LED) ............................2-72

2-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Keys

{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.

The key is used for the ignition and all door locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys.
Store this information in a safe place, not in the vehicle.

2-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 See your dealer/retailer if a replacement key or This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
additional key is needed. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle, 1. This device may not cause interference.
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in. 2. This device must accept any interference received,
Be sure you have spare keys. including interference that may cause undesired
If you are locked out of the vehicle, call the Roadside operation of the device.
Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance Program Changes or modifications to this system by other than
on page 7-7. an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
System try this:
• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on far from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy
a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications or snowy weather.
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
1. This device may not cause interference. try again.
2. This device must accept any interference received, • Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery
including interference that may cause undesired Replacement” later in this section.
operation of the device.
• If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for
service.

2-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) The following functions may be available if your vehicle
has the RKE system:
System Operation
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with this
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions feature, press to start the engine from outside the
work up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle. vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
There are other conditions which can affect the Start on page 2-8 for additional information.
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2-4. Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors.
If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC),
the turn signal lamps flash once to indicate locking
has occurred. If enabled through the DIC, the horn
chirps when the lock button is pressed again within
three seconds. See DIC Vehicle Customization (With
DIC Buttons) on page 3-74 for additional information.

Pressing Q arms the content theft-deterrent system.

See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-22.

With Remote Start and With Remote Start and

Liftglass (Without Power Liftgate and
Remote Start Similar) Liftglass (Without
Remote Start Similar)

2-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 K (Unlock): Press once to unlock only the driver m (Liftglass): For vehicles with a liftglass, press and
door. If K is pressed again within three seconds, all hold to unlock the liftglass.
remaining doors unlock. The interior lamps may come
on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is & (Power Liftgate): For vehicles with a power
turned on. liftgate, press and hold to open and close the liftgate.
The taillamps flash and a chime sounds to indicate when
If enabled through the DIC, the turn signal lamps flash the liftgate is opening and closing.
twice to indicate unlocking has occurred. See DIC
Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-74. L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
If enabled through the DIC, the exterior lights turn on to locate the vehicle. The turn signal lamps flash and
briefly if it is dark enough outside. See “APPROACH the horn sounds three times.
LIGHTING” under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC
Buttons) on page 3-74. Press and hold L for more than two seconds to
activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps flash
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter disarms the content and the horn sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds.
theft-deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent The alarm turns off when the ignition is moved to
on page 2-22. ON/RUN or L is pressed again. The ignition must
be in LOCK/OFF for the panic alarm to work.

2-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to this vehicle
will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
can be purchased and programmed through your
dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to this vehicle, all remaining transmitters
must also be reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters will no longer work once the new transmitter
is programmed. The vehicle can have a maximum of
eight transmitters programmed to it. See “Relearn
Remote Key” under DIC Operation and Displays
(With DIC Buttons) on page 3-52 or DIC Operation
and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 3-58 for
instructions on how to program RKE transmitters to the
vehicle. To replace the battery:
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
Battery Replacement inserted into the notch on the side.
Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN 2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC. See
“REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC 3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down.
Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 for additional Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
information. 4. Snap the transmitter back together.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static from
your body could damage the transmitter.

2-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Remote Vehicle Start If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature. This of operation. However, the range may be less while
feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the the vehicle is running.
vehicle. It may also start up the vehicle’s heating or air
conditioning systems and rear window defogger. Normal There are other conditions which can affect the
operation of the system will return after the key is turned performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
to the ON/RUN position. Entry (RKE) System on page 2-4 for additional
information.
If your vehicle has an automatic climate control system,
the climate control system will default to a heating or / (Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE
cooling mode depending on the outside temperatures. transmitter if you have remote start.
If your vehicle does not have an automatic climate control
system, the system will turn on at the setting the vehicle To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
was set to when the vehicle was last turned off. 1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
During a remote start, if your vehicle has an automatic 2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button.
climate control system and heated seats, the heated The vehicle’s doors will lock. Immediately press
seats will turn on during colder outside temperatures and and hold the transmitter’s remote start button until
will shut off when the key is turned to ON/RUN. If your the turn signal lights flash. If you cannot see
vehicle does not have an automatic climate control the vehicle’s lights, press and hold the remote
system, during remote start, you will need to manually start button for two to four seconds. Pressing the
turn the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats on remote start button again after the vehicle has
page 1-7 for additional information. started will turn the engine off.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of remote When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
starters. For example, some laws may require a person on and remain on while the vehicle is running.
using the remote start to have the vehicle in view when
doing so. Check local regulations for any requirements If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut
on remote starting of vehicles. off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has
been done.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.

2-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has Once two remote starts, or a single remote start with
been driven, repeat these steps, while the engine is one time extension has been done, the vehicle must
still running, to extend the engine running time by be started with the key. After the key is removed from
10 minutes. Remote start can be extended one time. the ignition, the vehicle can be remote started again.
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert The vehicle cannot be remote started if the key is in
and turn the key to RUN to drive the vehicle. the ignition, the hood is not closed, or if there is
an emission control system malfunction and the
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
check engine light comes on.
following:
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press Also, the engine will turn off during a remote vehicle
start if the coolant temperature gets too high or if the
the remote start button until the parking lamps
oil pressure gets low.
turn off.
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers. are shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle
• Turn the ignition switch on and then off. start system enabled. The system may be enabled
or disabled through the DIC. See “REMOTE START”
The vehicle can be remote started two separate times
under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)
between driving sequences. The engine will run for
on page 3-74 for additional information. If your vehicle
10 minutes after each remote start.
does not have DIC buttons, see your dealer/retailer
Or, you can extend the engine run time by another to enable or disable the remote vehicle start system.
10 minutes within the first 10 minute remote start time
frame, and before the engine stops. Remote Start Ready
For example, if the lock button and then the remote If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle
start buttons are pressed again after the vehicle start feature, it may have the remote start ready feature.
has been running for five minutes, 10 minutes are This feature allows your dealer/retailer to add the
added, allowing the engine to run for 15 minutes. manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature.
The additional ten minutes are considered a second See your dealer/retailer if you would like to add the
remote vehicle start. manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to your
vehicle.

2-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Doors and Locks There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the key in the driver’s door.
Door Locks
From the inside, use the power door locks or manual
door locks. To lock or unlock the door with the manual
locks, push down or pull up on the manual lock knob.
{ CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Power Door Locks
• Passengers, especially children, can easily On vehicles with power door locks, the switches are
open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. located on the front doors.
When a door is locked, the handle will not open
it. The chance of being thrown out of the " (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.
vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are
not locked. So, all passengers should wear Q (Lock): Remove the key from the ignition and press
safety belts properly and the doors should be to lock the doors.
locked whenever the vehicle is driven.
• Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever
leaving it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked
door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.
Locking your doors can help prevent this from
happening.

2-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Delayed Locking Rear Door Security Locks
When locking the doors with the power lock switch Your vehicle has rear door security locks. These
and a door or the liftgate is open, the doors will lock prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from
five seconds after the last door is closed. You will hear the inside.
three chimes to signal that the delayed locking
feature is in use. The rear door security
locks are located on the
Pressing the power lock switch twice or the lock button inside edge of each
on the RKE transmitter twice will override the delayed
rear door.
locking feature and immediately lock all the doors.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
You can program this feature using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DELAY DOOR LOCK
under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)
on page 3-74.

Programmable Automatic Door

Locks The rear doors must be open to access them.
Vehicles with an automatic lock/unlock feature enable The label showing lock and unlock positions is
you to program the vehicle’s power door locks. You can located near the lock.
program this feature through the Driver Information To set the locks, do the following:
Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC
Buttons) on page 3-74 for more information on DIC 1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
programming. so the slot is in the horizontal position.
2. Close the door.

2-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When you want to open a rear door when the security Lockout Protection
lock is on, do the following:
1. Unlock the door by lifting the rear door manual lock, This feature protects you from locking the key in the
using the power door lock switch, or the Remote vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a front door
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the vehicle is open.
has one. If the driver’s side power door lock switch is pressed
2. Open the door from the outside. when the driver’s door is open and the key is in
the ignition, all of the doors will lock and then the driver’s
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following: door will unlock.
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside. If the passenger’s side power door lock switch is
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it pressed when the front passenger’s door is open and
so the slot is in the vertical position. the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock
and then the front passenger’s door will unlock.

2-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Liftgate/Liftglass
CAUTION: (Continued)

{ CAUTION: • If you have air outlets on or under the

instrument panel, open them all the way.
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftglass or
• If your vehicle has a power liftgate, disable
the power liftgate function.
liftgate open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas
can come into your vehicle. You cannot see or See Engine Exhaust on page 2-50.
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even
death. If your vehicle has a power liftgate, see Power Liftgate
If you must drive with the liftglass or liftgate open, on page 2-15.
or if electrical wiring or other cable connections To unlock the liftgate, use the power door lock switch or
must pass through the seal between the body and press the door unlock button on the Remote Keyless
the liftglass or liftgate: Entry (RKE) transmitter twice. See Remote Keyless
• Make sure all other windows are shut. Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the
recirculation mode off. That will force outside
air into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System on page 3-22 or Dual Automatic
Climate Control System on page 3-24.
CAUTION: (Continued)

2-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To open the entire liftgate, press the touchpad on the
underside of the liftgate handle (B). The vehicle must be
in PARK (P) to open the liftgate. To close the liftgate,
use the pull cup or pull strap as an aid.
The liftgate or liftglass cannot be opened if the rear
wipers are in motion. Attempting to open the liftgate or
liftglass while the rear wipers are in motion will cause
the release of the liftglass or liftgate to delay until
the wipers are moved off the liftglass.
Both the liftglass and liftgate have an electric latch.
If the battery is disconnected or has low voltage,
the liftglass and liftgate will not open. The liftglass
and liftgate will resume operation when the battery
is reconnected and charged.
If the battery is properly connected and has adequate
On vehicles with a liftglass, press the button on the voltage, and the liftgate or liftglass still will not function,
underside of the license pocket applique (A) to open it. your vehicle should be taken to a dealership for
The liftglass can also be opened by pressing the service.
liftglass release button on the RKE.

2-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Power Liftgate
CAUTION: (Continued)
Power Liftgate Operation
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
{ CAUTION: speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven
• If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any
objects that pass through the seal between the For more information about carbon monoxide, see
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine Engine Exhaust on page 2-50.
exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause On vehicles with a power liftgate the button is located
unconsciousness and even death. on the overhead console.
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, or The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to use the power
trunk/hatch open: liftgate feature.
• Close all of the windows. & : Press the top of the button to open or close the
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the power liftgate.
instrument panel.
CAUTION: (Continued) OFF: Press the bottom of the button for manual
operation of the power liftgate.

2-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound when the The power liftgate can be power opened and closed in
power liftgate is moving. the following ways:
• Press and hold the power liftgate button on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter until
{ CAUTION: the liftgate starts moving. Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on page 2-5 for more
You or others could be injured if caught in the path information.
of the power liftgate. Make sure there is no one in • Pressing the liftgate button on the overhead
the way of the liftgate as it is opening and closing. console.
• Pressing the touchpad switch on the outside liftgate
Notice: If you open the liftgate without checking for handle.
overhead obstructions such as a garage door, Pressing the buttons, or touchpad switch a second time
you could damage the liftgate or the liftgate glass. while the liftgate is moving reverses the direction.
Always check to make sure the area above and
behind the liftgate is clear before opening it. l : The liftgate can also be closed by pressing the
power liftgate button next to the liftgate latch.
Press the button a second time during liftgate operation
to reverse that operation.

2-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The power liftgate may be temporarily disabled under Obstacle Detection Features
extreme temperatures, or under low battery conditions.
If this occurs, the liftgate can still be operated manually. If the liftgate encounters an obstacle during a power
open or close cycle, a warning chime will sound and the
If you shift the transmission out of PARK (P) while the liftgate will automatically reverse direction to the full
power function is in progress, the liftgate power function closed or open position. After removing the obstruction,
will continue to completion. If you shift the transmission the power liftgate operation can be used again. If the
out of PARK (P) and accelerate before the power liftgate encounters multiple obstacles on the same power
liftgate latches closed, the liftgate may reverse to the cycle, the power function will deactivate, and you must
open position. Cargo could fall out of the vehicle. Always manually open or close the liftgate. The REAR ACCESS
make sure the power liftgate is closed and latched OPEN warning message in the Driver Information Center
before you drive away. (DIC) will indicate that the liftgate is open. After removing
If you power open the liftgate and the liftgate support the obstructions, manually open the liftgate to the full
struts have lost pressure, the lights will flash and a open position or close the liftgate to the fully closed and
chime will sound. The liftgate will stay open temporarily, latched position. The liftgate will now resume normal
then slowly close. See your dealer/retailer for service power operation.
before using the liftgate. Your vehicle has pinch sensors located on the side
edges of the liftgate. If an object is caught between the
liftgate and the body and presses against this sensor,
the liftgate will reverse direction and open fully.
The liftgate will remain open until it is activated again
or closed manually. Do not force the liftgate open
or closed during a power cycle.

2-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Manual Operation of Power Liftgate Power Assist Steps
To change the liftgate to manual operation, press the Your vehicle may have power assist steps.
switch on the overhead console to the OFF position.
The power assist steps automatically extend from
With the power liftgate disabled and all of the doors beneath the vehicle on the side in which the door has
unlocked, the liftgate can be manually opened and been opened. Once the door is closed, the assist steps
closed. automatically move back under the vehicle after a
To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on the handle brief delay. The vehicle must not be moving for the
on the outside of the liftgate, and lift the gate open. assist steps to extend or retract.
To close the liftgate, use the pull cup to lower the liftgate
and close. The liftgate latch will power close. Always The switch used to disable
close the liftgate before driving. the power assist steps is
located on the center
If the RKE button or the power close button on the liftgate console below the climate
is pressed while power operation is disabled, the lights control system.
will flash three times, but the liftgate will not move.
It is not recommended that you drive with the liftgate
open, however, if you must drive with the liftgate open,
the liftgate should be set to manual operation by
pressing the OFF switch on the center console.
The liftgate has an electric latch. If the battery is
disconnected or has low voltage, the liftgate will not
open. The liftgate will resume operation when the battery The assist steps cannot be disabled in the extended
is reconnected and charged. position.
If the battery is properly connected with adequate
voltage, the switch is not disabled, and the liftgate still will
not function, your vehicle should be taken to a dealer/
retailer for service.

2-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Windows

{ CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.

2-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Power Windows The power window
controls are located on
each of the side doors.

{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Driver’s Side shown
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
When there are children in the rear seat use the The driver’s door also has switches that control the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional passenger and rear windows. The power windows work
operation of the windows. when the ignition has been turned to ACC/ACCESSORY,
ON/RUN or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 2-28.
Press the switch to lower the window.
Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise the
window.

2-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Express-Down Windows Sun Visors
Windows with an express-down feature allow the Pull the sun visor down to block glare. Detach the
windows to be lowered without holding the switch. sun visor from the center mount and slide it along the
Press down fully on the window switch, then release, rod from side-to-side to cover the driver or passenger
to activate the express-down mode. The express-down side of the front window. Swing the sun visor to the side
mode can be canceled at any time by pulling up on to cover the side window. It can be moved along the
the front edge of the switch. rod from side-to-side in this position also.
Window Lockout Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
o (Window Lockout): The window lockout switch is Your vehicle may have lighted visor vanity mirrors
located with the power window switches on the driver’s on both the driver’s and passenger’s sun visors.
door armrest. This feature prevents the rear passenger Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover
windows from operating, except from the driver’s position. to turn the lamps on.
Press the switch to turn the lockout feature on or off.
An indicator light will come on to show the lockout feature
is on.

2-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Theft-Deterrent Systems To arm the theft-deterrent system:

Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. 1. Open the door.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however, 2. Lock the door with the Remote Keyless Entry
they do not make it impossible to steal. (RKE) transmitter or the power door lock switch.
The security light will come on to inform the driver
Content Theft-Deterrent the system is arming. If a door is open when the
doors are locked, the security light will flash.
Your vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent alarm If the delayed locking feature is turned on, the
system. theft-deterrent system will not start the arming
process until the last door is closed and the delay
This is the security light. timer has expired. See Delayed Locking on
page 2-11.
3. Close all doors. The security light should go off
after about 30 seconds. The alarm is not armed
until the security light goes off.
If a locked door is opened without using the RKE
transmitter, a ten second pre-alarm will occur. The horn
will chirp and the lights will flash. If the key is not placed
in the ignition and turned to START or the door is not
unlocked by pressing the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter during the ten second pre-alarm, the alarm will
go off. Your vehicle’s headlamps will flash and the horn
will sound for about 30 seconds, then will turn off to save
the battery power.

2-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The theft-deterrent system will not activate if the doors Testing the Alarm
are locked with the vehicle’s key or the manual door lock.
It activates only if you use the power door lock switch with To test the alarm:
the door open or the RKE transmitter. You should also 1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct and open the driver’s door.
ignition key if the alarm has been set off.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
To avoid setting off the alarm by accident: power door lock switch while the door is open, or
• If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent with the RKE transmitter.
system, the vehicle should be locked with the 3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
door key after the doors are closed. the security light to go out.
• Always unlock the doors with the RKE transmitter. 4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
Unlocking a door any other way will set off the with the manual door lock and open the door.
alarm if it is armed. This should set off the alarm.
If you set off the alarm by accident, press unlock on the While the alarm is set, the power door unlock switch will
RKE transmitter or place the key in the ignition and not work.
turn it to START to turn off the alarm. The alarm will
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
not stop if you try to unlock a door any other way.
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works.
The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse,
see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-115.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do
not flash, the vehicle should be serviced by your
dealer/retailer.

2-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Immobilizer Operation
The PASS-Key III+ system operates on a radio Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
frequency subject to Federal Communications Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. The system is automatically armed when the key
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: is removed from the ignition.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference. The system is automatically disarmed when the key is
2. This device must accept any interference received, turned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or START
including interference that may cause undesired from the LOCK/OFF position.
operation. You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. The security light will come on if there is a problem
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
1. This device may not cause interference. When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
2. This device must accept any interference received, is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
including interference that may cause undesired starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
operation of the device. the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in the vehicle.

2-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If the engine does not start and the security light on To program the new additional key:
the instrument panel cluster comes on when trying to
start the vehicle, there may be a problem with your 1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try again. 2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in the
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not
to be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, start, see your dealer/retailer for service.
you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses 3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-115. If the engine still LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs
4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be
the ON/RUN position within five seconds of turning
faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service the
the ignition to the LOCK/OFF position in Step 3.
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. In an
emergency, contact Roadside Assistance. The security light will turn off once the key has been
programmed.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to learn
the transponder value of a new or replacement key. 5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle. be programmed.
The following procedure is for programming additional If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, see
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer or a PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have keys
made and programmed to the system. Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.

2-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Starting and Operating Your Ignition Positions
Vehicle The ignition switch has
four different positions.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in ON/RUN
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake must be applied.
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
a Trailer on page 4-50 for the trailer towing
capabilities of the vehicle and more information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can
be gradually increased.

2-26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition. It also C (ON/RUN): This position can be used to operate the
locks the transmission on automatic transmission electrical accessories and to display some instrument
vehicles. The key can be removed in LOCK/OFF. panel cluster warning and indicator lights. The switch
stays in this position when the engine is running.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the shift
The transmission is also unlocked in this position
lever must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch
on automatic transmission vehicles.
to LOCK/OFF.
The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center. If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/
If this happens, move the steering wheel from right RUN position with the engine off, the battery could be
to left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. drained. You may not be able to start the vehicle if the
If this doesn’t work, then the vehicle needs service. battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in D (START): This is the position that starts the engine.
the ignition could cause damage to the switch or When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition
break the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is switch returns to ON/RUN for driving.
all the way in, and turn it only with your hand. A warning tone will sound when the driver door is
If the key cannot be turned by hand, see your opened, the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or
dealer/retailer. LOCK/OFF and the key is in the ignition.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets things like
the radio and the windshield wipers operate while
the engine is off. Use this position if the vehicle must
be pushed or towed.

2-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Starting the Engine
The following vehicle accessories can be used for up to If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
10 minutes after the engine is turned off: Hybrid manual for more information.
• Audio System Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). The
engine will not start in any other position. To restart the
• Power Windows
engine when the vehicle is are already moving, use
• OnStar® System (if equipped) N (Neutral) only.
• Sunroof (if equipped) Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
These features work when the key is in ON/RUN or vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage
ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, the windows and sunroof the vehicle is stopped.
continue to work up to 10 minutes until any door
is opened. The radio continues to work for up to
10 minutes or until the driver door is opened.

2-28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Starting Procedure 2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to
of the key. The idle speed will go down as the engine the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
gets warm. Do not race the engine immediately after START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait
starting it. Operate the engine and transmission at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the
gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all cranking motor to cool down. When the engine starts,
moving parts. let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking briefly but then stops again, do the same thing.
System. This feature assists in starting the engine This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
and protects components. If the ignition key is turned Do not race the engine immediately after starting it.
to the START position, and then released when the Operate the engine and transmission gently until
engine begins cranking, the engine will continue the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.
If the engine does not start and the key is held in Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
START for many seconds, cranking will be stopped electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage. or accessories, you could change the way the
To prevent gear damage, this system also prevents engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
cranking if the engine is already running. Engine check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the
cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
switch to the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF damage would not be covered by the vehicle
position. warranty.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of

time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.

2-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal The vehicle may have a memory function which lets
pedal settings be saved and recalled. See Memory Seat,
On vehicles with this feature, you can change the Mirrors, and Pedals on page 1-8 for more information.
position of the throttle and brake pedals.
No adjustment to the pedals can be made when the Engine Coolant Heater
vehicle is in R (Reverse) or while using the cruise The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting
control. and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (− 18°C). Vehicles
The switch used to adjust with an engine heater should be plugged in at least
the pedals is located on four hours before starting. An internal thermostat in
the instrument panel below the plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
the climate control engine coolant heater operation at temperatures
system. above 0°F (−18°C).

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater

1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment, near the power steering fluid
reservoir.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC
Press the arrow at the bottom of the switch to move the
outlet.
pedals closer to your body. Press the arrow at the top of
the switch to move the pedals away from your body.
Before you start driving, fully press the brake pedal to
confirm the adjustment is right for you. While driving,
make only small adjustments.

2-30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Active Fuel Management™
{ CAUTION: Vehicles with V8 engines may have Active Fuel
Management™. This system allows the engine to
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could operate on either all or half of its cylinders, depending
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of on the driving conditions.
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. When less power is required, such as cruising at a
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into constant vehicle speed, the system will operate in the
a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC half cylinder mode, allowing the vehicle to achieve better
outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty fuel economy. When greater power demands are
three-prong extension cord rated for at least required, such as accelerating from a stop, passing,
or merging onto a freeway, the system will maintain
15 amps.
full-cylinder operation.
If your vehicle has an Active Fuel Management™
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and indicator, see DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
store the cord as it was before to keep it away Buttons) on page 3-52 or DIC Operation and Displays
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be (Without DIC Buttons) on page 3-58 for more information
damaged. on using this display.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in
the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the
best advice on this.

2-31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Automatic Transmission Operation
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
If the vehicle is has an automatic transmission, it has an
electronic shift position indicator within the instrument
panel cluster. This display comes on when the ignition
key is turned to the ON/RUN position. Hevay Duty 6-Speed Automatic Transmission
There are several different positions for the shift lever. Shown (Light Duty Similar)

See “Range Selection Mode” later in this section.

P (Park): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the
best position to use when starting the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily. When parked on a
hill, especially when the vehicle has a heavy load, you
might notice an increase in the effort to shift out of
P (Park). See Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
under Shifting Into Park on page 2-47 for more
information.

Hydra-Matic® 4-Speed
Automatic Transmission

2-32

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 { CAUTION: { CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift If you have Four-Wheel Drive, the vehicle will
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake be free to roll — even if the shift lever is in
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. P (Park) — if the transfer case is in Neutral.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear,
running unless you have to. If you have left the Two-Wheel Drive High or Four-Wheel Drive
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. High or Four-Wheel Drive Low — not in Neutral.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the See Shifting Into Park on page 2-47.
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
Park on page 2-47. If you are pulling a trailer, see Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
Towing a Trailer on page 4-50. moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission,
see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow
on page 4-31.

2-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the the best fuel economy. If you need more power for
vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also, passing, and you are:
use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed. • Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
{ CAUTION: • Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
By doing this, the vehicle shifts down to the next
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
gear and has more power.
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could D (Drive) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying a
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for off-road
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear driving. You might want to shift the transmission to a
lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often.
while the engine is running at high speed.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding. See Skidding under
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with Loss of Control on page 4-11.
the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is
not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.

2-34

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The vehicle has a shift stabilization feature that adjusts M (Manual Mode): This position is available on
the transmission shifting to the current driving conditions vehicles with the Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed transmission.
in order to reduce rapid upshifts and downshifts. This shift It lets drivers select the range of gears appropriate
stabilization feature is designed to determine, before for current driving conditions. If the vehicle has
making an upshift, if the engine is able to maintain vehicle this feature, see Range Select Mode (Hydra-Matic®
speed by analyzing things such as vehicle speed, throttle 6-Speed transmission) later in this section.
position, and vehicle load. If the shift stabilization feature
determines that a current vehicle speed cannot be 3 (Third): This position is also used for normal driving.
maintained, the transmission does not upshift and instead It reduces vehicle speed more than D (Drive) without
holds the current gear. In some cases, this could appear using the brakes. You might choose 3 (Third) instead of
to be a delayed shift, however the transmission is D (Drive) when driving on hilly, winding roads, when
operating normally. towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between gears
and when going down a steep hill.
The vehicle’s transmission uses adaptive shift controls.
Adaptive shift controls continually compares key shift 2 (Second): This position reduces vehicle speed
parameters to pre-programmed ideal shifts stored in the even more than 3 (Third) without using the brakes.
transmissions computer. The transmission constantly You can use 2 (Second) on hills. It can help control
makes adjustments to improve vehicle performance vehicle speed as you go down steep mountain roads,
according to how the vehicle is being used, such as with but then you would also want to use the brakes off
a heavy load or when the temperature changes. During and on.
this adaptive shift control process, shifting might feel
different as the transmission determines the best If you manually select 2 (Second) in an automatic
settings. transmission, the transmission will start in second gear.
You can use this feature for reducing the speed of
When temperatures are very cold, the Hydra-Matic® the rear wheels when you are trying to start the vehicle
6-Speed transmission’s gear shifting could be delayed from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
providing more stable shifts until the engine warms
up. Shifts could be more noticeable with a cold
transmission. This difference in shifting is normal.

2-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1 (First): For the Hydra-Matic® 4-Speed transmission Range Selection Mode (Hydra-Matic®
this position reduces vehicle speed even more than
2 (Second) without using the brakes. You can use it 6-Speed Transmission)
on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift
lever is put in 1 (First) while the vehicle is moving
forward, the transmission does not shift into first gear
until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
For a Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed transmission, this position
reduces vehicle speed without using the brakes.
You can use it for major/severe downgrades and
off-road driving where the vehicle would otherwise
accelerate due to steepness of grade. When you shift
to 1 (First) it provides the lowest gear appropriate to
the vehicle’s current road speed and continues to
downshift as the vehicle slows, eventually downshifting
to 1 (First) gear.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal Base trim shown (uplevel similar)
may damage the transmission. The repair will not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do The vehicle may have a Range Selection Mode.
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the The Range Selection Mode helps control the vehicle’s
brakes to hold the vehicle in place. transmission and vehicle speed while driving down hill
or towing a trailer by letting you select a desired range of
gears.

2-36

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To use this feature, do the following: While using Range Selection Mode, cruise control and
1. Move the shift lever to M (Manual Mode). the Tow/Haul mode can be used.

2. Press the plus/minus buttons, located on the Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle
steering column shift lever, to select the desired in one place on a hill using only the accelerator
range of gears for the current driving conditions. pedal may damage the transmission. The repair
will not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If you
When M (Manual Mode) is selected a number displays are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a
next to the M, indicating the current gear. hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
This number is the highest gear that can be used.
However, the vehicle can automatically shift to lower Low Traction Mode
gears as it adjusts to driving conditions. This means If the vehicle has the Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed Automatic
that all gears below that number are available. When Transmission, it has a Low Traction Mode that assists
5 (Fifth) is selected, 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears in vehicle acceleration when road conditions are
are automatically shifted by the vehicle, but 6 (Sixth) slippery, such as with ice or snow. While the vehicle is
cannot be used until the plus/minus button located at a stop, select the second gear range using Range
on the steering column lever is used to change to Selection Mode. This will limit torque to the wheels after
the gear. it detects wheel slip, preventing the tires from spinning.
Grade Braking is not available when Range Selection
Mode is active. See Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-38.

2-37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tow/Haul Mode When Tow/Haul mode is
selected the Tow/Haul
indicator light will come on.

The Tow/Haul mode works with the Autoride® feature,

if the vehicle has this, to enhance the ride when
trailering or with a loaded vehicle. See Autoride® on
page 4-50.

The vehicle has a Tow/Haul mode. The selector

button is located on the end of the column shift lever.
You can use this feature to assist when towing or
hauling a heavy load or if there is a need to charge a
battery installed in a trailer. See Towing a Trailer
on page 4-50 for more information.

2-38

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Grade Braking (Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed Cruise Grade Braking (Hydra-Matic®
Automatic Transmission) 6-Speed Automatic Transmission)
The Grade Braking shift modes can be activated by Cruise Grade Braking assists when driving on a downhill
pressing the button on the end of the shift control lever. grade. It maintains vehicle speed by automatically
While in Range Selection Mode, Grade Braking is implementing a shift schedule that uses the engine
deactivated allowing the driver to select a desired range and the transmission to slow the vehicle. Cruise Grade
of gears. Braking operates while Cruise Control is engaged in
Grade Braking is only active while the Tow/Haul Mode is Tow/Haul mode to assist in maintaining vehicle speed
selected and you are not in the Range Selection Mode. under loaded vehicle conditions. It utilizes vehicle
See “Tow/Haul Mode listed previously and Automatic acceleration and deviation from desired speed to
determine the correct gear for the operating condition.
Transmission Operation on page 2-32 for more
information on the Range Selection Mode. Grade Braking If vehicle speed is above the desired speed the
assists in maintaining desired vehicle speeds when transmission will downshift to slow the vehicle.
If vehicle speed is near or below desired speed the
driving on downhill grades by automatically implementing
a shift schedule that utilizes the engine and transmission trans will upshift, allowing vehicle speed to increase.
to slow the vehicle. This reduces wear on the braking While in the Range Select Mode (RSM) mode, Cruise
system and increases control of the vehicle. Grade Grade Braking is not available.
Braking monitors vehicle speed, acceleration, engine
See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-32.
torque and brake pedal usage. Using this information,
it detects when the truck is on a downhill grade and the
driver desires to slow the vehicle by pressing the brake.
Also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-50 for more
information.

2-39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Four-Wheel Drive Automatic Transfer Case
If the vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send the The transfer case knob is
engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra located to the left of the
traction. Read the following before using four-wheel instrument panel cluster.
drive.
Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in
Four-Wheel-Drive High or Four-Wheel-Drive Low for
an extended period of time may cause premature
wear on your vehicle’s powertrain. Do not drive on
clean, dry pavement in Four-Wheel-Drive High or
Four-Wheel-Drive Low for extended periods of time.
While driving on clean dry pavement and during tight
turns, you may experience a vibration in the steering
system. Use this dial to shift into and out of four-wheel drive.

The vehicle has StabiliTrak®. Shifting into You can choose among five driving settings:
Four-Wheel-Drive Low will turn Traction Control Indicator lights in the switches show you which setting
and StabiliTrak® off. See StabiliTrak® System on you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when
page 4-6. you turn on the ignition and the last chosen setting will
stay on. If the lights do not come on, you should take the
Front Axle vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service. An indicator
The front axle engages and disengages automatically light will flash while shifting. It will stay on when the shift is
when you shift the transfer case. Some delay for completed. If for some reason the transfer case cannot
the axle to engage or disengage is normal. make a requested shift, it will return to the last chosen
setting.

2-40

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This setting is used The vehicle has StabiliTrak®. Shifting into
for driving in most street and highway situations. Four-Wheel-Drive Low will turn Traction Control and
The front axle is not engaged in two-wheel drive. StabiliTrak® off. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6.
This setting also provides the best fuel economy.
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive): This setting is
ideal for use when road surface traction conditions are
{ CAUTION:
variable. When driving your vehicle in AUTO, the front
axle is engaged, but the vehicle’s power is primarily Shifting the transfer case to N (Neutral) can cause
sent to the rear wheels. When the vehicle’s software the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in
determines a need for more traction, the system will P (Park). You or someone else could be seriously
transfer more power to the front wheels. Driving in injured. Be sure to set the parking brake before
this mode results in slightly lower fuel economy than placing the transfer case in N (Neutral). See
Two-Wheel Drive High. Parking Brake on page 2-45.
4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use the four-wheel high
position when you need extra traction, such as on snowy N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case
or icy roads or in most off-road situations. This setting to N (Neutral) only when towing the vehicle.
also engages your front axle to help drive the vehicle. See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-43
This is the best setting to use when plowing snow. or Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-43 for more
information.
4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This setting also engages
the front axle and delivers extra torque. You may never If the SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE message stays on,
need this setting. It sends maximum power to all four you should take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer
wheels. You might choose Four-Wheel Drive Low if you for service. See “SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE message”
are driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud, deep snow, under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64.
and while climbing or descending steep hills.

2-41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive High or You must wait for the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive) light to stop flashing and remain on before shifting
the transmission into gear.
Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel High or AUTO position.
This can be done at any speed, except when shifting Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
from Four-Wheel Drive Low. The indicator light will the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light has
flash while shifting. It will remain on when the shift is stopped flashing could damage the transfer case.
completed. To help avoid damaging the vehicle, always wait for
the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light to stop
Shifting Into Two-Wheel Drive High flashing before shifting the transmission into gear.
Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel High position. The vehicle may have significant engagement noise
This can be done at any speed, except when shifting and bump when shifting between Four-Wheel Drive Low
from Four-Wheel Drive Low. and Four-Wheel Drive High ranges or from N (Neutral)
while the engine is running.
See shifting out of Four-Wheel Drive Low later in this
section for more information. If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel Drive Low
position when the vehicle is in gear and/or moving,
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive Low the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light will flash for
When Four-Wheel Low is engaged, vehicle speed 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless the vehicle
should be kept below 45 mph (72 km/h). Extended is moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and the transmission
high-speed operation in 4L may damage or shorten is in N (Neutral). After 30 seconds the transfer case
the life of the drivetrain. will shift to Four-Wheel Drive High mode.
To shift to the Four-Wheel Drive Low position, the
ignition must be in ON/RUN and the vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with
the transmission in N (Neutral). The preferred method
for shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Low is to have
the vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h).
Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel Drive Low position.

2-42

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Shifting Out of Four-Wheel Drive Low If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel Drive High,
AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High switch position when
To shift from Four-Wheel Drive Low to Four-Wheel the vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the Four-Wheel
Drive High, AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High, the vehicle Drive High, AUTO or Two-Wheel Drive High indicator
must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) light will flash for 30 seconds but will not complete
with the transmission in N (Neutral) and the ignition the shift unless the vehicle is moving less than 3 mph
in ON/RUN. The preferred method for shifting out of (5 km/h) and the transmission is in N (Neutral).
Four-Wheel Drive Low is to have your vehicle moving
1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to the Shifting into Neutral
Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High
position. You must wait for the Four-Wheel Drive High, To shift the transfer case to N (Neutral) do the following:
AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High indicator light to stop 1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will
flashing and remain on before shifting the transmission not roll.
into gear.
2. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before pedal. See Parking Brake on page 2-45 for more
the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light has information.
stopped flashing could damage the transfer case.
To help avoid damaging the vehicle, always wait for 3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light to stop 4. Put the transmission in N (Neutral).
flashing before shifting the transmission into gear. 5. Shift the transfer case to Two-Wheel Drive High.
The vehicle may have significant engagement noise 6. Turn the transfer case dial clockwise to N (Neutral)
and bump when shifting between Four-Wheel Drive Low until it stops and hold it there until the N (Neutral)
and Four-Wheel Drive High ranges or from N (Neutral) light starts blinking. This will take at least
while the engine is running. 10 seconds. Then slowly release the dial to the
Four-Wheel Drive Low position. The N (Neutral)
light will come on when the transfer case shift to
N (Neutral) is complete.

2-43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7. If the engine is running, verify that the transfer case 3. Turn the transfer case dial to the desired transfer
is in N (Neutral) by shifting the transmission to case shift position (Two-Wheel Drive High,
R (Reverse) for one second, then shift the Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO).
transmission to D (Drive) for one second. After the transfer case has shifted out of N (Neutral),
8. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY, which will the N (Neutral) light will go out.
turn the engine off. 4. Release the parking brake prior to moving the
9. Place the transmission shift lever in P (Park). vehicle.
10. Release the parking brake prior to moving the Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
vehicle. the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light has
11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. stopped flashing could damage the transfer case.
To help avoid damaging the vehicle, always wait for
Shifting Out of Neutral the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light to stop
flashing before shifting the transmission into gear.
To shift out of N Neutral do the following:
5. Start the engine and shift the transmission to
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
the desired position.
pedal.
Excessively shifting the transfer case into or out of the
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off,
different modes may cause the transfer case to enter the
and shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
shift protection mode. This will protect the transfer case
from possible damage and will only allow the transfer
case to respond to one shift per 10 seconds. The transfer
case may stay in this mode for up to three minutes.

2-44

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Parking Brake A chime sounds and the warning light flashes when the
parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving at
least 5 mph (8 km/h).
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Then pull the bottom edge of the lever with
the parking brake symbol, located above the parking
brake pedal.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light goes off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-50.
For vehicles with a release handle, set the parking
brake by holding the regular brake pedal down, then
pushing down the parking brake pedal.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on. See Brake System Warning Light
on page 3-40.

2-45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
come on. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 3-40.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down, then push down momentarily on the parking
brake pedal until you feel the pedal release. Slowly
pull your foot up off the park brake pedal. If the parking
brake is not released when you begin to drive, the
brake system warning light will flash and a chime will
sound warning you that the parking brake is still on.
For vehicles without a release handle, set the parking
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see
brake by holding the regular brake pedal down,
Towing a Trailer on page 4-50.
then pushing down the parking brake pedal.

2-46

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Shifting Into Park 1. Hold the brake pedal down, then set the parking
brake.
See Parking Brake on page 2-45 for more
information.
{ CAUTION:
2. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position by
pulling the shift lever toward you and moving it up
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the as far as it will go.
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
3. Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have left
in N (Neutral).
the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the 4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
vehicle will not move, even when you are on 5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your
With four-wheel drive, if the transfer case is in hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
N (Neutral), the vehicle will be free to roll, even if
the shift lever is in P (Park). So, be sure the transfer
case is in a drive gear — not in N (Neutral). If you
are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-50.

2-47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure your vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking brake
Running is firmly set before you leave it. After you move the shift
lever into P (Park), hold the regular brake pedal down.
Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from
{ CAUTION: P (Park) without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it
means that the shift lever was not fully locked into
P (Park).
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly Torque Lock
if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set. If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into P (Park) properly, the weight of
If you have four-wheel drive and the transfer case is the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in N (Neutral), the vehicle will be free to roll, even if in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
the shift lever is in P (Park). So be sure the transfer shift lever out of P (Park). This is called torque lock.
case is in a drive gear — not in N (Neutral). To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into P (Park) properly before you leave the
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine driver seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park
running, it could overheat and even catch fire. on page 2-47.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave the
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
vehicle with the engine running unless you have to. P (Park) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, then
you will be able to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).

2-48

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Shifting Out of Park If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Ease the pressure on the shift lever.
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to: 2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever all the way into P (Park).
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift
lever is in P (Park) with the shift lever button fully 3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
released, and If you are still having a problem shifting, then have the
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of vehicle serviced soon.
P (Park), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal Parking Over Things That Burn
is applied.
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
{ CAUTION:
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery. parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
See Jump Starting on page 5-44 for more information.
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
To shift out of P (Park) use the following: can burn.
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Move the shift lever to the desired position.

2-49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Engine Exhaust
CAUTION: (Continued)

{ CAUTION: • The vehicle’s exhaust system has been

modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
• There are holes or openings in the vehicle
body from damage or after-market
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO modifications that are not completely sealed.
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation • Drive it only with the windows
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that completely down.
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes). • Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
• The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different. Never park the vehicle with the engine running in
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building
• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or that has no fresh air ventilation.
damage.
CAUTION: (Continued)

2-50

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Running the Vehicle While Parked
CAUTION: (Continued)
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle
when the engine is running unless you have to.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
{ CAUTION: can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor when you are on fairly level ground, always set
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may the parking brake and move the shift lever to
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon P (Park).
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has
no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see { CAUTION:
Engine Exhaust on page 2-50.

Four-wheel drive vehicles with the transfer case in

N (Neutral) will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
automatic transmission shift lever is in P (Park). So,
{ CAUTION: be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not in
N (Neutral). Always set the parking brake.
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park on page 2-47.
CAUTION: (Continued)
If pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-50.

2-51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Automatic dimming reduces the glare from the
Manual Rearview Mirror headlamps of the vehicle behind you. The dimming
feature comes on and the indicator light illuminates
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move each time the ignition is turned to start.
it for a clearer view behind your vehicle. Adjust the
mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind you. Cleaning the Mirror
Push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it for Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror.
nighttime use. Use a soft towel dampened with water.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror Outside Manual Mirrors

The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside
Adjust the outside mirror so that the side of the vehicle
rearview mirror.
and the area behind are seen.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three additional control
buttons for the OnStar® system. See your dealer/retailer Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, push
for more information about OnStar® and how to
the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to
subscribe to it. See OnStar® System on page 2-68 for
return to its original position.
more information about the services OnStar® provides.
Using hood-mounted air deflectors and add-on convex
O (On/Off): Press to turn the dimming feature on mirror attachments could decrease mirror performance.
or off.
The vehicle may also have a Rear Vision Camera (RVC).
See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on page 2-62 for more
information.
If the vehicle has RVC, the O (On/Off) button for turning
the automatic dimming feature on or off will not be
available.

2-52

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Outside Towing Mirrors Outside Power Mirrors
Vehicles with outside
power mirrors have the
controls on the driver door
armrest.

If the vehicle has towing mirrors, they can be adjusted To adjust each mirror:
for a clearer view of the objects behind you. Manually
pull out the mirror head to extend it for better visibility 1. Press (A) or (B) to select the driver or passenger
when towing a trailer. side mirror.
Manually fold the mirrors forward or rearward. The lower 2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control
portion of the mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.
surface is curved to see more from the driver seat.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the
The convex mirror can be adjusted manually to
vehicle and the area behind it can be seen.
the driver preferred position for better vision.
4. Press either (A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror.
The mirror may have a turn signal arrow that flashes in
the direction of the turn or lane change. The mirrors may also include a memory function that
works with the memory seats. See Memory Seat,
Mirrors, and Pedals on page 1-8 for more information.

2-53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors
going through an automatic car wash. To fold, push the
mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to Reset the power foldaway mirrors if:
return to its original position. • The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while
folding.
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors • They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.
Vehicles with outside • The mirrors shake and flutter at normal driving
power foldaway mirrors speeds.
have the controls located
on the driver door Fold and unfold them one time using the mirror controls
armrest. to reset them to their normal position.
Turn Signal Indicator
The vehicle may have a turn signal indicator on the
mirror. An arrow on the mirror flashes in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
Ground Illumination Lamps
The mirrors may also include ground illumination lamps in
the base of the mirror. These lamps help to see the area
near the base of the front doors when it is dark out.
Mirror Adjustment
1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out to the driving Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
position. Vehicles with this feature have a driver outside
2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the folded mirror that adjusts for the glare of headlamps behind
position. you. See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror on
page 2-52 for more information.

2-54

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Park Tilt Mirrors Outside Heated Mirrors
Vehicles with the memory package have a passenger For vehicles with heated mirrors:
and/or driver mirror that tilts to a preselected position
when the vehicle is in R (Reverse). This feature lets the < (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the
driver view the curb when parallel parking. The mirror(s) mirrors.
return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Automatic
out of R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned off. Climate Control System on page 3-24 or Climate Control
Turn this feature on or off through the Driver Information System on page 3-22 for more information.
Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Customization (With
DIC Buttons) on page 3-74 for more information. Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
Outside Convex Mirror system, see Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on page 2-58.

{ CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things, like other
vehicles, look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could
hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex

mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.

2-55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Object Detection Systems
CAUTION: (Continued)
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
If you do not use proper care before and while
Assist (URPA) backing; vehicle damage, injury, or death could
For vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist occur. Even with URPA, always check behind the
(URPA) system, it operates at speeds less than 5 mph vehicle before backing up. While backing, be sure
(8 km/h), and assists the driver with parking and to look for objects and check the vehicle’s mirrors.
avoiding objects while in R (Reverse). The sensors
on the rear bumper are used to detect the distance to
an object up to 8 feet (2.5 m) behind the vehicle, and The display is located near
at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) off the ground. the passenger side rear
window and can be seen
by looking over your right
{ CAUTION: shoulder.

The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)

system does not replace driver vision. It cannot
detect:
• objects that are below the bumper,
underneath the vehicle, or if they are too
close or far from the vehicle URPA uses three color-coded lights to provide distance
• children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets. and system information.
CAUTION: (Continued)

2-56

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How the System Works The following describes what will occur with the URPA
display as the vehicle gets closer to a detected object:
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved into R (Reverse). The rear display briefly Description English Metric
illuminates to indicate the system is working.
amber light 8 ft 2.5 m
URPA operates only at speeds less than 5 mph amber/amber lights 40 in 1.0 m
(8 km/h). If the vehicle is above this speed, the red
amber/amber/red lights
light on the rear display will flash. and continuous beeping 23 in 0.6 m
To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches for five seconds
(25.4 cm) off the ground and below liftgate level. amber/amber/red lights
Objects must also be within 8 feet (2.5 m) from the flashing and continuous 1 ft 0.3 m
rear bumper. This distance may be less during warmer beeping for five seconds
or humid weather.
A single beep will sound the first time an object is The system can be
detected between 40 inches (1 m) and 8 feet (2.5 m) disabled by pressing the
away. Beeping will occur continuously when the vehicle rear park aid disable button
is at 23 inches (0.6 m) or closer to an object. located next to the radio.

The indicator light will come on and PARK ASSIST OFF

displays on the Driver Information Center (DIC) to
indicate that URPA is off, see DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-64 for information about clearing
the message.

2-57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When the System Does Not Seem to Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
Work Properly The vehicle may have a Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
If the URPA system will not activate due to a temporary system. Read this entire section before using the
condition, the message PARK ASSIST OFF will be system.
displayed on the DIC and a red light will be shown on The SBZA system operates on a radio frequency
the rear URPA display when the shift lever is moved into subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
R (Reverse). This occurs under the following conditions: Rules and with Industry Canada.
• The driver disables the system. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
• The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep the Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
vehicle’s rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
ice and slush. For cleaning instructions, see
Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-110. 2. This device must accept any interference received,
• A trailer was attached to the vehicle, or a bicycle or including interference that may cause undesired
an object was hanging out of the liftgate during the operation.
last drive cycle, the red light may illuminate in This device complies with RSS-310 of Industry Canada.
the rear display. Once the attached object is Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
removed, URPA will return to normal operation.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
• A tow bar is attached to the vehicle.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
• The vehicle’s bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle including interference that may cause undesired
to your dealer/retailer to repair the system. operation.
• Other conditions may affect system performance, Frequency of operation: 24.05GHz – 24.25GHz
such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the
compression of air brakes on a very large truck. Field Strength: Not greater than 2.5V/m peak
(0.25V/m average) at a distance of 3m
If the system is still disabled, after driving forward at
least 15 mph (25 km/h), take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.

2-58

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV When the system detects a vehicle in the side blind
interference caused by unauthorized modifications to zone, amber SBZA displays light up in the side mirrors.
this equipment. Such modifications could void the user’s This indicates that it may be unsafe to change lanes.
authority to operate the equipment. Before making a lane change, always check the SBZA
display, check the outside and rearview mirrors, look
over your shoulder for vehicles and hazards, and
{ CAUTION: use the turn signal.

SBZA is only a lane changing aid and does not

replace driver vision. SBZA does not detect:
• Vehicles outside the side blind zones which
may be rapidly approaching.
• Pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Failure to use proper care when changing lanes
may result in damage to the vehicle, injury, or
death. Always check the outside and rearview
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use the
turn signal before changing lanes.

2-59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SBZA Detection Zones How the System Works
The SBZA sensor covers a zone of approximately one
lane over from both sides of the vehicle, 11 ft. or
3.5 m. This zone starts at each side mirror and goes
back approximately 16 ft. (5.0 m). The height of the zone
is approximately between 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) and 6 ft. (2.0 m)
off the ground.
Use caution while changing lanes when towing a trailer,
as the SBZA detection zones do not change when a Left Side Mirror Display Right Side Mirror
trailer is towed. Display

When the vehicle is started, both outside mirror displays

will briefly come on to indicate that the system is
operating. When the vehicle is moving forward, the left or
right side mirror SBZA display will light up if a vehicle is
detected in that blind zone. If the turn signal is activated
and a vehicle is also detected on the same side, the
SBZA display will flash to give you extra warning not to
change lanes.
SBZA displays do not come on while the vehicle is
approaching or passing other vehicles. At speeds
greater then 20 mph (32 km/h), SBZA displays may
come on when a vehicle you have passed remains in
or drops back into the detection zone.

2-60

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SBZA can be disabled through the Driver Information SBZA does not operate when the left or right corners
Center (DIC). See Driver Information Center (DIC) of the rear bumper are covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice,
on page 3-51 for more information. If the SBZA slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For cleaning instructions,
is disabled by the driver, the SBZA mirror displays see Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-110. If the DIC still
will not light up during normal driving. displays the SIDE BLIND ZONE SYS. UNAVAILABLE
message after cleaning the bumper, see your
When the System Does Not Seem To Work dealer/retailer.
Properly The SBZA displays may remain on if a trailer is attached
Occasional missed alerts can occur under normal to the vehicle, or a bicycle or object is extending out
circumstances and will increase in wet conditions. to either side of the vehicle.
The system does not need to be serviced due to When SBZA is disabled for any reason other than the
an occasional missed alert. The number of missed driver turning it off, the driver will not be able to turn
alerts will increase with increased rainfall or road spray. SBZA back on using the DIC. The SIDE BLIND ZONE
If the SBZA displays do not light up when the system is ALERT ON option will not be selectable if the
on and vehicles are in the blind zone, the system may conditions for normal system operation are not met.
need service. Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer. Until normal operating conditions for SBZA are met,
you should not rely upon SBZA while driving.
SBZA is designed to ignore stationary objects; however,
the system may occasionally light up due to guard
rails, signs, trees, shrubs, and other stationary objects.
This is normal system operation, the vehicle does
not need service.

2-61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SBZA Error Messages Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
The following messages may appear in the DIC: This vehicle may have a Rear Vision Camera system.
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM OFF: This Read this entire section before using it.
message indicates that the driver has turned the
system off.
SIDE BLIND ZONE SYS. UNAVAILABLE: This
{ CAUTION:
message indicates that the SBZA system is disabled
either because the sensor is blocked and cannot detect The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) system does not
vehicles in your blind zone, or the vehicle is passing replace driver vision. RVC does not:
through an open field of view area, such as the desert, • Detect objects that are outside the camera’s
where there is insufficient data for operation. The sensor field of view, below the bumper, or
may be blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice, slush, or even underneath the vehicle.
heavy rainstorms. This message may also activate during • Detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.
heavy rain or due to road spray. The vehicle does not
need service. For cleaning, see Washing Your Vehicle Do not back the vehicle by only looking at the rear
on page 5-110. vision camera screen, or use the screen during
longer, higher speed backing maneuvers or where
SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM: If this there could be cross-traffic. Your judged distances
message appears, both SBZA displays will remain on using the screen will differ from actual distances.
indicating there is a problem with the SBZA system.
So if you do not use proper care before backing up,
If these displays remain on after continued driving,
you could hit a vehicle, child, pedestrian, bicyclist,
the system needs service. Take the vehicle to your
or pet, resulting in vehicle damage, injury, or death.
dealer/retailer.
Even though the vehicle has the RVC system,
always check carefully before backing up by
checking behind and around the vehicle.

2-62

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Vehicles Without Navigation System Vehicles With Navigation System
The rear vision camera system is designed to help the The rear vision camera system is designed to help the
driver when backing up by displaying a view of the area driver when backing up by displaying a view of the
behind the vehicle. When the key is in the ON/RUN area behind the vehicle. When the driver shifts
position and the driver shifts the vehicle into R (Reverse), the vehicle into R (Reverse), the video image
the video image automatically appears on the inside rear automatically appears on the navigation screen.
view mirror. Once the driver shifts out of R (Reverse), the Once the driver shifts out of R (Reverse), the
video image automatically disappears from the inside navigation screen will go back to the last screen
rear view mirror. that had been displayed, after a delay.
Turning the Rear Vision Camera System Turning the Rear Vision Camera System
Off or On On or Off
To turn off the rear vision camera system, press and To turn the rear vision camera system on or off:
hold z , located on the inside rearview mirror, until the 1. Shift into P (Park).
left indicator light turns off. The rear camera vision
2. Press the MENU button to enter the configure
display is now disabled.
menu options, then press the MENU hard key
To turn the rear vision camera system on again, press to select Display or touch the Display screen button.
and hold z until the left indicator light illuminates. 3. Select the Rear Camera Options screen button.
The rear vision camera system display is now enabled The Rear Camera Options screen will display.
and the display will appear in the mirror normally.

2-63

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Adjusting the Brightness and Contrast of
the Screen
To adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen,
press the MENU button while the rear vision camera
image is on the display. Any adjustments made will only
affect the rear vision camera screen.

] (Brightness): Touch the + (plus) or – (minus)

screen buttons to increase or decrease the brightness
of the screen.

_ (Contrast): Touch the + (plus) or – (minus) screen

buttons to increase or decrease the contrast of the
screen.

4. Select the Video screen button. When the Video

screen button is highlighted the RVC system is on.
The delay that is received after shifting out of
R (Reverse) is approximately 10 seconds. The delay
can be cancelled by performing one of the following:
• Pressing a hard key on the navigation system.
• Shifting in to P (Park).
• Reach a vehicle speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
There is a message on the rear vision camera screen
that states “Check Surroundings for Safety”.

2-64

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Symbols To turn the symbols on or off:
The navigation system may have a feature that lets the 1. Make sure that URPA has not been disabled.
driver view symbols on the navigation screen while using 2. Shift into P (Park).
the rear vision camera. The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist
(URPA) system must not be disabled to use the caution 3. Press the MENU hard key to enter the configure
symbols. If URPA has been disabled and the symbols menu options, then press the MENU hard key
have been turned on, the Rear Parking Assist Symbols repeatedly until Display is selected or touch
Unavailable error message may display. See Ultrasonic the Display screen button.
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 2-56. 4. Select the Rear Camera Options screen button.
The Rear Camera Options screen will display.
The symbols appear when an object has been detected
by the URPA system. The symbol may cover the 5. Touch the Symbols screen button. The screen
object when viewing the navigation screen. button will be highlighted when on.
Rear Vision Camera Error Messages
Service Rear Vision Camera System: This message
can display when the system is not receiving
information it requires from other vehicle systems.
If any other problem occurs or if a problem persists, see
your dealer/retailer.

2-65

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rear Vision Camera Location

The image is provided by the camera located above the

license plate.
The camera uses a special lens. The distance of the
image that appears on the screen differs from the actual
distance. The area displayed by the camera is limited.
The camera does not display objects which are close
to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper.
The area displayed on the screen can vary according
to vehicle orientation or road conditions.
The following illustration shows the field of view that the
camera provides.

2-66

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When the System Does Not Seem To The rear vision camera system display in the rearview
mirror may turn off or not appear as expected due to
Work Properly one of the following conditions. If this occurs the
The rear vision camera system might not work properly left indicator light on the mirror will flash.
or display a clear image if: • A slow flash may indicate a loss of video signal, or
• The RVC is turned off. See “Turning the Rear no video signal present during the reverse cycle.
Camera System On or Off” earlier in this section. • A fast flash may indicate that the display has
• It is dark. been on for the maximum allowable time during
a reverse cycle, or the display has reached an
• The sun or the beam of headlights is shining Over Temperature limit.
directly into the camera lens.
The fast flash conditions are used to protect the
• Ice, snow, mud, or anything else builds up on the video device from high temperature conditions.
camera lens. Clean the lens, rinse it with water, Once conditions return to normal the device will
and wipe it with a soft cloth. reset and the green indicator will stop flashing.
• The back of the vehicle is in an accident, the During any of these fault conditions, the display will be
position and mounting angle of the camera blank and the indicator will continue to flash as long
can change or the camera can be affected. Be sure as the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or until the conditions
to have the camera and its position and mounting return to normal.
angle checked at your dealer/retailer.
Pressing and holding z when the left indicator light is
• There are extreme temperature changes. flashing will turn off the video display along with the
left indicator light.

2-67

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OnStar® System OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
glove box literature.
Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available until
the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar. After the
first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select a monthly or
annual subscription payment plan. If a payment plan is
not selected, the OnStar system and all services,
including airbag notification and emergency services,
may be deactivated and no longer available. For more
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
information visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca (Canada),
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
or press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor.
information, and convenience services. If the airbags
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles.
call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services
emergency services be sent to your location. If the keys described below, or for a full description of OnStar
are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR services and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s
to have a signal sent to unlock the doors. OnStar Guide in the glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) or
Hands-Free Calling, including 30 trial minutes good onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
for 60 days, is available on most vehicles. OnStar (1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press
Turn-by-Turn Navigation service, with one trial route, is the OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor
available on most vehicles. Press the OnStar button to 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service.

2-68

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OnStar Services Available with the OnStar Hands-Free Calling
Safe & Sound Plan OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN) the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
(If equipped) Minute Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes
• Link to Emergency Services good for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also be
linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or
• Roadside Assistance a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert onstar.com or onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
• GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only) Vehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
system can provide voice-guided driving directions.
OnStar Services Included with Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor
locate a business or address and download driving
Directions & Connections Plan directions to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to the
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services desired destination will play through the audio system
speakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) or information.
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services

2-69

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OnStar Virtual Advisor How OnStar Service Works
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
Hands-Free Calling that uses minutes to access information. This information is automatically sent to an
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed,
stock quotes. Press the phone button and give a the emergency button is pressed, or if the airbags or
few simple voice commands to browse through the AACN system deploy. This information usually includes
various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for the vehicle’s GPS location and, in the event of a crash,
more information. This feature is only available in additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle
the continental U.S. was involved in (e.g. the direction from which the vehicle
was hit). When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls Hands-Free Calling is used, the vehicle also sends
OnStar the vehicle’s GPS location so they can provide
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can
services where it is located.
be used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-138 for OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
more information. place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
area has coverage, network capacity and reception when
information.
the service is needed, and technology that is compatible
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas, or
at all times.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.

2-70

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
Universal Home Remote
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar System
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF)
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
wireless phone network congestion. door openers, security systems, and home lighting.

Your Responsibility This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is
red, the system may not be functioning properly. Press 2. This device must accept any interference received,
the OnStar button and request a vehicle diagnostic. If the including interference that may cause undesired
light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar operation.
subscription has expired and all services have been This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
deactivated. Press the OnStar button to confirm that the Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
OnStar equipment is active.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.

2-71

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Universal Home Remote System Do not use this system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and reverse feature.
Operation (With Three Round LED) This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person assist with
programming the transmitter.
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for
use in other vehicles, as well as, for future programming.
Only the original remote control transmitter is needed for
Fixed Code programming. The programmed buttons
This vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote should be erased when the vehicle is sold or the lease
System. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode ends. See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons”
(LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote later in this section.
buttons, follow the instructions below.
Park the vehicle outside of the garage when
This system provides a way to replace up to three programming a garage door. Be sure that people and
remote control transmitters used to activate devices objects are clear of the garage door or gate that is being
such as garage door openers, security systems, programmed.
and home automation devices.

2-72

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
For questions or help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out
and the procedure will have to be repeated.
To program up to three devices:

2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener

receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. It can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head
unit and may be a colored button. Press this
button. After pressing this button, complete the
following steps in less than 30 seconds.

1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside 3. Immediately return to the vehicle. Press and hold
the Universal Home Remote button that will be
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
used to control the garage door until the garage
and immediately release them.
door moves. The indicator light, above the selected
button, should slowly blink. This button may
need to be held for up to 20 seconds.

2-73

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. Immediately, within one second, release the button To program up to three devices:
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.
5. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
To program another Rolling Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1 through 5,
choosing a different function button in Step 3 than
what was used for the garage door opener.
If these instructions do not work, the garage door
opener is probably a Fixed Code unit. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code
garage door opener.

Programming Universal Home 1. To verify that the garage door opener is a Fixed
Remote — Fixed Code Code unit, remove the battery cover on the hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of the
For questions or help programming the Universal garage door opener motor. If there are a row of dip
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to switches similar to the graphic above, the garage
learcar2u.com. door opener is a Fixed Code unit. If you do not
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed see a row of dip switches, return to the previous
Code units. section for Programming Universal Home
Remote – Rolling Code.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure Your hand held transmitter can have between eight
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and to 12 dip switches depending on the brand of
the procedure will have to be repeated. transmitter.

2-74

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
could also have a row of dip switches that can be
used when programming the Universal Home
Remote. If the total number of switches on the
motor head and hand held transmitter are different,
or if the dip switch settings are different, use the dip
switch settings on the motor head unit to program the
Universal Home Remote. The motor head dip switch
settings can also be used when the original hand
held transmitter is not available.

Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions

The panel of switches might not appear exactly as

they do in the examples above, but they should be
similar.
The switch positions on the hand-held transmitter
could be labeled, as follows:
• A switch in the up position could be labeled
as “Up,” “+,” or “On.”
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions • A switch in the down position could be labeled
as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
• A switch in the middle position could be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”

2-75

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left
to right as follows:
• When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”
• When a switch is in the down position, write
“Right.”
• If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings written down in Step 2 now
become the button strokes to be entered into the
Universal Home Remote in Step 4. Be sure to
enter the switch settings written down in Step 2, in
order from left to right, into the Universal Home
Remote, when completing Step 4.
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all three
buttons at the same time for about three seconds. 4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
Release the buttons to put the Universal Home switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s
Remote into programming mode. Universal Home Remote. You will have two
and one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now
press one button on the Universal Home Remote
for each switch setting as follows:
• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in
the vehicle.

2-76

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5. After entering all of the switch positions, again, Reprogramming Universal Home
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights will turn on. Remote Buttons
6. Press and hold the button that will be used to Any of the three buttons can be reprogrammed by
control the garage door until the garage door repeating the instructions.
moves. The indicator light above the selected button
should slowly blink. This button may need to be Erasing Universal Home Remote
held for up to 55 seconds. Buttons
7. Immediately release the button when the garage The programmed buttons should be erased when the
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly vehicle is sold or the lease ends.
until programming is complete.
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
8. Press and release the same button again. Universal Home Remote device:
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete. 1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the
same time for approximately 20 seconds, until
To program another Fixed Code device such as an the indicator lights, located directly above the
additional garage door opener, a security device, buttons, begin to blink rapidly.
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing
a different button in Step 6 than what was used for 2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both
the garage door opener. buttons. The codes from all buttons will be erased.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
Using Universal Home Remote System, call the customer assistance phone number
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least under Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6.
half of a second. The indicator light will come on while
the signal is being transmitted.

2-77

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Storage Areas
Glove Box
Lift up on the glove box lever to open it.

Cupholders
For vehicles with cupholders located in the front and
rear of the floor console or in the fold down armrest,
adjust the front cupholders by moving the insert forward
or rearward.

Pull downward on the lid to access the rear floor

console cupholders.
There could also be cupholders located in the second
and third row seat armrest areas.

2-78

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Center Console Storage To prevent damage or loss of cargo while driving,
periodically stop and check to make sure cargo is still
For vehicles with a console compartment, it is located securely fastened.
between the bucket seats. • If small heavy objects are placed on the roof, cut a
Press the button and lift the lid to access the console piece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside the crossrails
compartment. and siderails to spread the load. Tie the plywood
A cupholder located in the rear of the console, swings to the siderail supports.
down for the rear seat passenger to use. • Tie the load and secure it to the crossrails or the
siderail supports. Use the crossrails only to keep
Luggage Carrier the load from sliding. To move a crossrail, lift
the release lever up, on both sides of the rail.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that Then slide the crossrail to the desired position
weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangs over the balancing the force side to side. Press the release
rear or sides of the vehicle can damage the vehicle. lever down on both sides of the rail, down to
Load cargo so that it rests on the slats as far forward tighten it. Try to slide the crossrail back and forth
as possible and against the side rails, making sure to slightly to make sure it is tight.
fasten it securely. • To carry long items, move the crossrails as far apart
For vehicles with a luggage carrier, items can be loaded as possible. Tie the load to the crossrails and the
on top of the vehicle. siderails or siderail supports. Also tie the load to the
bumpers, but do not tie the load so tightly that the
The luggage carrier has siderails attached to the roof. crossrails or siderails are damaged.
It can also have crossrails which can be moved
back and forth to help secure cargo. Tie the load
• After moving a crossrail, be sure it is securely locked
to the siderails or siderail supports. into the siderail.

Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when A Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) is located
loading the vehicle. For more information on vehicle above the rear window glass.
capacity and loading, see Loading the Vehicle on Make sure items loaded on the roof of the vehicle do
page 4-33. not block or damage the CHMSL.
Make sure the cargo is properly loaded.
2-79

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rear Storage Area To use the cover, for vehicles that have it:
1. Pull the cover handle toward the rear of the vehicle.
For vehicles with a rear storage area, it is located in the
rear cargo area of the vehicle on the driver’s side trim 2. Latch the cover posts into the retaining sockets
panel. on the cargo area trim panels.
Turn the knobs and swing the storage door to access To return the cover to the retracted position:
the storage compartment. The door can be removed. 1. Pull up on the cover handle to release the cover
posts from the retaining sockets.
Rear Seat Armrest 2. Let the cover move forward to the full retracted
position.
For vehicle with a rear seat armrest, pull the loop at the
top of the armrest down to access the cupholders. To remove the cover, from a regular wheelbase model:
1. Let the cover go all the way into the holder.
Cargo Cover 2. Then, grasping the driver’s side cover end cap,
push the cover end cap toward the passenger
side of the vehicle.
{ CAUTION: 3. Swing the cover rearward and take it out of the
vehicle.
An improperly stored cargo cover could be thrown
about the vehicle during a collision or sudden
maneuver. Someone could be injured. If the cover
is removed, always store it in the proper storage
location. When it is replaced, always be sure that it
is securely reattached.

2-80

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To put the cover in the vehicle: Sunroof
1. Make sure the cover slot in the holder faces
rearward with the round surface facing down. Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
sunroof. To open or close the sunroof, the ignition needs
2. Then, hold the cover at an angle and place the to be turned to ON/RUN, or Retained Accessory Power
cover end cap into the slot in the passenger side (RAP) must be active. When RAP is active, the sunroof
trim panel. will work for 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off, or
3. Move the other end of the cover forward and hold it until a front door is opened. See Retained Accessory
next to the driver’s side trim panel slot. Power (RAP) on page 2-28 for more information.
4. Press the end caps in, to allow the cover to fit into There are two switches in
the trim slot. the overhead console that
5. Pull lightly on the cover holder to make sure it is operate the sunroof.
secure.
On extended wheelbase models there are two
cover positions. The slots furthest forward allow the
cover to be used if the third seat is removed or
folded down. The cover can be installed and
removed from either side.

Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To open the sunroof

press and hold the rear of the driver’s side switch until
the sunroof reaches the desired position. To close the
sunroof, press and hold the front of the driver’s side
switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position.
The sunshade will open automatically with the sunroof,
but can also be opened manually.

2-81

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which stops the Vent: The sunroof has an express-vent open
sunroof from opening to the full-open position. From the feature. From the closed position, press the rear of
comfort stop position, press the rear of the driver’s side the passenger’s side switch to vent the sunroof. To stop
switch a second time to open the sunroof to the full-open the sunroof partway, press the switch a second time.
position. To close the sunroof, press and hold the front of the
When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will passenger’s side switch. To stop the sunroof partway,
automatically raise. The air deflector will retract when release the switch.
the sunroof is closed. Anti-Pinch Feature: If an object is in the path of the
Express-Open/Express-Close: To express-open the sunroof while it is closing, the anti-pinch feature will
sunroof, fully press and release the rear of the driver’s detect the object and stop the sunroof from closing
side switch. The sunroof will open automatically. To stop at the point of the obstruction. The sunroof will then
the sunroof partway, press the switch a second time. open halfway, and the air deflector will raise. To
To express-close the sunroof, fully press and release close the sunroof once it has re-opened, refer to the
the front of the driver’s side switch. The sunroof will “Express-Close” or “Manual-Close” functions described
close automatically. To stop the sunroof partway, press previously. If the sunroof is in the vent position, and there
the switch a second time. The sunshade will open is an object in the path of the sunroof when it closing, the
automatically with the sunroof, but can also be opened anti-pinch feature will detect the object and stop the
manually. sunroof. To close the sunroof once it has re-opened, refer
to the “Manual-Close” or “Express-Close” functions
The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which stops the described previously.
sunroof from opening to the full-open position. From the
comfort stop position, press the rear of the driver’s side Do not keep the sunroof open for long periods of time
switch a second time to open the sunroof to the full-open while the vehicle is not in use. Debris can collect in
position. the tracks, damage the sunroof operation and plug the
water draining system.
When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will
automatically raise. The air deflector will retract when the
sunroof is closed.

2-82

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Section 3 Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4 Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-20
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6 Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-21
Horn .............................................................3-6 Climate Controls ............................................3-22
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6 Climate Control System .................................3-22
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7 Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-24
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-7 Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-30
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System .......3-31
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9 and Electronic Climate Controls ...................3-32
Rainsense™ II Wipers .....................................3-9
Windshield Washer .......................................3-10 Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-34
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...........................3-11 Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-35
Cruise Control ..............................................3-12 Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-36
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-14 Trip Odometer ..............................................3-36
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-15 Tachometer .................................................3-36
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-16 Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-36
Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-16 Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-37
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-17 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-38
Auxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp .........................3-18 Charging System Light ..................................3-39
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-18 Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-39
Dome Lamps ...............................................3-18 Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-40
Dome Lamp Override ....................................3-19 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light .....3-41
Entry Lighting ...............................................3-19 StabiliTrak® Indicator Light .............................3-42
Exit Lighting .................................................3-19 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-42
Reading Lamps ............................................3-19 Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-43
Electric Power Management ...........................3-19 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-43
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-20 Oil Pressure Gage ........................................3-46

3-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Section 3 Instrument Panel
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-48 Audio System(s) .............................................3-83
Security Light ...............................................3-48 Setting the Clock ..........................................3-84
Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-49 Radio(s) ......................................................3-86
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-49 Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-49 Six-Disc CD Player) .................................3-105
Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................3-49 Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and DVD
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-50 Player) ...................................................3-109
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-51 XM Radio Messages ...................................3-114
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-51 Navigation/Radio System ..............................3-115
DIC Operation and Displays Bluetooth® .................................................3-115
(With DIC Buttons) ....................................3-52 Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System .........3-127
DIC Operation and Displays Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................................3-136
(Without DIC Buttons) ................................3-58 Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-138
DIC Compass ..............................................3-61 Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-138
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-64 Radio Reception .........................................3-139
DIC Vehicle Customization Rear Side Window Antenna ..........................3-140
(With DIC Buttons) ....................................3-74 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............3-140

3-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ✍ NOTES

3-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instrument Panel Overview

United States version shown; Canada similar

3-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
A. Outlet Adjustment on page 3-30. N. Cruise Control on page 3-12.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7. O. Tilt Wheel on page 3-6.
C. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3-35. P. Horn on page 3-6.
D. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6. Q. Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-138.
E. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation R. Climate Control System on page 3-22 or Dual
on page 2-32. Automatic Climate Control System on page 3-24
F. Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-38 (If Equipped). (If Equipped).
G. Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-51. S. Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 3-20. Cigarette
Lighter (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette
H. Audio System(s) on page 3-83. Lighter on page 3-21.
I. Exterior Lamps on page 3-14. T. StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6 (If Equipped).
J. Dome Lamp Override on page 3-19. Instrument Pedal Adjust Button (If Equipped). See Adjustable
Panel Brightness on page 3-18. Fog Lamps Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 2-30. Ultrasonic
on page 3-17 (If Equipped). Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 2-56
K. Hood Release on page 5-13. (If Equipped). Heated Windshield Washer Fluid
Button (If Equipped). See Windshield Washer on
L. Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If Equipped).
page 3-10. Power Assist Steps on page 2-18
Towing a Trailer on page 4-50.
(If Equipped).
M. Automatic Transfer Case Control. (If Equipped). See
U. Glove Box on page 2-78.
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-40.

3-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Hazard Warning Flashers Tilt Wheel
The vehicle has a tilt wheel that lets the steering wheel
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button
be adjusted.
located on top of the steering column, to make the front
and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This
warns others that you are having trouble. Press again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, the vehicle’s
turn signals will not work.

Horn
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the steering
wheel.

The tilt steering wheel lever is located on the lower left

side of the column.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable
position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

3-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever Z: Rear Wiper

=: Rear Wiper Wash

Flash-to-Pass.
Information for these features is on the pages following.

Turn and Lane-Change Signals

An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:

G: Turn and Lane Change Signals

Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.
53 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Raise or lower the lever for less than one second
N: Windshield Wipers until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change.
This causes the turn signals to automatically flash three
L: Windshield Washer times. It will flash six times if tow-haul mode is active.
Holding the turn signal lever for more than one second
5: Rear Wiper Delay will cause the turn signals to flash until you release
the lever.
The lever returns to its starting position whenever it is
released.

3-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If after signaling a turn or a lane change the arrows When the high beams are
flash rapidly or do not come on, a signal bulb could be on, this indicator light on
burned out. the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 5-115.
Turn Signal On Chime
If the turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the Flash-to-Pass
turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will This feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps to
also appear in the Driver Information Control (DIC). To signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
turn the chime and message off, move the turn It works even if the headlamps are in the automatic
signal lever to the off position. position.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
5 3 (Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer): To If the headlamps are in the automatic position or on low
change the headlamps from low to high beam, push beam, the high-beam headlamps will turn on. They
the lever toward the instrument panel. To return will stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.
to low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster
toward you. Then release it. will come on. Release the lever to return to normal
operation.

3-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Windshield Wipers Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control the Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
windshield wipers.

8 (Mist): Turn to mist for a single wiping cycle. Hold it

Rainsense™ II Wipers
there until the wipers start. Then let go. The wipers For vehicles with Rainsense™ II windshield wipers, the
stop after one wipe. Hold the band on mist longer, for moisture sensor is located next to the inside rearview
more wipe cycles. mirror and is mounted on the windshield. When active,
these sensors are able to detect moisture on the
9 (Off): Turns the wipers off. windshield and automatically turn on the wipers.

6 (Delay): Turn the band to adjust the delay time. The To turn on the Rainsense feature, the wipers must be
set to one of the five delay settings on the multifunction
delay between wiping cycles becomes shorter as lever. Each of the five settings adjusts the sensitivity
the band is moved to the top of the lever. This can be of the sensor.
very useful in light rain or snow.
Since different drivers have different setting preferences,
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed. it is recommended that the mid-range setting (position 3)
be used initially. For more wipes, select the higher
? (High Speed): For high-speed wiping. settings; for fewer wipes, select the lower settings located
closer to the off position on the multifunction lever.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using
them. If they are frozen to the windshield, gently The sensor will automatically control the frequency of
loosen or thaw them. Damaged wiper blades may not the wipes from the off setting to the high speed
clear the windshield well, making it harder to see setting according to the weather conditions. The wipers
and drive safely. If the blades do become damaged, can be left in a rainsense mode even when it is not
install new blades or blade inserts. For more information, raining.
see Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5-59.

3-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When Rainsense is active, the headlamps will turn on Heated Windshield Washer
automatically if the exterior lamp control is in the AUTO
position and the wipers are active. For vehicles with the heated windshield washer fluid
system it can be used to help clear ice, snow, tree sap,
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with or bugs from the windshield.
the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers
off when going through an automatic car wash. _ (Heated Washer Fluid): Press the heated washer
fluid button to activate the heated windshield washer
Windshield Washer fluid system. This activation initiates four heated
wash/wipe cycles. The first heated wash/wipe cycle may
take up to 40 seconds to occur, depending on outside
temperature. After the first wash/wipe cycle, it may take
{ CAUTION: up to 20 seconds for each of the remaining cycles to
begin. Press the button again to turn off the heated
windshield washer fluid system or it will automatically
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
turn off after four wipe cycles have been completed.
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your When the heated windshield washer fluid system
vision. is activated under certain outside temperature
conditions, steam may flow out of the washer nozzles
for a short period of time before washer fluid is sprayed.
This is a normal condition.
L (Washer Fluid): Push the paddle marked with the
windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction HEATING WASH FLUID WASH WIPES PENDING is
lever, to spray washer fluid on the windshield. The displayed on the DIC when the washer system is heating
wipers clear the window and then either stop or return the fluid. WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID is
to the preset speed. displayed when the washer fluid is low. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-64.

3-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rear Window Wiper/Washer To turn the rear wiper on, slide the lever to a wiper
position.

9 (Off): Turns the wiper off.

{ CAUTION:
5 (Rear Wiper Delay): Turns on the rear wiper delay.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
Z (Rear Wiper): Turns on the rear wiper.
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your = (Rear Wiper Wash): To turn on the rear wiper
vision. wash, push the button on the end of the turn
signal/multifunction lever to spray washer fluid on the
rear window. The wipers will clear the rear window and
The rear wiper control is located on the turn
either stop or return to your preset speed. For more
signal/multifunction lever.
washer cycles, press and hold the button.
The rear window wiper/washer will not operate if the
liftgate or liftglass is open or ajar. If the liftgate or
liftglass is opened while the rear wiper is on, the wiper
will return to the parked position and stop.

3-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Cruise Control

{ CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot
drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use the
cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.
On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
The cruise control buttons are located on left side of the
steering wheel.
With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more can be maintained without keeping your foot T (On/Off): This button can both activate and turn off
on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work the system. The indicator light on the button turns on
at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h). when cruise control is on and turns off when cruise
When the brakes are applied, cruise control is turned off. control is off.
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, and the system begins to + RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press to make the
limit wheel spin, cruise control will automatically vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed.
disengage. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6. When
road conditions allow the cruise control to be safely SET − (Set/Coast): Press to set the speed or make
used again, it can be turned back on. the vehicle decelerate.

[ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruise control without

erasing the set speed from memory.

3-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Setting Cruise Control Resuming a Set Speed
Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set, If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then the
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low. brakes are applied, this shuts off the cruise control. But it
The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster does not need to be reset.
comes on after the cruise control has been set to Once the vehicle speed reaches about 25 mph (40 km/h)
the desired speed. or more, press the +RES button on the steering wheel.
The vehicle returns to the previously set speed and stays
there.
{ CAUTION: Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control:
into cruise when you do not want to. You could be • Press and hold the +RES button on the steering
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise wheel until the desired speed is reached, then
control switch off until you want to use cruise release it.
control. • To increase vehicle speed in small increments,
press the +RES button. Each time this is done,
the vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
1. Press the I button.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET− button located on the steering
wheel and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.

3-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Ending Cruise Control
Control There are three ways to end cruise control:
To reduce the vehicle speed while using cruise control: • Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Press and hold the SET– button on the steering • Press the [ button on the steering wheel.
wheel until the desired lower speed is reached,
then release it. • Press the I button on the steering wheel.
• To slow down in very small amounts, press the Erasing Speed Memory
SET– button on the steering wheel briefly. Each
time this is done, the vehicle goes about 1 mph The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
(1.6 km/h) slower. the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.

Passing Another Vehicle While Using Exterior Lamps

Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed. The exterior lamps control
When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle will is located on the instrument
slow down to the previous set cruise speed. panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control will work on hills depends
upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s It controls the following systems:
speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake or
shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed • Headlamps
down. When the brakes are applied the cruise control • Taillamps
turns off.
• Parking Lamps

3-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • License Plate Lamps 2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps together
• Instrument Panel Lights with the following lamps listed below.

The exterior lamps control has four positions: • Parking Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights
O (Off): Turns off the automatic headlamps and
daytime running lamps (DRL). Turning the headlamp • Taillamps
control to the off position again will turn the automatic • License Plate Lamps
headlamps or DRL back on.
When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off position will on, the headlamps will turn off automatically 10 minutes
only work for vehicles that are shifted into the P (Park) after the ignition is turned off. When the headlamps are
position. turned on while the vehicle is off, the headlamps will stay
on for 10 minutes before automatically turning off to
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically turns on the prevent the battery from being drained. Turn the
headlamps at normal brightness, together with the headlamp control to off and then back to the headlamp on
following: position to make the headlamps stay on for an additional
• Parking Lamps 10 minutes.
• Instrument Panel Lights Headlamps on Reminder
• Taillamps
A reminder chime will sound when the headlamps or
• License Plate Lamps parking lamps are manually turned on and the ignition is
off and a door is open. To disable the chime, turn the
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps light off.
together with the following:
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps

3-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Automatic Headlamp System
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for When it is dark enough outside, the automatic headlamp
others to see the front of your vehicle during the system turns on the headlamps at the normal brightness,
day. Fully functional daytime running lamps are required along with the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps,
on all vehicles first sold in Canada. and the instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also
be dim.
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met: To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn the
• The ignition is on. exterior lamps switch to the off position and then release
it. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the transmission
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO. must be in the P (Park) position, before the automatic
• The transmission is not in P (Park). headlamp system can be turned off.
The vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the
• The light sensor determines it is daytime.
instrument panel in the defroster grille that regulates
When the DRL are on, only the DRL lamps will be on. when the automatic headlamps turn on. Do not cover the
The taillamps, sidemarker, instrument panel lights, sensor or the headlamps will come on whenever the
and other lamps will not be on. ignition is on.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp The system may also turn on the headlamps when
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps. driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather, or a tunnel. This is normal.
To turn off the DRL lamps, turn the exterior lamps
control to the OFF position and then release. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, the transmission must be
in the P (Park) position, before the DRL lamps can
be turned off.

3-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and Fog Lamps
nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
and the automatic headlamp systems so that driving For vehicles with fog lamps, the control is located next
under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not to the exterior lamps control on the instrument panel,
affect the system. The DRL and automatic headlamp to the left of the steering column.
system is only affected when the light sensor detects a
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for the fog
change in lighting lasting longer than the delay.
lamps to come on.
If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once # (Fog Lamps): Press to turn the fog lamps on or off.
the vehicle leaves the garage, it takes approximately A light will come on in the instrument panel cluster.
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
When the fog lamps are turned on, the parking lamps
change to DRL if it is bright enough outside. During that
automatically turn on.
delay, the instrument panel cluster may not be as
bright as usual. Make sure the instrument panel When the headlamps are changed to high-beam, the
brightness control is in the full bright position. See fog lamps also go off. When the high-beam headlamps
Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-18. are turned off, the fog lamps will come on again.
To idle the vehicle with the automatic headlamp system Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
off, turn the control to the off position. be on along with the fog lamps.
The headlamps will also stay on after you exit the
vehicle. This feature can be programmed using the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-74.
The regular headlamp system can be turned on when
needed.

3-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Auxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp If the vehicle has this button, the vehicle may have the
snow plow prep package. For further information
If the vehicle has this feature, this button includes wiring see Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment on
provisions for a dealer or a qualified service center to page 4-39.
install an auxiliary roof lamp.
Instrument Panel Brightness
This button is located on
the overhead console. D (Instrument Panel Brightness): This feature
controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights
and is located next to the exterior lamp control.
Push the knob to extend out and then it can be turned.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
brighten or dim the instrument panel lights. Turning the
When the wiring is connected to an auxiliary roof knob to the farthest clockwise position turns on the
mounted lamp, pressing the bottom of the button will dome lamps.
activate the lamp and illuminate an indicator light at the
bottom of this button. Pressing the top of the button
will turn off the roof mounted lamp and indicator.
Dome Lamps
The emergency roof lamp circuit is fused at 30 amps, The dome lamps come on when any door is opened.
so the total current draw of the attached lamps They turn off after all the doors are closed.
should be less than this value. The attachment points The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning the
for the roof lamp circuits are two blunt cut wires located instrument panel brightness knob, located on the
above the overhead console, a dark green switched instrument panel to the left of the steering column,
power wire and a black ground wire. clockwise to the farthest position. In this position, the
For further information on roof mount emergency lamp dome lamps remain on whether a door is opened
installation, please visit the GM Upfitter website at or closed.
www.gmupfitters.com or contact your dealer.

3-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Dome Lamp Override Reading Lamps
The dome lamp override button is located next to the For vehicles with reading lamps they are located on the
exterior lamps control. overhead console.
To turn on the reading lamps, press the button located
k (Dome Off): Press the button in and the dome
next to each lamp. To turn them off, press the button
lamps remain off when a door is opened. Press again.
the button again to return it to the extended position so
that the dome lamps come on when a door is opened. The vehicle may also have reading lamps in other
locations. To turn the lamps on or off, press the button
located next to the lamp.
Entry Lighting
The lamps are fixed and cannot be adjusted.
The vehicle has an illuminated entry feature.
When the doors are opened, the dome lamps will come Electric Power Management
on if the dome override button is in the extended
position. If the dome override button is pressed in, the The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
lamps will not come on. estimates the battery’s temperature and state of
charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best performance
and extended life of the battery.
Exit Lighting
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
The interior lamps come on when the key is removed raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up. When
from the ignition. They turn off automatically in the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly
20 seconds. The lights do not come on if the dome to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter
override button is pressed in. gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move up or down.
This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be
displayed.

3-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical Battery Run-Down Protection
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning This feature shuts off the dome, and reading lamps
fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is if they are left on for more than 10 minutes when
needed for very high electrical loads. the ignition is off. This will keep the battery from
A high electrical load occurs when several of the running down.
following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at Accessory Power Outlet(s)
high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets. Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellular
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the telephone.
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase There are two under the climate controls, one inside the
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever center floor console, one on the rear of the center
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of floor console and one accessory power outlet in the rear
some accessories. cargo area on the passenger side.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without To use an accessory power outlet, remove the protective
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of cap. When not in use, always cover the accessory
corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the power outlet with the protective cap.
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message The accessory power outlets are powered, even with
might be displayed, such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE, the ignition off. Continuing to use accessory power
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. If this outlets while the ignition is in LOCK/OFF may cause the
message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver vehicle’s battery to run down.
reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See DIC
Notice: If electrical devices are left plugged into a
Warnings and Messages on page 3-64.
power outlet, the battery may drain causing the
vehicle not to start or damage to the battery. This
would not be covered by the warranty. Always unplug
all electrical devices when turning off the vehicle.

3-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Certain accessory plugs may not be compatible to the Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
accessory power outlet and could result in blown
adapter or vehicle fuses. If you experience a problem, The front ashtray is located near the center of the
see your dealer/retailer for additional information on instrument panel or on the front console, if equipped.
the accessory power plugs. Pull on the ashtray door to open it.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items
vehicle can damage it or keep other components are put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
from working as they should. The repairs would not smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of in the ashtray.
20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before
To remove the front ashtray pull the ashtray up.
adding electrical equipment.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
let go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment. Do not use equipment exceeding the Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it
maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes. is heating does not let the lighter back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
damage not covered by the warranty. Do not hang
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
plug because the power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.

3-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Climate Controls Temperature Control: Move the thumbwheels up or
down to increase or decrease the temperature on
the driver’s side or the passenger side of the vehicle for
Climate Control System the dual zone system.

The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can 9 (Fan Control): Turn the left knob clockwise or
be controlled with this system. counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn the
front system off.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the airflow direction inside
the vehicle. By positioning the knob between two
modes, a combination of those modes is selected.
Select from the following modes:

H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument

A. Fan Control F. Driver and panel and floor outlets. Some air is directed towards the
B. REAR Passenger windshield and side window outlets. Cooler air is directed
to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
C. Recirculation Temperature
D. Air Delivery Mode Controls 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with some
Control G. Rear Window of the air directed to the windshield, side window, and
E. Air Conditioning Defogger second row floor outlets. In this mode, the system
automatically selects outside air. Recirculation cannot
be selected when in Floor Mode.

3-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 - (Defog): The defog mode is used to clear the The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
windows of fog or moisture. Air is directed to the air, so a small amount of water might drip under the
windshield, floor outlets, and side window vents. In this vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine. This is
mode, the system turns off recirculation and runs normal.
the air conditioning compressor unless the outside
temperature is close to freezing. The recirculation mode h (Recirculation): Press this button to turn the
cannot be selected while in the defog mode. recirculation mode on or off. An indicator light comes on
to show that recirculation is on.
0 (Defrost): The defrost mode is used to remove fog This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air
or frost from the windshield more quickly. Air is directed to inside the vehicle. It can be used to help prevent
the windshield and side window vents, with some directed outside air and odors from entering the vehicle.
to the floor vents. In this mode, the system automatically
forces outside air into the vehicle. The recirculation mode The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor, defrost,
cannot be selected while in the defrost mode. The air or defogging modes. If recirculation is selected while in
conditioning compressor runs automatically in this one of those modes, the indicator flashes three times and
setting, unless the outside temperature is close to turns off. The air conditioning compressor will also come
freezing. on when this mode is activated. While in recirculation
mode the windows may fog when the weather is cold and
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear. damp. To clear the fog, select either the defog or defrost
mode and increase the fan speed. The recirculation mode
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the air can also be turned off by turning off the engine.
conditioning system on or off. An indicator light comes
on to show that the air conditioning is on. The air REAR: Press to turn the rear heating and air
conditioning can be selected in any mode as long as conditioning on. See Rear Air Conditioning and Heating
the fan switch is on. System on page 3-31 or Rear Air Conditioning and
Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air on page 3-32 for more information.
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the
system to operate more efficiently.

3-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rear Window Defogger Dual Automatic Climate Control
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to System
remove fog from the rear window.
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button to turn be controlled with this system. The vehicle also has
the rear window defogger on or off. The system a flow-through ventilation system described later in this
automatically turns off several minutes after it has been section.
activated. The defogger can also be turned off by If this vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
turning off the engine. Do not drive the vehicle until all Hybrid manual for more information.
the windows are clear.
For vehicles with heated outside rearview mirrors, the
mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the
surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button
is pressed.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside
of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach
a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or
anything similar to the defogger grid.

3-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 O (On/Off): Press to turn the climate control system on
or off. Outside air still enters the vehicle, and is directed to
the floor. This direction can be changed by pressing the
mode button. Recirculation can be selected once you
have selected vent or bi-level mode. The temperature can
also be adjusted using either temperature button. If the
air delivery mode or temperature settings are adjusted
with the system off, the display illuminates briefly to show
the settings and then returns to off. The system can be
turned back on by pressing either O , D , C , # , the
defrost or the AUTO button.
A. Fan Control H. Display Driver and Passenger Side Temperature
B. AUTO I. Power Button Control
C. Defrost J. Rear Window
D. Recirculation Defogger The driver and passenger side temperature buttons are
used to adjust the temperature of the air coming
E. REAR K. Air Conditioning
through the system on the driver or passenger’s side of
F. Air Delivery Mode L. PASS the vehicle. The temperature can be adjusted even if
Control M. Passenger the system is turned off. This is possible since outside
G. Driver Temperature Temperature air always flows through the system as the vehicle
Control Control is moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode.
See “Recirculation” later in this section.
Press the + or − buttons to increase or decrease the
cabin temperature. The driver side or passenger
side temperature display shows the temperature setting
decreasing or increasing.

3-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The passenger’s temperature setting can be set to automatically switch to recirculate inside air to help
match the driver’s temperature setting by pressing the quickly cool down the vehicle. The light on the
PASS button and turning off the PASS indicator. button comes on in recirculation.
When the passenger’s temperature setting is set 2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
different than the driver’s setting, the indicator on the
PASS button illuminates and both the driver side To find your comfort setting, start with a 74°F (23°C)
and passenger side temperature displays are shown. temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes
for the system to regulate. Use the driver’s or
Automatic Operation passenger’s temperature buttons to adjust the
temperature setting as necessary. If a temperature
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is setting of 60°F (15°C) is chosen, the system remains
active the system will control the inside temperature, the at the maximum cooling setting. If a temperature
air delivery, and the fan speed. setting of 90°F (32°C) is chosen, the system remains
Use the steps below to place the entire system in at the maximum heat setting. Choosing either
automatic mode: maximum setting will not cause the vehicle to heat or
cool any faster.
1. Press the AUTO button.
Do not to cover the solar sensor located on the top
When AUTO is selected, the display will change to
of the instrument panel near the windshield. This sensor
show the current temperature(s) and AUTO will
regulates air temperature based on sun load and also
be lit on the display. The current delivery mode and
turns on the headlamps. For more information on
fan speed will also be displayed for approximately
the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later in this section.
5 seconds.
When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system will
operation and air inlet will be automatically delay turning on the fan until warm air is available.
controlled. The air conditioning compressor will run The length of delay depends on the engine coolant
when the outside temperature is over about temperature. Pressing the fan switch will override this
40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normally be set to delay and change the fan to a selected speed.
outside air. If it is hot outside, the air inlet may

3-26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Manual Operation 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with
some to the windshield, side window outlets, and second
D C (Fan Control): Press these buttons to increase or row floor outlets. In this mode, the system automatically
decrease the fan speed. selects outside air.
Pressing either fan button while in automatic control - (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
places the fan under manual control. The fan setting
moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, floor outlets,
remains displayed and the AUTO light turns off. The air
and side window vents. In this mode, the system
delivery mode remains under automatic control.
turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning
H G (Air Delivery Mode Control): Press these buttons compressor unless the outside temperature is close to
freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be selected
to change the direction of the airflow in the vehicle.
while in the defog mode.
Repeatedly press either button until the desired mode
appears on the display. Pressing either mode button 0 (Defrost): This mode removes fog or frost from the
while the system is off changes the air delivery mode
windshield more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield
without turning the system on. Pressing either mode
and side window vents, with some directed to the floor
button while in automatic control places the mode under
vents. In this mode, the system automatically forces
manual control.
outside air into the vehicle and runs the air conditioning
The air delivery mode setting is displayed and the compressor unless the outside temperature is close to
AUTO light turns off. The fan remains under automatic freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while
control. in the defrost mode.

H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets. Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument

panel and floor outlets. Some air is directed towards the
windshield and side window outlets.

3-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 # (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air conditioning @ (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
(A/C) compressor on and off. An indicator light comes on mode on or off. An indicator light comes on to show that
to show that the air conditioning is on. the recirculation is on.
If this button is pressed when the air conditioning This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air
compressor is unavailable, the indicator flashes three inside the vehicle. It can be used to help prevent
times and then turns off. If the air conditioning is on and outside air and odors from entering the vehicle.
the outside temperature drops below a temperature
which is too cool for air conditioning to be effective, the air The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor, defog,
conditioning light turns off to show that the air or defrost modes. If recirculation is selected with one of
conditioning mode has been canceled. those modes, the indicator light flashes three times and
then turns off. The air conditioning compressor also
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot comes on when this mode is activated. While in
inside air escape. This helps to reduce the time it takes recirculation mode the windows may fog when the
for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the system to weather is cold and damp. To clear the fog, select either
operate more efficiently. the defog or defrost mode and increase the fan speed.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the The recirculation mode can also be turned off by turning
air, so a small amount of water might drip under the off the ignition.
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine. This is
normal. REAR: For vehicles with the rear heat and air
conditioning controls. Press to turn the rear climate
control system on or off. See Rear Air Conditioning and
Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls on
page 3-32.

3-28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rear Window Defogger Sensors
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.

< (Rear Window Defogger): Press to turn the rear

window defogger on or off. It automatically turns off
several minutes after it has been activated. The defogger
can also be turned off by turning off the engine. Do not
drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere anything
to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass. These
actions may damage the rear defogger. Repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille in the
middle of the instrument panel, monitors the solar heat.
Heated Mirrors: For vehicles with heated outside Do not cover the solar sensor or the system will not
rearview mirrors, the mirrors heat to help clear fog or work properly.
frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear window
defog button is pressed. See Outside Power Mirrors
on page 2-53.

3-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Outlet Adjustment
Use the air outlets located in the center and on the side
of the instrument panel to direct the airflow.
Operation Tips
• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,
or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The
heater and defroster will work far better, reducing
the chance of fogging the inside of the windows.
• When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, press
the fan up button to the maximum fan level
The interior temperature sensors located in the headliner
before driving. This helps clear the intake ducts of
above the driver side seat and if equipped, in the
snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of
headliner above the second row seats measure the
fogging the inside of the window.
temperature of the air inside the vehicle.
There is also an exterior temperature sensor located
• Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside air
the vehicle.
temperature and helps maintain the temperature
inside the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle • Adding outside equipment to the front of the
could cause a false reading in the displayed vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, may affect the
temperature. performance of the heating and air conditioning
The climate control system uses the information from system. Check with your dealer/retailer before
these sensors to maintain your comfort setting by adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle.
adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and the air
delivery mode. The system may also supply cooler
air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The
recirculation mode will also be used as needed to
maintain cool outlet temperatures.

3-30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating Mimic Mode: This mode matches the rear climate
control to the front climate control airflow settings.
System It comes on when REAR is pressed the first time.
For vehicles with this system, the rear controls are three Independent Mode: This mode directs rear seating
knobs located in the headliner. The system can also be airflow according to the settings of the rear controls. It
controlled with the front controls. comes on when any rear control is adjusted.
Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the airflow
temperature into the passenger area.
Fan Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the fan speed.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow.

H (Vent): Air is directed through the headliner

outlets.
A. Fan Control
) (Bi-Level): Air is directed through the floor and
B. Temperature Control headliner outlets. The rear system floor outlets
C. Air Delivery Mode Control are located directly behind the second row seats. The
REAR: Press the REAR button on the front climate flow can be divided between vent and floor outlets
control system to turn the rear climate control system on depending upon where the knob is placed between the
or off. An indicator comes on when the rear system is settings.
on. See Climate Control System on page 3-22 or
Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 3-24. 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets. The rear
The rear system can also be turned off by turning system floor outlets are located directly behind the
second row seats.
the rear fan knob to the 9 position.
3-31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating REAR: Press the REAR button on the front climate
control system to turn the rear climate control system on
System and Electronic Climate or off. An indicator comes on when the rear system is on.
Controls The rear climate control system can also be turned off by
pressing and holding the C button. To turn the system on
For vehicles with the rear heat and air conditioning from the rear seats, press any rear climate control button,
controls, they are integrated with the rear seat audio
controls located in the center console. The system can except the C button.
be controlled from the front controls as well as the Mimic Mode: This mode matches the rear climate
rear controls. control to the front climate control airflow settings. It
comes on when REAR is pressed the first time.
Independent Mode: This mode directs rear seating
airflow according to the settings of the rear controls.
To turn the system on from the rear, press any
rear climate control button, except the C button.

Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls

A. Fan Control
B. Air Delivery Mode Control
C. Temperature Control

3-32

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Automatic Operation, If Equipped. Manual Operation
AUTO: Press the air delivery mode button until this D C (Fan Control): Press these buttons on the rear
setting is selected to control the inside temperature, air
seat audio control panel to increase or decrease
delivery, and fan speed. AUTO appears in the display
the airflow. Pressing the fan up button when the system
when automatic operation is active.
is off will turn the system on. The air delivery mode
+/− (Increase/Decrease Temperature): Press the will remain under automatic control.
+ or − buttons to increase or decrease the cabin
temperature. The rear control temperature display will +/− (Temperature Control): Press these buttons to
show the temperature setting increasing or decreasing. adjust the temperature of the air flowing into the
passenger area. Press the + button for warmer air and
The display only indicates climate control functions when press the − button for cooler air.
the system is in rear independent mode.
N (Air Delivery Mode Control): Press the mode
button to change the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. Repeatedly press the button until the desired
mode appears on the display. Multiple presses will cycle
through the delivery selections.

3-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Warning Lights, Gages, and Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
Indicators warning lights work together to indicate a problem with
the vehicle.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to while driving, or when one of the gages shows there
the warning lights and gages could prevent injury. may be a problem, check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.

3-34

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instrument Panel Cluster

United States 4-Speed version shown. 6-Speed and Canada similar.

The instrument cluster is designed to show how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is going, about
how much fuel the vehicle has and many other things needed to drive safely and economically.
For vehicles with a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information.

3-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Speedometer and Odometer Safety Belt Reminders
The speedometer shows the vehicle’s speed in both Safety Belt Reminder Light
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety
driven, in either miles (used in the United States) belt, unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
or kilometers (used in Canada).
The safety belt light
Trip Odometer comes on and stays on for
several seconds, then
The trip odometer can show how far the vehicle has flashes for several more.
been driven since the trip odometer was last set to zero.
Press the reset button, located on the instrument
panel cluster next to the trip odometer display, to toggle
between the trip odometer and the regular odometer.
Holding the reset button for approximately one second This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
while the trip odometer is displayed resets it. unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver safety
belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light
To display the odometer reading with the ignition off, comes on.
press the reset button.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Tachometer Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
sounds for several seconds to remind the front passenger
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions to buckle their safety belt. This only occurs if the
per minute (rpm). passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 1-90 for more information. The
passenger safety belt light, located on the instrument
panel, comes on and stays on for several seconds and
then flashes for several more.

3-36

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 This chime and light are The airbag readiness light
repeated if the passenger flashes for a few seconds
remains unbuckled and when the engine is started.
the vehicle is in motion. If the light does not come
on then, have it fixed
immediately.

If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the

chime nor the light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime
{ CAUTION:
may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle means the airbag system might not be working
the safety belt. properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
Airbag Readiness Light without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for vehicle serviced right away.
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check includes If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag for more information.
System on page 1-81.

3-37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
The vehicle has the passenger sensing system. See passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
Passenger Sensing System on page 1-90 for important If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
safety information. The overhead console has a status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
passenger airbag status indicator. system has turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system.
See your dealer/retailer for service.

United States Canada { CAUTION:

When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
off, for several seconds as a system check. If you are stays on, it means that something may be wrong
using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance, if with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
equipped, you may not see the system check. yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-37
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol for more information, including important safety
to let you know the status of the right front passenger information.
frontal airbag.

3-38

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Charging System Light Voltmeter Gage
This light comes on briefly When the engine is not
when the ignition key is running, but the ignition is
turned to START, but on, this gage shows
the engine is not running, the battery’s state of
as a check to show it charge in DC volts.
is working.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your

dealer/retailer.
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem When the engine is running, the gage shows the
with the charging system. A charging system message in condition of the charging system. The charging system
the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear. See regulates voltage based on the state of the battery
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 for more for improved fuel economy and battery life. The gage
information. This light could indicate that there are may transition from a higher to lower or a lower to higher
problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is an reading, this is normal. Readings between the low
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If the and high warning zones indicate the normal operating
vehicle must be driven a short distance with the light on, range. The gage may also read low during the fuel
turn off accessories, such as the radio and air economy mode, this is normal.
conditioner.

3-39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a The vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
large number of electrical accessories are operating in parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an still work and stop the vehicle. For good braking, both
extended period. This condition is normal since the parts need to be working well.
charging system is not able to provide full power at If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there
engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this could be a brake problem. Have the brake system
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds inspected right away.
allow the charging system to create full power. If there is
a problem with the battery charging system, this light will This light can also come on due to low brake fluid. See
come on or the SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING Brakes on page 5-40 for more information.
SYSTEM DIC message will display. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-64 and Charging System Light
on page 3-39 for more information.

Brake System Warning Light

With the ignition on, the brake system warning light
comes on when the parking brake is set. If the vehicle
is driven with the parking brake engaged, a chime United States Canada
sounds when the vehicle speed is greater than
5 mph (8 km/h). This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is
turned to ON/RUN. If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it is ready to warn if there is a problem.

3-40

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Antilock Brake System (ABS)
{ CAUTION: Warning Light
The brake system might not be working properly if For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
(ABS), this light comes on
the brake system warning light on can lead to a briefly when the engine is
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has started.
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.

If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/
stop carefully. The pedal might be harder to push or retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator
might go closer to the floor. It can take longer to stop. If light then goes off.
the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light
See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-43. comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or
comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service.
If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the
vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the
regular brake system warning light is also on, the vehicle
does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with
the regular brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 3-40.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), see
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 for all brake
related DIC messages.

3-41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 StabiliTrak® Indicator Light Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
For vehicles with the
StabiliTrak® system, this
light comes on briefly while
starting the engine.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your

dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off. United States Canada
If the light comes on and stays on while driving, there
could be a problem with the StabiliTrak® system and the This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
vehicle might need service. When this warning light is It also provides an indicator of how hard the vehicle is
on, the StabiliTrak® system is off and does not limit working. During a majority of the operation, the gage
wheel spin. reads 210°F (100°C) or less. If you are pulling a load or
The light flashes if the system is active and is working to going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to fluctuate
assist the driver with directional control of the vehicle in and approach the 250°F (122°C) mark. If the gage
difficult driving conditions. reaches the 260°F (125°C) mark, it indicates that the
cooling system is working beyond its capacity.
See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6 for more
information. See Engine Overheating on page 5-35.
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.

3-42

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tire Pressure Light When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
For vehicles with a tire This indicates that there could be a problem with the Tire
pressure monitoring Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about a
system, this light comes on minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the
briefly when the engine is ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition
started. cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-71
for more information.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

It provides information about tire pressures and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System. Check Engine Light
When the Light is On Steady A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
underinflated. the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It
ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See DIC environment.
Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 for more
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as it is
safe to do so. If a tire is underinflated, inflate to the
proper pressure. See Tires on page 5-61 for more
information.

3-43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 This light should come on Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
when the ignition is on, but transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of the
the engine is not running, vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
as a check to show it other than those of the same Tire Performance
is working. If it does not, Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s emission
have the vehicle serviced controls and can cause this light to come on.
by your dealer/retailer. Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. This
could also result in a failure to pass a required
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an Accessories and Modifications on page 5-3.
OBD II problem and service is required.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before two ways:
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle. This Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
system assists the service technician in correctly A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could
diagnosing any malfunction. damage the emission control system on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls might To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:
not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine might not run as
• Reduce vehicle speed.
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that might • Avoid hard accelerations.
not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
• If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being
hauled as soon as it is possible.

3-44

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, • Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel. Poor
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle. fuel quality causes the engine not to run as
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart efficiently as designed and can cause: stalling after
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous start-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed
steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or
as possible. stumbling on acceleration. These conditions
might go away once the engine is warmed up.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle. Diagnosis If one or more of these conditions occurs, change
and service might be required. the fuel brand used. It will require at least one
full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following: See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5.
• Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
the Tank on page 5-9. The diagnostic system can dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few developed.
driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
• If the vehicle has been driven through a deep
puddle of water, the vehicle’s electrical system
might be wet. The condition is usually corrected
when the electrical system dries out. A few driving
trips should turn the light off.

3-45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Oil Pressure Gage
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on with the engine running, or if the
key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD II United States Canada
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in
if the battery has recently been replaced or if the kPa (kilopascals).
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control
systems during normal driving. This can take several
days of routine driving. If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of
OBD II system readiness, your dealer/retailer can
prepare the vehicle for inspection.

3-46

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range. { CAUTION:
When the oil pressure reaches the low pressure
zone, the OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. The
message appears in the Driver Information Center (DIC). engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 and
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
Engine Oil on page 5-15 for more information.
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or some other problem causing
low oil pressure. Check the oil as soon as possible. Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.

3-47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Oil Pressure Light This light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it
does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator
light then goes off.
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is
not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and it might have some other system
problem.

Security Light
For information regarding
{ CAUTION: this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. The Content Theft-Deterrent on
engine can become so hot that it catches fire. page 2-22.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can

damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.

3-48

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Fog Lamp Light Highbeam On Light
The fog lamp light comes This light comes on when
on when the fog lamps are the high-beam headlamps
in use. are in use.

The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8
See Fog Lamps on page 3-17 for more information. for more information.

Cruise Control Light Tow/Haul Mode Light

The cruise control light This light comes on when
comes on whenever the the Tow/Haul mode has
cruise control is set. been activated.

The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off. For more information, see Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-38.
See Cruise Control on page 3-12 for more information.

3-49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Fuel Gage When the fuel tank is low, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message appears in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 for
more information.
Here are some situations owners may experience with
the fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem
with the fuel gage.
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
United States Canada took a little more or less than half the tank’s
capacity to fill the tank.
The fuel gage, when the ignition is on, shows how much
fuel the vehicle has left in the tank.
• The gage goes back to empty when the ignition is
turned off.
An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on. For vehicles with a Two-mode Hybrid, see the
Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information.
The gage first indicates empty before the vehicle is out of
fuel, and the vehicle’s fuel tank should be filled soon.

3-50

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Low Fuel Warning Light Driver Information Center (DIC)
This light, under the fuel Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
gage, comes on briefly The DIC displays information about your vehicle. It also
while the engine is being displays warning messages if a system problem is
started. detected.
All messages will appear in the DIC display located
below the tachometer in the instrument panel cluster.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display the information that was
This light and a chime comes on when the fuel tank is last displayed before the engine was turned off.
low on fuel. The Driver Information Center also displays
a “FUEL LEVEL LOW” message. See DIC Warnings If your vehicle has DIC buttons, see “DIC Operation and
and Messages on page 3-64 for more information. When Displays (With DIC Buttons)” later in this section and
fuel is added this light and message should go off. If DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on
it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your page 3-74 for the displays available.
dealer/retailer. If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, see “DIC
Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons)” later in
this section for the displays available.

3-51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons
DIC Buttons) The buttons are the
trip/fuel, vehicle
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, the information below information, customization,
explains the operation of this system. and set/reset buttons. The
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed button functions are
by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument detailed in the following
panel, next to the steering wheel. pages.
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system
information, and warning messages if a system problem
is detected.
The DIC also allows some features to be customized.
See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)
on page 3-74 for more information.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can also use the 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display the
trip odometer reset stem to view some of the DIC odometer, trip odometer, fuel range, average economy,
displays. See “DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC fuel used, timer, and transmission temperature. The
Buttons)” later in this section. compass and outside air temperature will also be shown
in the display. The temperature will be shown in °F or
°C depending on the units selected.

3-52

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to display To switch between English and metric measurements,
the oil life, units, side blind zone system on/off, tire see “Units” later in this section.
pressure readings for vehicles with the Tire Pressure Trip Odometer
Monitor System (TPMS), trailer brake gain and output
information for vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP displays. This
Control (ITBC) system, engine hours, Remote Keyless display shows the current distance traveled in either
Entry (RKE) transmitter programming, compass zone miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset for the
setting, and compass recalibration. trip odometer. Pressing the trip odometer reset stem
will also display the trip odometer.
U (Customization): Press this button to customize the
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the
feature settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle set/reset button while the trip odometer is displayed.
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-74 for more You can also reset the trip odometer while it is displayed
information. by pressing and holding the trip odometer reset stem.
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset certain The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to the
on the DIC. number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition was
last turned on. This can be used if the trip odometer is not
Trip/Fuel Menu Items reset at the beginning of the trip.
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll through the the set/reset button for at least four seconds. The trip
following menu items: odometer will display the number of miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last turned
Odometer on and the vehicle was moving.
Press the trip/fuel button until ODOMETER displays.
This display shows the distance the vehicle has
been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display
the odometer.

3-53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Once the vehicle begins moving, the trip odometer will Average Economy
accumulate mileage. For example, if the vehicle was
driven 5 miles (8 km) before it is started again, and then Press the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMY displays.
the retro-active reset feature is activated, the display will This display shows the approximate average miles
show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, the per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles This number is calculated based on the number of
(8.4 km), etc. mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time this menu
item was reset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press
Fuel Range and hold the set/reset button.
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays. Fuel Used
This display shows the approximate number of remaining
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehicle can be driven Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL USED displays.
without refueling. The display will show LOW if the fuel This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or
level is low. liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this menu
item. To reset the fuel used information, press and hold
The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the the set/reset button while FUEL USED is displayed.
vehicle’s fuel economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. This Timer
estimate will change if driving conditions change.
Press the trip/fuel button until TIMER displays. This
For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent
display can be used as a timer.
stops, this display may read one number, but if
the vehicle is driven on a freeway, the number may To start the timer, press the set/reset button while TIMER
change even though the same amount of fuel is in the is displayed. The display will show the amount of time
fuel tank. This is because different driving conditions that has passed since the timer was last reset, not
produce different fuel economies. Generally, freeway including time the ignition is off. Time will continue to be
driving produces better fuel economy than city driving. counted as long as the ignition is on, even if another
Fuel range cannot be reset. display is being shown on the DIC. The timer will record
up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59)
after which the display will return to zero.

3-54

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To stop the timer, press the set/reset button briefly while When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
TIMER is displayed. ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display.
See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the set/reset
Warnings and Messages on page 3-64. You should
button while TIMER is displayed.
change the oil as soon as you can. See Engine Oil on
Transmission Temperature page 5-15. In addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is
Press the trip/fuel button until TRANS TEMP displays. recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
This display shows the temperature of the automatic manual. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for
transmission fluid in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or more information.
degrees Celsius (°C).
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display
Blank Display yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself.
Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display
This display shows no information.
accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just
Vehicle Information Menu Items been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the
next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system, see
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to scroll Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18.
through the following menu items:
Oil Life
Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate
of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains. The engine oil life system
will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent
with your driving conditions.

3-55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Side Blind Zone Alert Tire Pressure
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
system, this display allows the system to be turned on or (TPMS), the pressure for each tire can be viewed in the
off. Once in this display, press the set/reset button to DIC. The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds
select between ON or OFF. If you choose ON, the per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press
system will be turned on. If you choose OFF, the system the vehicle information button until the DIC displays
will be turned off. When the SBZA system is turned FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press the
off, the DIC will display the SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT vehicle information button again until the DIC displays
SYSTEM OFF message as a reminder that the REAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
system has been turned off. See DIC Warnings and If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by the
Messages on page 3-64 and Side Blind Zone Alert
system while driving, a message advising you to
(SBZA) on page 2-58 for more information. check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the
Units display. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-70 and
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 for more
Press the vehicle information button until UNITS information.
displays. This display allows you to select between
English or Metric units of measurement. Once in this If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a
display, press the set/reset button to select between value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this
ENGLISH or METRIC units. All of the vehicle information consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer for service.
will then be displayed in the unit of measurement
selected.

3-56

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Trailer Gain and Output Relearn Remote Key
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry
(ITBC) system, the trailer brake display appears in the (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match an RKE
DIC. Press the vehicle information button until transmitter to your vehicle:
TRAILER GAIN and OUTPUT display. 1. Press the vehicle information button until
TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting. This PRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either a
trailer connected or disconnected. To adjust this setting, 2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY
see “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” under LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
Towing a Trailer on page 4-50 for more information. 3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the
OUTPUT shows the power output to the trailer anytime first transmitter at the same time for about
a trailer with electric brakes is connected. Output is 15 seconds.
displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes may appear in On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
the OUTPUT display. See “Integrated Trailer Brake transmitter learned will match driver 1 and
Control System” under Towing a Trailer on page 4-50 the second will match driver 2.
for more information. A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is
matched.
Engine Hours
4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat
Press the vehicle information button until ENGINE Step 3.
HOURS displays. This display shows the total number
of hours the engine has run. Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight
transmitters matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.

3-57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Compass Zone Setting If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, you can use
the trip odometer reset stem to view the following
This display allows for setting the compass zone. See displays: odometer, engine hours, trip odometer,
DIC Compass on page 3-61 compass zone setting, compass recalibration, oil life,
Compass Recalibration Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter programming,
and display language.
This display allows for calibrating the compass. See DIC
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can use the trip
Compass on page 3-61
odometer reset stem to view the following displays:
Blank Display odometer, engine hours, trip odometer, and display
language.
This display shows no information.
Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items
DIC Operation and Displays Odometer
(Without DIC Buttons) Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER
displays. This display shows the distance the vehicle
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the has been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
information below explains the operation of this system.
Engine Hours
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the trip odometer reset stem located on the To display the ENGINE HOURS, place the ignition in
instrument panel cluster. Pressing the trip odometer LOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY, then press and hold
reset stem will also turn off, or acknowledge, DIC the trip odometer reset stem for four seconds while
messages. viewing the ODOMETER. This display shows the total
number of hours the engine has run.
The DIC displays trip and vehicle system information,
and warning messages if a system problem is detected.

3-58

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Trip Odometer Transmission Temperature
Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP displays. Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRANS TEMP
This display shows the current distance traveled in displays. This display shows the temperature of the
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset automatic transmission fluid in either degrees
for the trip odometer. Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing and Trailer Gain and Output
holding the trip odometer reset stem while the trip
odometer is displayed. On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
(ITBC) system, the trailer brake display appears in the
The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active DIC. Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRAILER
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to the GAIN and OUTPUT display.
number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition was
last turned on. This can be used if the trip odometer is not TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting. This
reset at the beginning of the trip. setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either a
trailer connected or disconnected. To adjust this setting,
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the see “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” under
trip odometer reset stem for at least four seconds. The Towing a Trailer on page 4-50 for more information.
trip odometer will display the number of miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last turned OUTPUT shows the power output to the trailer anytime
on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle begins a trailer with electric brakes is connected. Output is
moving, the trip odometer will accumulate mileage. For displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes may appear in
example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles (8 km) before it the OUTPUT display. See “Integrated Trailer Brake
is started again, and then the retro-active reset feature is Control System” under Towing a Trailer on page 4-50
activated, the display will show 5 miles (8 km). As the for more information.
vehicle begins moving, the display will then increase to
5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.

3-59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Compass Zone Setting Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display
yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself.
This display allows for setting the compass zone. See Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display
DIC Compass on page 3-61 for more information. accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just
Compass Recalibration been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the
next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system, see
This display allows for calibrating the compass. See DIC Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18.
Compass on page 3-61 for more information.
Relearn Remote Key
Oil Life
To access this display, the vehicle must be in P (Park).
To access this display, the vehicle must be in P (Park). This display allows you to match Remote Keyless
Press the trip odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE Entry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match an
REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate RKE transmitter to your vehicle:
of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until RELEARN
REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the
REMOTE KEY displays.
current oil life remains. The engine oil life system
will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent 2. Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for
with your driving conditions. three seconds.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE The message REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display. will display.
See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC 3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the
Warnings and Messages on page 3-64. You should first transmitter at the same time for about
change the oil as soon as you can. See Engine Oil on 15 seconds.
page 5-15. In addition to the engine oil life system
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
the second will match driver 2.
manual. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for
more information. A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is
matched.

3-60

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat DIC Compass
Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight Your vehicle may have a compass in the Driver
transmitters matched to it. Information Center (DIC).
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the Compass Zone
key to LOCK/OFF.
The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.
Language Your dealer/retailer will set the correct zone for your
location.
This display allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear. To select a language: Under certain circumstances, such as during a long
distance cross-country trip or moving to a new state or
1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until province, it will be necessary to compensate for
ODOMETER displays. compass variance by resetting the zone through the
2. While in the ODOMETER display, press and hold DIC if the zone is not set correctly.
the trip odometer reset stem for three seconds until Compass variance is the difference between the earth’s
the currently set language displays. magnetic north and true geographic north. If the
3. Continue to press and hold the trip odometer reset compass is not set to the zone where you live, the
stem to scroll through all of the available languages. compass may give false readings. The compass must
The available languages are ENGLISH (default), be set to the variance zone in which the vehicle is
FRANCAIS (French), ESPANOL (Spanish), and traveling.
NO CHANGE.
4. Once the desired language is displayed, release
the trip odometer reset stem to set your choice.

3-61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To adjust for compass variance, use the following
procedure:
Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure
1. Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is
moving. Only set it when the vehicle is in P (Park).
Press the vehicle information button until PRESS
V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONE displays.
Or, if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, press
the trip odometer reset stem until CHANGE
COMPASS ZONE displays.

2. Find the vehicle’s current location and variance

zone number on the map.
Zones 1 through 15 are available.
3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and
select the appropriate variance zone.

3-62

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. Press the trip/fuel button until the vehicle To calibrate the compass, use the following procedure:
heading, for example, N for North, is displayed
in the DIC. Or, if the vehicle does not have Compass Calibration Procedure
DIC buttons, press and hold the trip odometer reset 1. Before calibrating the compass, make sure the
stem for two seconds to select the next available compass zone is set to the variance zone in
variance zone. Repeat this step until the appropriate which the vehicle is located. See “Compass
variance zone is displayed. Variance (Zone) Procedure” earlier in this section.
5. If calibration is necessary, calibrate the compass. Do not operate any switches such as window,
See “Compass Calibration Procedure” following. sunroof, climate controls, seats, etc. during
the calibration procedure.
Compass Calibration
2. Press the vehicle information button until
The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate PRESS V TO CALIBRATE COMPAS (Compass)
the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location,
such as an open parking lot, where driving the vehicle in displays. Or, if the vehicle does not have DIC
circles is not a danger. It is suggested to calibrate away buttons, press the trip odometer reset stem until
from tall buildings, utility wires, manhole covers, or other CALIBRATE COMPASS displays.
industrial structures, if possible. 3. Press the set/reset button to start the compass
calibration. Or, if the vehicle does not have DIC
If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display, the
buttons, press and hold the trip odometer reset stem
compass should be calibrated.
for two seconds to start the compass calibration.
If the DIC display does not show a heading, for example,
4. The DIC will display CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
N for North, or the heading does not change after making
CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in tight circles at less
turns, there may be a strong magnetic field interfering
than 5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the calibration. The
with the compass. Such interference may be caused by a
DIC will display CALIBRATION COMPLETE for a
magnetic CB or cell phone antenna mount, a magnetic
few seconds when the calibration is complete. The
emergency light, magnetic note pad holder, or any other
DIC display will then return to the previous menu.
magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle, move the magnetic
item, then turn on the vehicle and calibrate the compass.

3-63

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DIC Warnings and Messages CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver This message displays when the engine oil needs to be
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that some changed. When you change the engine oil, be sure to
action may be needed by the driver to correct the reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message. See
condition. Multiple messages may appear one after Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18 for information on
another. how to reset the message. See Engine Oil on page 5-15
and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for more
Some messages may not require immediate action, but information.
you can press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument
panel or the trip odometer reset stem on the instrument CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
panel cluster to acknowledge that you received the
messages and to clear them from the display. On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure in
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC one or more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked.
display because they are more urgent. These messages This message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT
require action before they can be cleared. You should FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate which
take any messages that appear on the display seriously tire needs to be checked. You can receive more than
and remember that clearing the messages will only one tire pressure message at a time. To read the other
make the messages disappear, not correct the problem. messages that may have been sent at the same
The following are the possible messages that can be time, press the set/reset button or the trip odometer
displayed and some information about them. reset stem. If a tire pressure message appears on the
DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading
Hybrid manual for more information.
Information label. See Tires on page 5-61, Loading the
Vehicle on page 4-33, and Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-70. The DIC also shows the tire pressure
values. See “DIC Operation and Displays (With
DIC Buttons)” earlier in this section. If the tire pressure
is low, the low tire pressure warning light comes on.
See Tire Pressure Light on page 3-43.

3-64

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHECK TRAILER WIRING DRIVER DOOR OPEN
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver
(ITBC) system, this message may display and a chime door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out
may sound when one of the following conditions exists: of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door
• A trailer with electric brakes becomes disconnected for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to
see if the message still appears on the DIC.
from the vehicle.
− If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is ENGINE HOT A/C (Air Conditioning)
stopped, this message clears itself after a TURNED OFF
short time.
− If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is This message displays when the engine coolant
moving, this message stays on until the ignition becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
is turned off. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-42. To
avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air conditioning
• There is a short in the wiring to the electric trailer compressor automatically turns off. When the coolant
brakes. temperature returns to normal, the air conditioning
When this message displays, power is no longer compressor turns back on. You can continue to drive your
available to the trailer brakes. vehicle.

As soon as it is safe to do so, carefully pull your vehicle If this message continues to appear, have the system
over to the side of the road and turn the ignition off. repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible
Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn the to avoid damage to the engine.
ignition back on. This message clears if the trailer is ENGINE OIL HOT IDLE ENGINE
reconnected. This message also clears if you
acknowledge it. If this message still displays, either This message displays when the engine oil becomes
your vehicle or the trailer needs service. See your hotter than the normal operating temperature. Stop and
dealer/retailer. allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down. See
See “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” under Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-42.
Towing a Trailer on page 4-50 for more information.

3-65

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is This message displays and a chime sounds when the
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If an cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine
overheat warning appears on the instrument panel further enters the engine coolant protection mode.
cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as See Engine Overheating on page 5-35 for further
possible. See Engine Overheating on page 5-35 for information.
more information.
This message also displays when the vehicle’s engine
This message displays when the engine coolant power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to idle vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on,
until it cools down. See Engine Coolant Temperature but there is no reduction in performance, proceed
Gage on page 3-42. to your destination. The performance may be reduced
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may
page 5-37 for information on driving to a safe place be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on,
in an emergency. but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime
this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE to your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is FUEL LEVEL LOW
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If an
overheat warning appears on the instrument panel This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel
cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as level is low. Refuel as soon as possible. See Fuel Gage
possible. See Engine Overheating on page 5-35 for on page 3-50 and Fuel on page 5-5 for more
more information. information.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the engine HEATED WASHER FLUID SYSTEM OFF
cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for
operation. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is This message displays when the heated windshield
safe to do so to avoid severe damage. This message washer has been turned off. See Windshield Washer on
clears when the engine has cooled to a safe operating page 3-10 for more information.
temperature.

3-66

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 HEATING WASH FLUID WASH WIPES OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
PENDING Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
This message displays when the heated windshield oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
washer system is heating the fluid. See Windshield occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
Washer on page 3-10 for more information. Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
HOOD OPEN the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
See Engine Oil on page 5-15 for more information.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the hood is
not fully closed. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the This message displays if low oil pressure levels
hood for obstructions, and close the hood again. Check to occur. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and
see if the message still appears on the DIC. do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure
has been corrected. Check the oil as soon as possible
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
See Engine Oil on page 5-15.
This message displays when ice conditions are possible.
PARK ASSIST OFF
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver (URPA) system, after the vehicle has been started, this
side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted message displays to remind the driver that the URPA
out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the system has been turned off. Press the set/reset
door for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to button or the trip odometer reset stem to acknowledge
see if the message still appears on the DIC. this message and clear it from the DIC display. To
turn the URPA system back on, see Ultrasonic Rear
Parking Assist (URPA) on page 2-56.

3-67

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 PASSENGER DOOR OPEN REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
This message displays and a chime sounds if the front This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
passenger door is not fully closed and the vehicle is transmitter battery is low. The battery needs to be
shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle, replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement”
check the door for obstructions, and close the door under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation
again. Check to see if the message still appears on page 2-5.
on the DIC.
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
REAR ACCESS OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
This message displays and a chime sounds if the passenger side rear door is not fully closed and the
liftgate or liftglass is open while the ignition is in vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the
ON/RUN. Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate and vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close
liftglass. Restart the vehicle and check for the message the door again. Check to see if the message still
on the DIC display. appears on the DIC.

REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE

This message displays while you are matching a This message displays if a problem occurs with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle. four-wheel-drive system. If this message appears, stop
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Make
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation sure the key is in the LOCK/OFF position for at least
on page 2-5 and DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC one minute and then restart the vehicle and check
Buttons) on page 3-52 or DIC Operation and Displays for the message on the DIC display. If the message is
(Without DIC Buttons) on page 3-58 for more still displayed or appears again when you begin
information. driving, the four-wheel-drive system needs service. See
your dealer/retailer.

3-68

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE AIR BAG SERVICE BRAKES SOON
This message displays if there is a problem with the This message displays if there is a problem with the
airbag system. Have your dealer/retailer inspect brake system. If this message appears, stop as soon as
the system for problems. See Airbag Readiness Light possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle
on page 3-37 and Airbag System on page 1-81 for more and check for the message on the DIC display. If
information. the message is still displayed or appears again when
you begin driving, the brake system needs service. See
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING your dealer/retailer.
SYSTEM SERVICE PARK ASSIST
On some vehicles, this message displays if there is a
problem with the battery charging system. Under certain If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
conditions, the charging system light may also turn (URPA) system, this message displays if there is a
on in the instrument panel cluster. See Charging System problem with the URPA system. Do not use this system
Light on page 3-39. Driving with this problem could to help you park. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
drain the battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories. (URPA) on page 2-56 for more information. See
Have the electrical system checked as soon as your dealer/retailer for service.
possible. See your dealer/retailer. SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM SYSTEM
This message displays along with the brake system If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
warning light if there is a problem with the brake system. system and this message displays, both SBZA displays
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-40. If this will remain on indicating there is a problem with the
message appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off SBZA system. If these displays remain on after
the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the continued driving, the system needs service. See your
message on the DIC display. If the message is still dealer/retailer. See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
displayed or appears again when you begin driving, the on page 2-58 for more information.
brake system needs service as soon as possible.
See your dealer/retailer.

3-69

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE STABILITRAK SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak® and this message On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
displays, it means there may be a problem with the (TPMS), this message displays if a part on the TPMS is
StabiliTrak system. If you see this message, try to reset not working properly. The tire pressure light also
the system. Stop; turn off the engine for at least flashes and then remains on during the same ignition
15 seconds; then start the engine again. If this message cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on page 3-43. Several
still comes on, it means there is a problem. You conditions may cause this message to appear. See Tire
should see your dealer/retailer for service. The vehicle Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-73 for more
is safe to drive, however, you do not have the benefit information. If the warning comes on and stays on, there
of StabiliTrak, so reduce your speed and drive may be a problem with the TPMS. See your
accordingly. dealer/retailer.

SERVICE SUSPENSION SYSTEM SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL

If your vehicle has the Autoride® suspension system, If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays
this message displays when the Autoride suspension when there is a problem with the Traction Control
system is not operating properly. Have your vehicle System (TCS). When this message displays, the system
serviced by your dealer/retailer. will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
See your dealer/retailer for service. See StabiliTrak®
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM System on page 4-6 for more information.
This message displays when there is a problem with
the theft-deterrent system. The vehicle may or may not
restart so you may want to take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer before turning off the engine. See
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer Operation on
page 2-24 for more information.

3-70

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM SIDE BLIND ZONE SYS. (System)
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control UNAVAILABLE
(ITBC) system, this message displays and a chime If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
sounds when there is a problem with the ITBC system. system, this message displays when the SBZA system
When this message displays, power is no longer is disabled because the sensor is blocked and cannot
available to the trailer brakes. detect vehicles in your blind zone. The sensor may
be blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush. This
As soon as it is safe to do so, carefully pull your vehicle
message may also display during heavy rain or due to
over to the side of the road and turn the ignition off.
road spray. It may also come on when driving in
Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn the
isolated areas with no guardrails, trees, or road signs
ignition back on. If this message still displays, either your
and light traffic. Your vehicle does not need service. For
vehicle or the trailer needs service. See your
cleaning instructions, see Washing Your Vehicle on
dealer/retailer.
page 5-110. See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on
See “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” under page 2-58 for more information.
Towing a Trailer on page 4-50 for more information.
STABILITRAK OFF
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays
SYSTEM OFF when you turn off StabiliTrak, or when the stability control
has been automatically disabled. To limit wheel spin and
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) realize the full benefits of the stability enhancement
system, this message displays when the SBZA system system, you should normally leave StabiliTrak on.
has been turned off. See Side Blind Zone Alert However, you should turn StabiliTrak off if your vehicle
(SBZA) on page 2-58 and DIC Operation and Displays gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow and you want to
(With DIC Buttons) on page 3-52 or DIC Operation rock your vehicle to attempt to free it, or if you are driving
and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 3-58 for in extreme off-road conditions and require more wheel
more information. spin. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or
Snow on page 4-31. To turn the StabiliTrak system on or
off, see StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6.

3-71

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 There are several conditions that can cause this TIGHTEN GAS CAP
message to appear.
This message may display along with the check engine
• One condition is overheating, which could occur if light on the instrument panel cluster if the vehicle’s
StabiliTrak activates continuously for an extended fuel cap is not tightened properly. See Malfunction
period of time. Indicator Lamp on page 3-43. Reinstall the fuel cap fully.
• The message also displays if the brake system See Filling the Tank on page 5-9. The diagnostic
warning light is on. See Brake System Warning system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
Light on page 3-40. improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
• The message could display if the stability system driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn
takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic this light and message off.
checks due to driving conditions.
• The message displays if an engine or vehicle TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
related problem has been detected and the vehicle On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
needs service. See your dealer/retailer. (TPMS), this message displays when the TPMS
• The message also displays if the vehicle is shifted is re-learning the tire positions on your vehicle. The tire
into 4LO. positions must be re-learned after rotating the tires
or after replacing a tire or sensor. See Tire Inspection
The message turns off as soon as the conditions that and Rotation on page 5-76, Tire Pressure Monitor
caused the message to be displayed are no longer System on page 5-71, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
present. page 5-70 for more information.

3-72

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TRACTION CONTROL OFF TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
when the Traction Control System (TCS) is turned transmission fluid is overheating and the
off. Adjust your driving accordingly. See StabiliTrak® transmission temperature warning is displayed on
System on page 4-6 for more information. the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead to
TRAILER CONNECTED costly repairs that would not be covered by
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with
(ITBC) system, this message displays briefly when overheated transmission fluid or while the
a trailer with electric brakes is first connected to transmission temperature warning is displayed.
the vehicle. This message displays along with a sound if the
This message clears itself after several seconds. This transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot. Driving with
message also clears if you acknowledge it. After the transmission fluid temperature high can cause
this message clears, the TRAILER GAIN/OUTPUT damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
display appears in the DIC. allow the transmission to cool. This message clears
and the chime stops when the fluid temperature reaches
See “TRAILER GAIN/OUTPUT” under DIC Operation a safe level.
and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-52 or
DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on TURN SIGNAL ON
page 3-58 and “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System”
under Towing a Trailer on page 4-50 for more This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn
information. signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the turn
signal/multifunction lever to the off position.

3-73

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID Entering the Feature Settings Menu
This message displays when the windshield washer 1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as P (Park).
soon as possible. See Engine Compartment Overview To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
on page 5-14 for the location of the windshield recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
washer fluid reservoir. Also, see Windshield Washer
Fluid on page 5-39 for more information. 2. Press the customization button to scroll through the
available customizable options.

DIC Vehicle Customization Feature Settings Menu Items

(With DIC Buttons) The following are customization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
allow you to program certain features to one preferred DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
setting. Customization features can only be programmed
This feature will only display if a language other than
to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed
English has been set. This feature allows you to change
to a preferred setting for two different drivers.
the language in which the DIC messages appear to
All of the customization options may not be available on English.
your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on the DIC. Press the customization button until the PRESS V TO
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC
The default settings for the customization features were display. Press the set/reset button once to display all
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have DIC messages in English.
been changed from their default state since then.
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
To change customization preferences, use the following
procedure.

3-74

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DISPLAY LANGUAGE AUTO DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the language in which This feature allows you to select when the vehicle’s
the DIC messages will appear. doors will automatically lock. See Programmable
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY Automatic Door Locks on page 2-11 for more
LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display. Press information.
the set/reset button once to access the settings for Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
this feature. Then press the customization button LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
to scroll through the following settings: button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in the following settings:
English.
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors will
FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French. automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of
ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish. P (Park).

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors will automatically lock
The current setting will remain. when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for
three seconds.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
You can also change the language by pressing the trip
odometer reset stem. See “Language” under DIC To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) earlier in desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
this section for more information.

3-75

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 AUTO DOOR UNLOCK REMOTE DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select whether or not to This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
turn off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also you will receive when locking the vehicle with the
allows you to select which doors and when the doors will Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE
Door Locks on page 2-11 for more information. transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5 for more
information.
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
through the following settings: button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock. the following settings:
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will OFF: There will be no feedback when you press the
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition. lock button on the RKE transmitter.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will unlock LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press
the key is taken out of the ignition. of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lamps will
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). flash when you press the lock button on the RKE
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. transmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock button
The current setting will remain. is pressed again within five seconds of the previous
command.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

3-76

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. DELAY DOOR LOCK
The current setting will remain.
This feature allows you to select whether or not the
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the locking of the vehicle’s doors and liftgate will be delayed.
desired setting is displayed on the DIC. When locking the doors and liftgate with the power
door lock switch and a door or the liftgate is open, this
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK feature will delay locking the doors and liftgate until
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you five seconds after the last door is closed. You will hear
will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the Remote three chimes to signal that the delayed locking
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not receive feature is in use. The key must be out of the ignition for
feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE this feature to work. You can temporarily override
transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless delayed locking by pressing the power door lock switch
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5 for more twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice.
information. See Delayed Locking on page 2-11 for more information.
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature. Then button once to access the settings for this feature.
press the customization button to scroll through the Then press the customization button to scroll through
following settings: the following settings:
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle’s
you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter. doors.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE
after the last door or the liftgate is closed.
transmitter.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain. The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC. desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

3-77

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 EXIT LIGHTING APPROACH LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select the amount of time you This feature allows you to select whether or not to have
want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light
enough outside. This happens after the key is turned periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING Press the customization button until APPROACH
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the
once to access the settings for this feature. Then set/reset button once to access the settings for
press the customization button to scroll through the this feature. Then press the customization button to
following settings: scroll through the following settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on. OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on
for 30 seconds. ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for with the RKE transmitter.
one minute.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or the
two minutes. vehicle is no longer off. See Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on page 2-5 for more
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
information.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
desired setting is displayed on the DIC. The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

3-78

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHIME VOLUME PARK TILT MIRRORS
This feature allows you to select the volume level of the If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
chime. whether or not the outside mirror(s) will automatically tilt
Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME down when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2-55 for more information.
button once to access the settings for this feature. Then Press the customization button until PARK TILT
press the customization button to scroll through the MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press the
following settings: set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button to
NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a normal scroll through the following settings:
level.
OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted down
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level. when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror will be
The current setting will remain. tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will
stay at the last known setting. PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the R (Reverse).
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’s outside
mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into R (Reverse).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

3-79

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 EASY EXIT RECALL NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 1-8 desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
for more information.
EASY EXIT SETUP
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT
RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
button once to access the settings for this feature. which areas will recall with the automatic easy exit seat
Then press the customization button to scroll through feature. It also allows you to turn off the automatic
the following settings: easy exit feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals
on page 1-8 and “EASY EXIT RECALL” earlier for
DOOR BUTTON ONLY: No automatic seat exit recall more information.
will occur. The recall will only occur after pressing Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SETUP
the easy exit seat button. appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
BUTTON & KEY OUT (default): If the features are once to access the settings for this feature. Then
enabled through the EASY EXIT SETUP menu, press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
the driver’s seat will move back when the key is following settings:
removed from the ignition or after pressing the easy exit OFF: No automatic seat exit will recall.
seat button.
SEAT ONLY (Default): The driver’s seat will recall.
The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur
one time after the key is removed from the ignition. If the NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
automatic movement has already occurred, and you put The current setting will remain.
the key back in the ignition and remove it again, the seat
will stay in the original exit position, unless a memory To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
recall took place prior to removing the key again. desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

3-80

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MEMORY SEAT RECALL REMOTE START
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn the
your preference for the remote memory seat recall remote start off or on. The remote start feature allows
feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using
on page 1-8 for more information. the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See
Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-8 for more information.
Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT
RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset Press the customization button until REMOTE START
button once to access the settings for this feature. appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
Then press the customization button to scroll through button once to access the settings for this feature. Then
the following settings: press the customization button to scroll through the
following settings:
OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall will occur.
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON: The driver’s seat and, on some vehicles, the outside
mirrors will automatically move to the stored driving ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
position when the unlock button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed. On some vehicles NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
with the adjustable throttle and brake pedal feature, the feature. The current setting will remain.
pedals will also automatically move. See “Relearn To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
Remote Key” under DIC Operation and Displays desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
(With DIC Buttons) on page 3-52 or DIC Operation and
Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 3-58 for more
information on matching transmitters to driver ID
numbers.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

3-81

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FACTORY SETTINGS EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
This feature allows you to set all of the customization This feature allows you to exit the feature settings menu.
features back to their factory default settings.
Press the customization button until PRESS V TO EXIT
Press the customization button until FACTORY FEATURE SETTINGS appears in the DIC display.
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the Press the set/reset button once to exit the menu.
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button to If you do not exit, pressing the customization button
scroll through the following settings: again will return you to the beginning of the feature
settings menu.
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features
will be set to their factory default settings. Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will The feature settings menu will be exited when any of
not be set to their factory default settings. the following occurs:
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the • The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.
desired setting is displayed on the DIC. • The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are
pressed.
• The end of the feature settings menu is reached
and exited.
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.

3-82

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Audio System(s) For more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 4-2.
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
following pages to become familiar with its features. any equipment.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
{ CAUTION: interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods telephone equipment.
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With
you or others. Do not give extended attention to RAP, the audio system can be played even after the
entertainment tasks while driving. ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 2-28 for more information.
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
• Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.

3-83

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Setting the Clock Changing the Time and Date Default
Settings
MP3 Radios with a Single CD or a To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
Single CD and DVD Player 24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year, follow these
If the vehicle has a radio with a single CD or a CD and instructions:
DVD player, it has a H (clock) button for setting the
time and date. 1. Press the H button and then the pushbutton
located under the forward arrow that is currently
To set the time and date: displayed on the radio screen until the time 12H and
1. Press the H button and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, 24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day,
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year) and year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)
displays. displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the 2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
labels to change it. Every time the pushbutton is option.
pressed again, the time or the date if selected, 3. Press the H button again to apply the selected
increases by one. default, or let the screen time out.
• Another way to increase the time or date,
is to press the right ¨SEEK arrow or
the \ FWD (forward) button.
• To decrease the time or date, press the
left ©SEEK arrow or the s REV (reverse)
button, or turn the f (tune) knob, located on the
upper right side of the radio, to adjust the
selected setting.

3-84

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD Player Changing the Time and Date Default
If the vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD player, the
Settings
radio has a MENU button instead of the H (clock) To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
button to set the time and date. 24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year, follow these
To set the time and date: instructions:
1. Press the MENU button. 1. Press the MENU button. Once the H option
2. Once the H (clock) option displays, press the displays, press the pushbutton located under
pushbutton located under that label. The HR, the forward arrow that is currently displayed on the
MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, radio screen until the 12H (hour) and 24H (hour),
and year) displays. and the date MM/DD (month and day) and DD/MM
(day and month) displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
labels to change it. Every time the pushbutton is 2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
pressed again, the time or the date if selected, option.
increases by one. 3. Press the MENU button again to apply the selected
• Another way to increase the time or date, default, or let the screen time out.
is to press the right ¨SEEK arrow or the
\ FWD (forward) button.
• To decrease the time or date, press the
left ©SEEK arrow or the s REV (reverse)
button, or turn the f (tune) knob, located on the
upper right side of the radio, to adjust the
selected setting.

3-85

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Radio(s)

Radio with CD and DVD

Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio
similar system.

3-86

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Radios with CD and DVD Playing the Radio
Radios with CD and DVD have a Bose® Surround Sound O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on
System. Some of its features are explained later in this
and off.
section under, “Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)”.
If the vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
system, it has a CD/DVD radio. See Rear Seat decrease the volume.
Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-127 Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios with
The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate. Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) automatically
The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed adjusts the radio volume to compensate for road and
DVD Audio or DVD Video media, (DTS and DTS wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows down.
Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital The volume level should be consistent while driving.
Theater Systems, Inc.). To activate SCV:
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. 1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories. 2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
Radio Data System (RDS) 3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS). The (automatic volume) label on the radio displays.
RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations that 4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
broadcast RDS information. This system relies upon Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
receiving specific information from these stations and or High) to select the level of radio volume
only works when the information is available. While the compensation. The display times out after
radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station name or approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
call letters displays. In rare cases, a radio station could increases the audio volume to compensate for
broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio faster vehicle speeds.
features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the
radio station.

3-87

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Noise Compensation Technology: Vehicles with The Finding a Station
LTZ package and a Bose® Audio System include the
Bose AudioPilot® noise compensation technology. When BAND: Press to switch between AM, FM, or XM™
turned on, AudioPilot® continuously adjusts the audio (if equipped). The selection displays.
system equalization, to compensate for background
noise, so that music always sounds the same at the set f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
volume level.
©SEEK ¨: Press either SEEK arrow to go to the
This feature is most effective at lower radio volume
previous or to the next station and stay there.
settings where background noise can affect how well the
music is heard. At higher volume settings, where the To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for a
music is much louder than the background noise, there few seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a
might be little or no adjustments by AudioPilot®. station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
To activate:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level. The radio only seeks and scans stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu. 4 (Information) (XM Satellite Radio Service, MP3, and
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM RDS Features): Press to switch the display between the
label on the radio display. radio station frequency and the time. When the ignition is
4. Press the pushbutton under the ON label. The in the OFF position, press 4 to display the time. For
display times out after approximately 10 seconds. vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA or RDS features, press 4 to
For additional information on AudioPilot®, please visit display additional text information related to the current
bose.com/audiopilot. FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3 or WMA song. If
information is available during XM, CD, MP3 or WMA
playback, the song title information displays on the top
line of the display and artist information displays on the
bottom line. When information is not available, “NO INFO”
displays.

3-88

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite 3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a
beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station and released, the station that was set, returns.
favorites while the vehicle is stopped. Tune to favorite
stations using the presets, favorites button, and steering 4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station
wheel controls, if the vehicle has this feature. See to be stored as a favorite.
Defensive Driving on page 4-2. The number of favorites pages can be setup using the
MENU button. To setup the number of favorites pages:
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be
programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons 1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
positioned below the radio station frequency labels and setup menu.
by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button). 2. Press the pushbutton located below the
Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages FAV 1-6 label.
of favorites, each having six favorite stations available
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by
per page. Each page of favorites can contain any
pressing the pushbutton located below the
combination of AM, FM, or XM (if equipped) stations.
displayed page numbers.
The balance/fade and tone settings that were previously 4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to
adjusted, are stored with the favorite stations. return to the original main radio screen showing the
To store a station as a favorite: radio station frequency labels and to begin the
process of programming favorites for the chosen
1. Tune to the desired radio station. amount of numbered pages.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where the
station is to be stored.

3-89

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Setting the Tone Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.
(Bass/Midrange/Treble) If the radio has a Bose® audio system, the EQ settings
are either MANUAL or TALK.
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the f knob Digital Signal Processing (DSP): Press the EQ button
until the tone control labels display. Continue pressing to to change the DSP settings (only available on Bose®
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton systems with the LTZ option package). DSP settings
provide a choice of different listening experiences.
positioned under the desired label. Turn the f knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the The following DSP settings are available:
highlighted setting. Adjust the highlighted setting • Normal — Select this setting to adjust the audio for
by pressing either SEEK arrow, \ FWD (forward), normal mode. This provides the best sound quality
or s REV (reverse) button until the desired levels are for all seating positions.
obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak or if there is • Driver — Select this setting to adjust the audio for
static, decrease the treble. the driver to receive the best possible sound
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle quality.
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the • Rear — Select this setting to adjust the audio for
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds. A the rear seat passengers to receive the best
beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position. possible sound quality.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the • Surround (Centerpoint®) — Select this setting to
middle position, press the f knob for more than enable Bose Centerpoint®. Centerpoint® signal
two seconds. processing produces a surround sound listening
experience from a CD or XM stereo digital audio
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choose bass source. Centerpoint® delivers five independent audio
and treble equalization settings designed for different channels from conventional two channel stereo
types of music. The choices are pop, rock, country, talk, recordings. (Not available for AM or FM.)
jazz, and classical. Selecting MANUAL or changing bass
or treble, returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble
settings.

3-90

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) Finding a Category (CAT) Station
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XM
fade, press the f knob until the speaker control labels stations when the radio is in the XM mode. To find
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired XM channels within a desired category:
label, or press the pushbutton positioned under the 1. Press the BAND button until the XM frequency
desired label. Turn the f knob clockwise or displays. Press the CAT button to display the
counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting. category labels. Continue pressing the CAT button
Adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either until the desired category name displays.
SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV button until the • Radios with CD and DVD can also navigate the
desired levels are obtained. category list by pressing the s REV button or
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position, the \ FWD button.
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or 2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired
FADE label for more than two seconds. A beep sounds category label to immediately tune to the first XM
and the level adjusts to the middle position. station associated with that category.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the 3. Turn the f knob, press the buttons below the right
middle position, press the f knob for more than or left arrows displayed, or press either SEEK arrow
two seconds. to go to the previous or to the next XM station
If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is turned on, the radio within the selected category.
disables FADE and the rear speakers mute. 4. To exit the category search mode, press the
FAV button or BAND button to display favorites
again.

3-91

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Undesired XM categories can be removed through the Radio Messages
setup menu. To remove an undesired category:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio Calibration Error: The audio system has been
setup menu. calibrated for the vehicle from the factory. If Calibration
Error displays, it means that the radio has not been
2. Press the pushbutton located below the configured properly for the vehicle and it must be
XM CAT label. returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
3. Turn the f knob to display the category to be Locked: This message displays when the
removed. THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio. Take
4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
label until the category name along with the word
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
Removed displays.
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
pushbutton under the Add label when a removed XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
category is displayed or by pressing the pushbutton 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
under the Restore All label. provinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of
Categories cannot be removed or added while the programming and commercial-free music,
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h). coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. During your
trial or when you subscribe, you will get unlimited
access to XM Radio Online for when you are not in the
vehicle. A service fee is required to receive the XM
service. For more information, contact XM at
xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

3-92

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Radio Messages for XM Only To insert multiple CDs:
See XM Radio Messages on page 3-114 later in this 1. Press and hold the ^ button for two seconds. A
section for further detail. beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player) 2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing. 3. Press the ^ button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player) Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing. To
LOAD ^ : Press this button to load CDs into the CD insert a CD while the ignition is off, first press the
player. This CD player holds up to six CDs. Z button or the DISP knob.
To insert one CD: If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD is in the
1. Press and release the ^ button. player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts to play where it
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc. stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. As
label side up. The player pulls the CD in. each new track starts to play, the track number displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

3-93

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Playing a CD (In Either the DVD or Care of CDs
CD Slot) If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced due
to CD-R or CD-RW quality, the method of recording, the
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The quality of the music that has been recorded, and the way
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing the CD-R or CD-RW has been handled. Handle them
in 5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and in 30 seconds for a carefully. Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their original
DVD, depending on media type and format ranges. cases or other protective cases and away from direct
If the ignition or radio is turned off, while a CD is in the sunlight and dust. The CD or DVD player scans the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. The does not play properly or not at all. Do not touch the
CD is controlled by the buttons on the radio faceplate or bottom side of a CD while handling it; this could damage
by the RSA unit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or
page 3-136 for more information. The DVD/CD decks, the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
(upper slot is the DVD deck and the lower slot is the CD If the surface of a CD is soiled, clean it with a soft, lint free
deck) of the radio are compatible with most audio cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3s. detergent solution mixed with water. Make sure the
When a CD is inserted, the text label DVD or CD wiping process starts from the center to the edge.
symbol displays on the left side of the radio display. As
each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

3-94

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Care of the CD and DVD Player For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold for
two seconds to eject all discs.
Do not add any label to a CD. It could get caught in the
CD or DVD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal Z DVD (Eject): Press and release to eject the disc
computer and a description label is needed, try labeling that is currently playing in the top slot. A beep sounds
the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen. and Ejecting Disc displays.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
If loading and reading of a disc cannot be completed,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject,
with lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player
press and hold for more than five seconds to force
mechanism.
the disc to eject.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD that is
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, currently playing.
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without ©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the the current track, if more than ten seconds on the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign CD have played. Press the right arrow to go to the next
materials, liquids, and debris. track.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this For Radios with CD and DVD, Press the left arrow to go
section. to the start of the current track, if more than five seconds
on the CD have played. If less than five seconds on
Z EJECT or CD (Eject): Press and release the CD have played, the previous track plays. Press the
to eject the disc that is currently playing. A CD right arrow to go to the next track.
ejecting from a radio with CD and DVD, ejects from
the bottom slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc If either arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the
displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. player continues moving backward or forward through
The disc can be removed. If the disc is not removed, after the tracks on the CD.
several seconds, the disc automatically pulls back into
the player.

3-95

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at player in random order, press the pushbutton
a reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to resume positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
playing the track. The elapsed time of the track displays. Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance To play the tracks from a CD loaded in the radio with
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a CD and DVD, press the DVD/CD AUX button when
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track. not sourced to the CD, or insert a disc partway into
The elapsed time of the track displays. the slot. A RDM label displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, the tracks To play tracks from a single CD in random order,
can be listened to in random, rather than sequential press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label
order. To use random: until Random Current Disc displays. Press the
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CD
player, insert a disc partway into the slot of the CD BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is
player. A RDM label displays. playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening.
To play the tracks from the single CD in random order,
press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label For the radio with CD and DVD, press to listen to the
until Random Current Disc displays. Press the radio while a CD or DVD is playing. The CD or
pushbutton again to turn off random play. DVD remains inside the radio for future listening or for
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CD viewing entertainment.
player, press and hold the ^ button. A beep sounds
and Load All Discs displays. Insert one or more discs
partway into the slot of the CD player.

3-96

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while Radios with CD and DVD Audio Output
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing the disc and/or track number displays when a Only one audio source can be heard through the
CD is in the player. Press again and the system speakers at a time. An audio source is defined as DVD
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such slot, CD slot, XM, FM/AM, Front Auxiliary Jack, or
as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is Rear Auxiliary Jack.
not connected, “No Input Device Found” displays.
Press the O button to turn the radio on. The radio can
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle be heard through all of the vehicle speakers.
through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to Front seat passengers can listen to the radio
the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message (AM, FM, or XM) by pressing the BAND button or
showing the track or chapter number displays when a the DVD/CD AUX button to select CD slot, DVD slot,
disc is in either slot. Press this button again and front, or rear auxiliary input (if available).
the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable If a playback device is plugged into the radio’s front
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device” auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack, the front seat
displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot passengers are able to listen to playback from this source
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two through the vehicle speakers. See “Using the Auxiliary
sources and does not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V)
a front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX Jacks” under, Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on
button cycles through all available options, such as: page 3-127 for more information.
DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary In some vehicles, depending on audio options, the rear
(if available). See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” speakers can be muted when the RSA power is
later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, turned on. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 3-136
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-127 for more information.
for more information.
If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear seat
operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote
control to navigate the CD (tracks only) through the
remote control.

3-97

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc Player Error: There are disc LOAD or disc EJECT
problems.
Radios with a Single CD or a Six-Disc CD player have
the capability of playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW • It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
disc. For more information on how to play an MP3 CD-R normal, the CD should play.
or CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index. • The road is very rough. When the road becomes
smoother, the CD should play.
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
CD-RW Disc
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
Radios with a CD and DVD player have the capability of try again.
playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more
information on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R or • There could have been a problem while burning
CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index. the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
CD Messages
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
CHECK DISC: Radios with a Single CD player or try a known good CD.
radios with a Six-Disc player displays CHECK DISC
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
and/or ejects the CD if an error occurs.
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
Radios with a CD and DVD player could display other displays an error message, write it down and provide it
messages when an error occurs: to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.

Optical Error: The disc was inserted upside down.

Disk Read Error: A disc was inserted with an invalid or
unknown format.

3-98

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Using the DVD Player Playing a DVD
The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on the DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle
remote control, or by the RSA system, or by the buttons through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio.
on the radio faceplate. See “Remote Control”, under The DVD/CD text label and a message showing track or
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-127 chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot.
and Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 3-136 for more Press this button again and the system automatically
information. searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable
The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected,
appropriate region code that is printed on the jacket of “No Aux Input Device” displays. If a disc is in both the
most DVDs. DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles
between the two sources and does not indicate “No Aux
The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most audio Input Device”. If a front auxiliary device is connected, the
CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all available options,
DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media along with MP3 and such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear
WMA formats. Auxiliary (if available). See “Using the Auxiliary Input
If an error message displays on the video screen or the Jack(s)” later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks”
radio, see “DVD Display Error Messages” under, under, Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-127 page 3-127 for more information.
and “DVD Radio Error Messages” in this section for
more information.

3-99

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 O (Power): Press to turn the radio on or off. Turn SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter): Press the right arrow
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease to go to the next track or chapter. This button might
the volume. Press and hold for more than two seconds not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
to turn off the radio and Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) information or the previews.
system, and to start the parental control feature.
Parental control prevents the rear seat occupant from s REV (Fast Reverse): Press to quickly reverse the
operating the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system or remote CD or DVD at five times the normal speed. The radio
control. displays the elapsed time while in fast reverse. To stop
fast reversing, press again. This button might not
A lock symbol displays next to the clock display. The work when the DVD is playing the copyright information
parental control feature remains on until this knob or the previews.
is pressed and held for more than two seconds again,
or until the driver turns the ignition off and exits the \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press to fast forward the CD
vehicle. or DVD. The radio displays the elapsed time and fast
forwards five times the normal speed. To stop fast
f (Tune): Turn to change tracks on a CD or DVD, to forwarding, press again. This button might not work
manually tune a radio station, or to change clock or date when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the
settings, while in the clock or date setting mode. See previews.
the information given earlier in this section specific to the
radio, CD, and the DVD. Also, see “Setting the Clock” Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD or DVD. If
in the index, for setting the clock and date. a CD or DVD is ejected, but not removed, the player
automatically pulls it back in after 15 seconds.
©SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press the left
arrow to return to the start of the current track or If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed,
chapter. Press the left arrow again to go to the previous because of an unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to
track or chapter. This button might not work when the eject, press and hold this button for more than
DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews. five seconds to force the disc to eject.

3-100

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons c (Stop): Press to stop playing, rewinding, or fast
Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menu forwarding a DVD.
shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press the
pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during r (Enter): Press to select the choices that are
DVD playback. See the tag options listed after, for highlighted in any menu.
more information.
y (Menu): Press to access the DVD menu. The DVD
The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD-V menu is different on every DVD. Use the pushbuttons
menus and controls through the remote control. See located under the navigation arrows to navigate
“Remote Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) the cursor through the DVD menu. After making a
System on page 3-127 for more information. The selection press this button. This button only operates
Video Screen automatically turns on when the DVD-V is when using a DVD.
inserted into the DVD slot.
Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause navigating through the menus.
icon displayed on the radio system, to toggle between
pausing or restarting playback of a DVD. If the forward q (Return): Press to exit the current active menu
arrow is showing on display, the system is in pause and return to the previous menu. This button operates
mode. If the pause icon is showing on display, the system only when a DVD is playing and a menu is active.
is in playback mode. If the DVD screen is off, press the
play button to turn the screen on.
Some DVDs begin playing after the previews have
finished, although there could be a delay of up to
30 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playing the movie
automatically, press the pushbutton located under the
play/pause symbol tag displayed on the radio. If the DVD
still does not play, refer to the on-screen instructions, if
available.

3-101

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for
navigating through the menus.
Once a DVD-A is inserted, radio display menu shows
several tag options for DVD playing. Press the e (Audio Stream): Press to cycle through audio
pushbuttons located under any desired tag option stream formats located on the DVD-A disc. The video
during DVD playback. See the tag options listed after, screen shows the audio stream changing.
for more information.
The rear seat operator can navigate the DVD-A menus Inserting a Disc
and controls through the remote control. See “Remote To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label side
Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System up, into the loading slot. The DVD player might not
on page 3-127 for more information. The Video accept some paper labeled media. The player starts
Screen does not automatically power on when the loading the disc into the system and shows “Loading
DVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot. It must be manually Disc” on the radio display. At the same time, the radio
turned on by the rear seat occupant through the displays a softkey menu of option(s). Some discs
remote control power button. automatically play the movie while others default to the
softkey menu display, which requires the radio’s
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause Play, Enter, or Navigation softkeys to be pressed. The
icon displayed on the radio system, to toggle between rear seat passenger can also start the disc with the
pausing or restarting playback of a DVD. If the remote control.
forward arrow is showing on the display, the system is
in pause mode. If the pause icon is showing on the Loading a disc into the system, depending on media
display, the system is in playback mode. type and format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD,
and up to 30 seconds for a DVD.
q Group r: Press to cycle through musical groupings
on the DVD-A disc.

3-102

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Stopping and Resuming Playback DVD Radio Error Messages
To stop playing a DVD without turning off the system,
Player Error: This message displays when there are
press the c button on the remote control, or press the disc load or eject problems.
pushbutton located under the stop or the play/pause
symbol tags displayed on the radio. If the radio head is Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the disc
sourced to something other than DVD-V, press the is inserted with the disc label wrong side up, or if
DVD/CD AUX button to make DVD-V the active source. the disc is damaged.
To resume DVD playback, press the r / j button Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the disc
on the remote control, or press the pushbutton located is not from a correct region.
under the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no disc is
radio. The DVD should resume play from where it last
stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the present when the Z or DVD/CD AUX button is
stop button has not been pressed twice on the remote pressed on the radio.
control. If the disc has been ejected or the stop
button has been pressed twice on the remote control, Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
the disc resumes playing at the beginning of the disc. The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on
the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an
Ejecting a Disc audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the
Press the Z button on the radio to eject the disc. If a front auxiliary input jack. An external audio device such
disc is ejected from the radio, but not removed, the radio as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD player,
reloads the disc after a short period of time. The disc is or cassette tape player, etc. can be connected to
stored in the radio. The radio does not resume play of the the auxiliary input jack for use as another audio source.
disc automatically. If the RSA system is sourced to the Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
DVD, the movie when reloaded into the DVD player while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive
begins to play again. In case loading and reading of a Driving on page 4-2 for more information on driver
DVD or CD cannot be completed (unknown format, etc.), distraction.
and the disc fails to eject, press and hold the DVD Z
button more than five seconds to force the disc to eject.
3-103

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To use a portable audio player, connect a DVD/CD AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to
3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to
input jack. When a device is connected, press the the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message
radio CD/AUX button to begin playing audio from the showing track or chapter number displays when a disc
device over the vehicle speakers. is in either slot. Press this button again and the
system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
For optimal sound quality, increase the portable audio
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
device’s volume to the loudest level.
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device”
It is always best to power the portable audio device displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot
through its own battery while playing. the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two
sources and does not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If
O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or a front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the button cycles through all available options, such as:
volume of the portable player. Additional volume DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary
adjustments might have to be made from the portable (if available). See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)”
device if the volume is not loud or soft enough. later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-127
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a portable for more information.
audio device is playing. The portable audio device also
continues to play.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when a
portable audio device is playing. Press again and
the system begins playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Input Device Found” displays.

3-104

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or • Make sure the CD does not have more than a
maximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and 512 folders
Six-Disc CD Player) and files to read and play.

MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc • Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums using
The radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a one folder for each album. Each folder or album
CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded with should contain 18 songs or less.
the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,
64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total
160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce
or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a
album are available for display by the radio when
particular folder during playback.
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Make sure playlists have a .m3u extension as other
Compressed Audio file extensions might not work.
The radio also plays discs that contain both • Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3 files. names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
By default the radio shows the MP3 label on the left side combination of a large number of files and folders, or
of the screen but plays both file formats in the order playlists could cause the player to be unable to play
in which they were recorded to the disc. up to the maximum number of files, folders, playlists,
MP3 Format or sessions. To play a large number of files, folders,
playlists or sessions, minimize the length of the file,
Burning an MP3 disc on a personal computer: folder, or playlist name. Long names also take up
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD-R or more space on the display, potentially getting cut off.
CD-RW disc. • Finalize the audio disc before burning it. Trying to
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on one disc. add music to an existing disc could cause the disc
not to function in the player.

3-105

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Playlists can be changed by using the S c (previous) No Folder
and c T (next) folder buttons, the f knob, or the When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
©SEEK ¨ arrows. MP3 CD-R or CD-RW that have are located under the root folder. The next and previous
been recorded without using file folders can be played. If folder function does not display on a CD that was
a CD-R or CD-RW contains more than the maximum recorded without folders or playlists.
of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and 512 folders and files, the When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
player allows access and navigates up to the maximum, audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
but all items over the maximum are not accessible. root folder. The folder down and up buttons search
playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root folder.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as a Order of Play
folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files, Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in
the directory displays as the CD label. All files contained the following order:
directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always • Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
accessed before root folders or files. and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
If a disc contains both uncompressed CD audio (.CDA) has played, play continues from the first track of
and MP3 files, a folder under the root directory called the first playlist.
CD accesses all of the CD audio tracks on the disc.
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
Empty Directory or Folder continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
has played, play continues from the first track of the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
first folder.
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure When play enters a new folder, the display does not
that contains compressed audio files. The empty folder automatically show the new folder name unless
does not display. the folder mode has been chosen as the default display.
The new track name displays.

3-106

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 File System and Naming Z EJECT: Press this button to eject CD-R(s) or
The song name that displays is the song name that is CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present playing, press and release this button. A beep sounds
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name. Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can be
removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed, after
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW automatically pulls
shortened. Parts of words on the last page of text and the back into the player and begins playing. For the Six-Disc
extension of the filename does not display. CD player, press and hold this button for two seconds to
Preprogrammed Playlists eject all discs.
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on the
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software CD-R currently playing.
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited using
the radio. These playlists are treated as special folders ©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
containing compressed audio song files. start of the current MP3 file, if more than ten seconds
Playing an MP3 have played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to
the next MP3 file. If either SEEK arrow is held or
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot (Single pressed multiple times, the player continues moving
CD Player), or press the load button and wait for backward or forward through MP3 files on the CD.
the message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label
side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
should begin playing. positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or CD-RW in the previous folder.
in the player it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD-R or CD-RW starts to play c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned
where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. under the Folder label to go to the first track in the
next folder.
As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title displays.

3-107

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound will feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R or CD-RW in order
be heard at a reduced volume. Release this button by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located below
to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file the music navigator label. The player scans the disc to
displays. sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information. It
could take several minutes to scan the disc depending on
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to the number of MP3 files recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW.
advance playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc
will be heard at a reduced volume. Release this button in the background. When the scan is finished, the CD-R
to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the or CD-RW begins playing again.
file displays.
Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to playing
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3 files on MP3 files in order by artist. The current artist playing is
the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in random, shown on the second line of the display between the
rather than sequential order, on one CD-R or CD-RW or arrows. Once all songs by that artist are played, the
all discs in a six-disc CD player. To use random, do player moves to the next artist in alphabetical order on
one of the following: the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3 files by that
artist. To listen to MP3 files by another artist, press the
1. To play MP3 files from the CD-R or CD-RW in
pushbutton located below either arrow button. The next or
random order, press the pushbutton positioned
previous artist in alphabetical order plays. Continue
under the RDM label until Random Current
pressing either button until the desired artist is displayed.
Disc displays. Press the same pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again
to turn off random play.

3-108

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To change from playback by artist to playback by album, Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and
press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label.
From the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the DVD Player)
album button. Press the pushbutton below the back label
to return to the main music navigator screen. Now the MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
album name is displayed on the second line between the Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs
arrows and songs from the current album begins to play.
Once all songs from that album are played, the player The radio also plays discs that contain both
moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA files
CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3 files from that depending on which slot the disc is loaded into. By default
album. the radio reads only the uncompressed audio (.CDA) and
ignores the MP3/WMA files on the DVD deck. On the CD
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton deck, press the CAT (category) button to toggle between
below the Back label to return to normal MP3 playback. compressed and uncompressed audio format, the default
being the uncompressed format (.CDA).
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The CD remains safely inside the radio for MP3/WMA Format
future listening.
Burning an MP3/WMA disc on a personal computer:
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded
showing disc and/or track number displays when a CD is on a CD-R or CD-RW disc.
in the player. Press this button again and the system • Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such one disc.
as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Input Device Found” displays.
• The CD player (lower slot) is able to read and play
a maximum combination of 512 files and folders.
The DVD player (upper slot) is able to read
255 folders, 15 playlists and 40 sessions.

3-109

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find Root Directory
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as a
using one folder for each album. Each folder
folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files,
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any
eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce accessed before root folders or files.
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate
a particular folder during playback. Empty Directory or Folder
• Make sure playlists have a .m3u extension as other If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file
file extensions might not work. structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist advances to the next folder in the file structure that
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a contains compressed audio files. The empty folder does
combination of a large number of files and folders, not display.
or playlists could cause the player to be unable
to play up to the maximum number of files, folders, No Folder
playlists, or sessions. To play a large number of
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
files, folders, playlists, or sessions, minimize
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
the length of the file, folder, or playlist name. Long
folder function does not function on a CD that was
names also take up more space on the display,
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
potentially getting cut off.
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
• Finalize the audio disc before burning it. Trying to When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
add music to an existing disc could cause the audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
disc not to function in the player. root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root
folder. When the radio displays the name of the folder
the radio displays ROOT.

3-110

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Order of Play Preprogrammed Playlists
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
the following order: WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
folders containing compressed audio song files.
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of Playing an MP3/WMA (In Either the DVD or
the first playlist. CD Slot)
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into either the top or
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
bottom slot, label side up. The player pulls it in, and
folder. When the last track of the last folder has
the CD-R or CD-RW should begin playing.
played, play continues from the first track of the first
folder. Depending on the format of the disc, a softkey menu
appears and allows navigation of the disc. The menu
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
reads left to right as RDM (Randomize song play order), a
automatically show the new folder name unless
Folder icon with left and right arrows (to move up or down
folder mode has been chosen as the default display.
through available folders), a PL tag if the disc has a
The new track name displays.
Playlist available, and a Music Navigator tag. If a Playlist
File System and Naming tag is shown, toggling this key brings up a Folder softkey
only or the menu as previously described.
The song name that is displayed is the song name that
is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or
present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file CD-RW in the player it stays in the player. When the
name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the ignition or radio is turned back on, the CD-R starts
track name. to play where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of As each new track starts to play, the track number and
text and the extension of the filename displays. song title displays.

3-111

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Z CD (Eject): Press and release this button to eject ©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the bottom start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more than
slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the five seconds have played. If less than five seconds have
disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or played, the previous MP3/WMA file plays. Press the
CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3/WMA file.
removed, after several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW If either SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multiple times,
automatically pulls back into the player. the player continues moving backward or forward
through the MP3/WMA files on the CD.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed, such
as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject, press S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
and hold this button for more than five seconds to force positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track
the disc to eject. in the previous folder.
Z DVD (Eject): Press and release this button to eject c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned
the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the top under the Folder label to go to the first track in the
slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the next folder.
disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or
CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
removed, after several seconds, the CD-R automatically reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound
pulls back into the player. If loading and reading of a CD is heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to
cannot be completed, such as unknown format, etc., and resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the
the disc fails to eject, press and hold this button for more file displays.
than five seconds to force the disc to eject.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA files on

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file.
the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this
button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of
the file displays.

3-112

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3/WMA Once the disc has been scanned, the player defaults to
files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The current
random, rather than sequential order. To play MP3/WMA artist playing is shown on the second line of the display
files from the CD-R or CD-RW in random order, press between the arrows. To listen to MP3/WMA files by
the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until another artist, press the pushbutton located below either
Random Current Disc displays. Press the same arrow button. The disc goes to the next or previous artist
pushbutton again to turn off random play. in alphabetical order. Continue pressing either button
until the desired artist is displayed.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW To change from playback by artist to playback by album,
in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label.
located below the music navigator label. The player From the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the
scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 album button. Press the pushbutton below the back label
tag information. It could take several minutes to scan the to return to the main music navigator screen. Now the
disc depending on the number of MP3/WMA files album name displays on the second line between the
recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW. arrows and songs from the current album begin to play.
Once all songs from that album are played, the player
To cancel music navigator while the player is scanning, moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the
press the pushbutton located below the music navigator CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3/WMA files from
label or eject the disc. that album.
The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
in the background. When the scan is finished, the CD-R below the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA
or CD-RW begins playing again. playback.

3-113

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a XM Radio Messages
CD or a DVD is playing. The CD or DVD remains inside
the radio for future listening or viewing entertainment. XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, or
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
showing track or chapter number displays when a disc being updated, and no action is required. This process
is in either slot. Press this button again and the should take no longer than 30 seconds.
system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device” the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area, the
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two signal should return.
sources and not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a
front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
button cycles through all available options, such processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary This message should disappear shortly.
(if available). See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
earlier in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” service. Tune in to another channel.
under, Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System
on page 3-127 for more information. Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be
received with your XM Subscription package.
If a MP3/WMA is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear
seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only) no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
through the remote control. station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.

3-114

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
time on this channel. The system is working properly. channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
No Title Info: No song title information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
properly. within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No CAT Info: No category information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
properly. within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly. Navigation/Radio System
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for For vehicles with a navigation radio system, see the
the selected category. The system is working properly. separate Navigation System manual.

XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle

could have previously been in another vehicle. For Bluetooth®
security purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
between vehicles. If this message is received after capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to
having the vehicle serviced, check with your make and receive phone calls. The system can be used
dealer/retailer. while the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message position. The range of the Bluetooth system can be up
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label. to 30 ft. (9.1 m). Not all phones support all functions,
This label is needed to activate the service. and not all phones are guaranteed to work with
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See gm.com/bluetooth
for more information on compatible phones.

3-115

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Voice Recognition Bluetooth Controls
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to
voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags. operate the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio
Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-138 for more
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum. The information.
system may not recognize voice commands if there is
too much background noise. b g (Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls,
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system to confirm system information, and to start speech
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice recognition.
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
c x (Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural call, or to cancel an operation.
voice.
Pairing
Audio System A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to
comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
and overrides the audio system. Use the audio system manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before
volume knob, during a call, to change the volume level. pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not
The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later connected, calls will be made using OnStar®
calls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum volume level is Hands-Free Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar
used if the volume is turned down too low. owner’s guide for more information.

3-116

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Pairing Information: Pairing a Phone
• Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
Bluetooth system. responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
moving. “Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
• The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links 3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
with the first available paired cell phone in the and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
order the phone was paired. be used in Step 4.
• Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the 4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time. be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
• Pairing should only need to be completed once, manufacturers user guide for information on
unless changes to the pairing information have this process.
been made or the phone is deleted. Locate the device named “General Motors” in the list
on the cellular phone and follow the instructions on
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number that
Different Phone later in this section.
was provided in Step 3.
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use
a name that best describes the phone. This name
will be used to indicate which phone is connected.
The system then confirms the name provided.
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.

3-117

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Listing All Paired and Connected Phones Linking to a Different Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone. “Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth 3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the “Please wait while I search for other phones”.
system will say “Is connected” after the connected • If another phone is found, the response will be
phone.
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
Deleting a Paired Phone • If another phone is not found, the original phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system remains connected.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. Storing Name Tags
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to OnStar systems.
delete followed by a tone.
The system uses the following commands to store and
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the retrieve phone numbers:
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds • Store
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>? • Digit Store
Yes or No” followed by a tone.
• Directory
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.

3-118

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Using the Store Command 5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
The store command allows a phone number to be “About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
stored without entering the digits individually.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system “No” and repeat Step 5.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store, the name tag is stored. After the number is
number please” followed by a tone. stored the system returns to the main menu.
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses. Using the Digit Store Command
• If the system recognizes the number it responds The digit store command allows a phone number to be
with “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone number. stored by entering the digits individually.

• If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats the responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
number followed by “Please say yes or no”. If the 2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with “Please
number is correct, say “Yes”. If the number is not say the first digit to store” followed by a tone.
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the
number to be re-entered. 3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
4. After the system stores the phone number, it Continue entering digits until the number to be
responds with “Please say the name tag” followed stored is complete.
by a tone.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.

3-119

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. After the complete number has been entered, say Deleting Name Tags
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone. The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with • Delete
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”. • Delete all name tags
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5. Using the Delete Command
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and The delete command allows specific name tags to be
the name tag is stored. After the number is deleted.
stored the system returns to the main menu. To use the delete command:
Using the Directory Command 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
by the system. To use the directory command: 2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. 3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete,
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with <name tag>? Please say yes or no”.
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system • If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete the
returns to the main menu. name tag. The system responds with “OK,
deleting <name tag>, returning to the main menu.”
• If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The system
responds with “No. OK, let’s try again, please say
the name tag.”

3-120

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Using the Delete All Name Tags Command Using the Dial Command
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
(if present).
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
To use the delete all name tags command: <phone name>”. “Number please” followed by
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system a tone.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. 3. Say the entire number without pausing.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds • If the system recognizes the number, it responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
in your phone directory and your route destination • If the system does not recognize the number, it
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
confirms the numbers followed by a tone. If the
say yes or no.”
number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
• Say “Yes” to delete all name tags. responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the
• Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the number. If the number is not correct, say “No”.
The system will ask for the number to be
main menu.
re-entered.
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the following commands:
• Dial
• Digit Dial
• Call
• Re-dial

3-121

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Using the Digit Dial Command 3. Say the name tag of the person to call.

1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system • If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and
dials the number.
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digit
dial using <phone name>, please say the first digit • If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
to dial” followed by a tone. name tag, it confirms the name tag followed
by a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”.
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following The system responds with “OK, calling,
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it <name tag>” and dials the number. If the name
heard followed by a tone. tag is not correct, say “No”. The system will
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be ask for the name tag to be re-entered.
dialed is complete. After the whole number has Once connected, the person called will be heard
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds with through the audio speakers.
“OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the Using the Re-dial Command
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
last number. responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the 2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system responds
system, say “Verify” at any time and the with “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials the
system will repeat them. last number called from the connected Bluetooth
phone.
Using the Call Command
Once connected, the person called will be heard
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system through the audio speakers.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.

3-122

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Receiving a Call Three-Way Calling
When an incoming call is received, the audio system Three-Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle. phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier
to work.
• Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.
1. While on a call press b g . The system responds
• Press c x to ignore a call.
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Call Waiting 2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with
“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work. 3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
• Press b g to answer an incoming call when
another call is active. The original call is placed 4. Once the call is connected, press b g to link all
on hold. the callers together.
• Press b g again to return to the original call. Ending a Call
• To ignore the incoming call, continue with the
original call with no action.
Press c x to end a call.
• Press c x to disconnect the current call and
switch to the call on hold.

3-123

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Muting a Call Transferring a Call
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle
muted so that the person on the other end of the Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
call cannot hear them.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
To Mute a call During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Call muted”.
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
To Cancel Mute the vehicle to the cell phone.

1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready” To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
followed by a tone. Bluetooth System
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system The cellular phone must be paired and connected with
responds with “Resuming call”. the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.
The connection process can take up to two minutes after
the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
press b g for more than two seconds. The audio
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.

3-124

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Voice Pass-Thru Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition Tones
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is
supports this feature. This feature can be used to used when calling a menu driven phone system.
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone. Account numbers can be programmed into the
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system phonebook for retrieval during menu driven calls.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. Sending a Number During a Call
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone. 1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with “OK,
accessing <phone name>”. 2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
number to send tones” followed by a tone.
• The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will
go through its cycle according to the phone’s 3. Say the number to send.
operating instructions. • If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.

3-125

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call Other Information
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready” The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the
followed by a tone. Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with
trade names are those of their respective owners.
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the name tag to send. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues. 2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
• If the system is not sure it recognized the name operation.
tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and 1. This device may not cause interference.
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
Clearing the System including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely. This Changes or modifications to this system by other than
includes all saved name tags in the phonebook an authorized service facility could void authorization to
and phone pairing information. For information on how use this equipment.
to delete this information, see the above sections
on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.

3-126

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) Parental Control
System The RSE system may have a Parental Control feature,
depending on which radio the vehicle has. To enable
The vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment Parental Control, press and hold the radio power button
(RSE) system. The RSE system works with the for more than two seconds to stop all system features
vehicle’s audio system. The DVD player is part of the such as: radio, video screen, RSA, DVD and/or CD.
front radio. The RSE system includes a radio with a DVD While Parental Control is on, a padlock icon displays.
player, a video display screen, audio/video jacks, two
wireless headphones, a remote control, and if the The radio can be turned back on with a single press of
vehicle has a third row seat, it may have a second video the power button, but the RSE system will remain
display screen and two additional wireless headphones. under Parental Control.
See Radio(s) on page 3-86 for more information on To turn Parental Control off, press and hold the radio
the vehicle’s audio/DVD system. power button for more than two seconds. The RSE
returns from where it was previously left and the padlock
Before Driving icon disappears from the radio display.
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only. Parental Control can also be turned off by inserting or
The driver cannot safely view the video screen ejecting any disc, pressing the play icon on the
while driving and should not try to do so. radio DVD display menu, or changing an ignition
In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE position.
system might not work until the temperature is within
the operating range. The operating range for the
RSE system is above −4°F (−20°C) or below
140°F (60°C). If the temperature of the vehicle is
outside of this range, heat or cool the vehicle until the
temperature is within the operating range of the
RSE system.

3-127

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Headphones Push the power button to turn on the headphones. An
indicator light located on the headphones comes on. If
the light comes on but there is intermittent sound and/or
static on the headphones, or if the indicator light does not
come on, the batteries might need to be replaced. See
“Battery Replacement” later in this section for more
information. Switch the headphones to Off when
not in use.
Infrared transmitters are located at the rear of the
RSE overhead console. The headphones shut off
automatically to save the battery power if the RSE system
and RSA are shut off or if the headphones are out of
range of the transmitters for more than three minutes. If
you move too far forward or step out of the vehicle, the
headphones lose the audio signal.
The headphones automatically turn off after four hours
of continuous use.
The RSE includes two 2-channel wireless headphones
To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the
that are dedicated to this system. Channel 1 is dedicated
volume control located on the right side.
to the DVD player, while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA
selections. These headphones are used to listen to For optimal audio performance, the headphones must
media such as CDs, DVDs, MP3s, DVDAs, radio, any be worn correctly. Headphones should be worn with
auxiliary source connected to A/V jacks, or the auxiliary headband over the top of the head for best audio
input jack, if the vehicle has this feature. The wireless reception. The symbol L (Left) appears on the upper left
headphones have an On/Off button, channel 1/2 switch, side, above the ear pad and should be positioned on
and a volume control. the left ear. The symbol R (Right) appears on the upper
right side, above the ear pad and should be positioned
If the vehicle has a third row video screen display, it
on the right ear.
may have two additional headphones.

3-128

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs will not be covered by the warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
If the foam ear pads attached to the headphones
become worn or damaged, the pads can be replaced
separately from the headphone set. See your
dealer/retailer for more information.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries on the headphones:
1. Turn the screw to loosen the battery door located
on the left side of the headphones. Slide the The A/V jacks, located on the rear of the floor console,
battery door open. allow audio or video signals to be connected from
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment. an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using game unit to the RSE system. Adapter connectors
the diagram on the inside of the battery or cables (not included) might be required to connect
compartment. the auxiliary device to the A/V jacks. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.
3. Replace the battery door and tighten the door
screw. The A/V jacks are color coded to match typical home
entertainment system equipment. The yellow jack (A) is
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of for the video input. The white jack (B) is for the left
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool, audio input. The red jack (C) is for the right audio input.
dry place.
Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the
radio system.

3-129

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system, connect Audio Output
an external auxiliary device to the color-coded A/V
jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the video Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs can be
screen power on. If the video screen is in the DVD heard through the following possible sources:
player mode, pressing the AUX (auxiliary) button on the • Wireless Headphones
remote control switches the video screen from the
DVD player mode to the auxiliary device. The radio can • Vehicle Speakers
listen to the audio of the connected auxiliary device • Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear seat
by sourcing to auxiliary. See Radio(s) on page 3-86 for audio system, if the vehicle has this feature.
more information.
The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to
How to Change the RSE Video Screen the wireless headphones, if there is audio available. See
Settings “Headphones” earlier in this section for more
information.
The screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom),
screen brightness, and setup menu language can be The DVD player is capable of outputting audio to the
changed from the on screen setup menu. To change any wired headphone jacks on the RSA system, if the
feature: vehicle has this feature. The DVD player can be
selected as an audio source on the RSA system. See
1. Press the z (display menu) button on the remote Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 3-136 for more
control. information.
2. Use the remote control n , q , p , o (navigation) When a device is connected to the A/V jacks, or the
arrows and the r (enter) button to use the radio’s auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle has this feature,
the rear seat passengers are able to hear audio from
setup menu.
the auxiliary device through the wireless or wired
3. Press the z button again to remove the setup headphones. The front seat passengers are able to
menu from the screen. listen to playback from this device through the vehicle
speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio.

3-130

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Video Screen(s) Remote Control
The video screen(s) are located in the overhead To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
console. window at the rear of the overhead console and press
To use the video screen(s): the desired button. Direct sunlight or very bright light
could affect the ability of the RSE transmitter to receive
1. Push the release button located on the overhead signals from the remote control. If the remote control
console. does not seem to be working, the batteries might need
2. Move the screen to the desired position. to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in
this section. Objects blocking the line of sight could also
When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its affect the function of the remote control.
locked position.
If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot, the remote
If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked control power button can be used to turn on the video
position, the screen remains on, this is normal, and screen display and start the disc. The radio can also
the DVD continues to play through the previous audio turn on the video screen display. See Radio(s) on
source. Use the remote control power button or eject the page 3-86 for more information.
disc to turn off the screen.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
The overhead console contains the infrared transmitters in direct sunlight can damage it, and the repairs
for the wireless headphones and the infrared receivers will not be covered by the warranty. Storage
for the remote control. They are located at the rear in extreme cold can weaken the batteries. Keep the
of the console. remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen,
as damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for more information.

3-131

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Remote Control Buttons y (Main Menu): Press this button to access the DVD
menu. The DVD menu is different on every DVD.
Use the navigation arrows to move the cursor around
the DVD menu. After making a selection press the enter
button. This button only operates when using a DVD.

n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use

the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.

r (Enter): Press this button to select the choice that

is highlighted in any menu.

z (Display Menu): Press this button to adjust the

brightness, screen display mode (normal, full, or zoom),
and display the language menu.

q (Return): Press this button to exit the current

active menu and return to the previous menu. This
O (Power): Press this button to turn the video screen button operates only when the display menu or a DVD
on and off. menu is active.

P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the remote c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, fast
control backlight on. The backlight automatically reversing, or fast forwarding a DVD. Press this button
turns off after seven to ten seconds if no other button twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
is pressed while the backlight is on.

v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to the

main menu of the DVD. This function may vary for
each disc.

3-132

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start playing a [ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forward
DVD. Press this button while a DVD is playing to pause the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding a DVD
it. Press it again to continue playing the DVD. video, press the play/pause button. To stop fast
forwarding a DVD audio or CD, release this button. This
On some radios, play may be slowed down by pressing button might not work when the DVD is playing the
the play/pause button then pressing the fast forward copyright information or the previews.
button when the DVD is playing. The DVD continues
playing in a slow play mode. Some radios may perform e (Audio): Press this button to change audio tracks on
reverse slow play by pressing the play/pause button DVDs that have this feature when the DVD is playing.
and then pressing the fast reverse button. To cancel The format and content of this function vary for
slow play mode, press the play/pause button. each disc.
t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this button to { (Subtitles): Press this button to turn ON/OFF
return to the start of the current track or chapter. Press subtitles and to move through subtitle options when a
this button again to go to the previous track or DVD is playing. The format and content of this function
chapter. This button might not work when the DVD is vary for each disc.
playing the copyright information or the previews.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the system
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to go to the between the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
beginning of the next chapter or track. This button
might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright d (Camera): Press this button to change camera
information or the previews. angles on DVDs that have this feature when a DVD is
playing. The format and content of this function vary
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast reverse for each disc.
the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing a DVD video,
press the play button. To stop fast reversing a 1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
DVD audio or CD, release this button. This button might provides the capability of direct chapter or track
not work when the DVD is playing the copyright number selection.
information or the previews.

3-133

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 \ (Clear): Press this button within three seconds after Problem Recommended Action
entering a numeric selection, to clear all numerical No power. The ignition might not be
inputs. turned ON/RUN or in
ACC/ACCESSORY.
} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button to The picture does not fill the Check the display mode
select chapter or track numbers greater than nine. Press screen. There are black settings in the setup menu
this button before entering the number. borders on the top and by pressing the display
bottom or on both sides or menu button on the remote
If the remote control becomes lost or damaged, a new it looks stretched out. control.
universal remote control can be purchased. If this
happens, make sure the universal remote control uses a In auxiliary mode, the Check the auxiliary input
picture moves or scrolls. connections at both
code set of Toshiba®. devices.
Battery Replacement The remote control does Check to make sure there
not work. is no obstruction between
To change the remote control batteries: the remote control and the
1. Slide the rear cover back on to the remote control. transmitter window.
Check the batteries to
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment. make sure they are not
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using dead or installed
the diagram on the inside of the battery incorrectly.
compartment. After stopping the player, If the stop button was
3. Replace the battery cover. I push Play but sometimes pressed one time, the DVD
the DVD starts where I left player resumes playing
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of off and sometimes at the where the DVD was
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool, beginning. stopped. If the stop button
dry place. was pressed two times the
DVD player begins to play
from the beginning of
the DVD.

3-134

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Problem Recommended Action DVD Display Error Messages
The auxiliary source is Check that the RSE video The DVD display error message depends on which
running but there is no screen is in the auxiliary radio is in the vehicle. The video screen can display one
picture or sound. source mode.
Check the auxiliary input of the following:
connections at both Disc Load/Eject Error: Displays when there are disc
devices.
load or eject problems.
Sometimes the wireless Check for obstructions,
headphone audio cuts out low batteries, reception Disc Format Error: Displays if the disc is inserted with
or buzzes. range, and interference the disc label wrong side up, or if the disc is damaged.
from cellular telephone
towers or by using a Disc Region Error: Displays if the disc is not from
cellular telephone in the a correct region.
vehicle.
Check that the No Disc Inserted: Displays if no disc is present when
headphones are on EJECT or DVD AUX is pressed on the radio.
correctly using the L (left)
and R (right) on the DVD Distortion
headphones.
I lost the remote and/or See your dealer/retailer Video distortion can occur when operating cellular
the headphones. for assistance. phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position Systems
The DVD is playing, but Check that the RSE video (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
there is no picture or screen is sourced to the It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
sound. DVD player. operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.

3-135

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console Audio can be heard through wired headphones (not
included) plugged into the jacks on the RSA. If the
When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface, use vehicle has this feature, audio can also be heard on
only a clean cloth dampened with clean water. Channel 2 of the wireless headphones.
Cleaning the Video Screen The audio system mutes the rear speakers when the
RSA audio is active through the headphones.
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth
dampened with clean water. Use care when directly
touching or cleaning the screen, as damage could result.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)

Vehicles with this feature allow the rear seat passengers
to listen to and control any of the music sources:
radio, CDs, DVDs, or other auxiliary sources. However,
the rear seat passengers can only control the music
sources the front seat passengers are not listening to
(except on some radios where dual control is allowed).
For example, rear seat passengers can control and
listen to a CD through the headphones, while the driver
listens to the radio through the front speakers. The
rear seat passengers have control of the volume
for each set of headphones.
P (Power): Press the P button to turn the RSA on
The RSA functions operate even when the main radio is
or off.
off. The front audio system will display the headphone
icon when the RSA is on, and will disappear from Volume: Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the
the display when it is off. volume of the wired headphones. The left knob
controls the left headphones and the right knob controls
the right headphones.

3-136

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press the
the radio (AM/FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD, and if left ©or right ¨ seek arrow to perform a cursor up or
the vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary, and
down on the menu. Hold the left ©or right ¨ arrow to
rear auxiliary.
perform a cursor left or right on the menu.
© ¨(Seek): When listening to FM, AM, or XM™ PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the next
(if equipped), press the left ©or right ¨ seek arrow to preset radio station or channel set on the main
go to the previous or to the next station or channel radio. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the
and stay there. This function is inactive, with some front seat passengers are listening to the radio.
radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the
radio. When a CD or DVD audio disc is playing, press this
button to go to the beginning of the CD or DVD audio.
Press and hold the left ©or right ¨ seek arrow until This function is inactive, with some radios, if the
the display flashes, to tune to an individual station. front seat passengers are listening to the disc.
The display stops flashing after the buttons have not When a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer,
been pushed for more than two seconds. This function is press this button to select the next disc, if multiple discs
inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are loaded. This function is inactive, with some radios,
are listening to the radio. if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc.
While listening to a disc, press the left © seek arrow to When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press the
go back to the start of the current track or chapter PROG button to perform the menu function, enter.
(if more than ten seconds have played). Press the
right ¨seek arrow to go to the next track or chapter
on the disc. This function is inactive, with some radios, if
the front seat passengers are listening to the disc.

3-137

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Theft-Deterrent Feature w (Next): Press to go to the next radio station stored
as a favorite, or the next track if a CD/DVD is playing.
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle x c (Previous/End): Press to go to the previous
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate radio station stored as a favorite, the next track if
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle. a CD/DVD is playing, to reject an incoming call, or end
a current call.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press to silence the vehicle
speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on.
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls For vehicles with OnStar® or Bluetooth® systems press
could differ depending on and hold b g for longer than two seconds to interact
the vehicle’s options. with those systems. See OnStar® System on page 2-68
Some audio controls can
and Bluetooth® on page 3-115 in this manual for
be adjusted at the steering
more information.
wheel.
SRCE (Source/Voice Recognition): Press to switch
between the radio (AM, FM, XM), CD, DVD (if equipped),
front auxiliary (if equipped), and rear auxiliary
(if equipped).
For vehicles with the navigation system, press and hold
this button for longer than one second to initiate voice
recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the Navigation
System manual for more information.

+ e − e (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease

the radio volume.

3-138

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the next radio station while in FM Stereo
AM, FM, or XM™. Press ¨to go to the next track or FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot. Press Although the radio has a built-in electronic circuit that
the ¨if multiple discs are loaded to go to the next disc automatically works to reduce interference, some static
while sourced to a CD player. can occur, especially around tall buildings or hills,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
Radio Reception
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to
from the accessory power outlet. fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
AM loss of the XM signal for a period of time.

The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, Cellular Phone Usage
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this causes an increased level of static while listening to
happens, try reducing the treble on the radio. the radio. If static is received while listening to the radio,
unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.

3-139

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rear Side Window Antenna XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is located in the passenger rear System
side windows. Make sure the inside surfaces of the rear
side windows are not scratched and that the lines on The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of
the glass are not damaged. If the inside surfaces the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for
are damaged, they could interfere with radio reception. clear radio reception.

If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the XM
to the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
antenna are not damaged. There is enough space
between the grid lines to attach a cellular telephone
antenna without interfering with radio reception.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside of the rear side windows may affect radio
reception or damage the rear side window antenna.
Repairs would not be covered by the warranty. Do
not clear the inside of the rear side windows with
sharp objects.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to the antenna
due to metallic tinting materials will not be covered
by the warranty.

3-140

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ............4-2 Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-27
Driving for Better Fuel Economy .......................4-2 Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-27
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2 Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-28
Drunk Driving .................................................4-3 Winter Driving ..............................................4-29
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-3 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,
Braking .........................................................4-4 or Snow ...................................................4-31
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................4-5 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-32
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-6 Recovery Hooks ...........................................4-32
StabiliTrak® System ........................................4-6 Loading the Vehicle ......................................4-33
Locking Rear Axle ..........................................4-9 Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment .......4-39
Steering ........................................................4-9 Towing ..........................................................4-43
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-11 Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-43
Passing .......................................................4-11 Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-43
Loss of Control .............................................4-11 Level Control ...............................................4-49
Off-Road Driving ...........................................4-13 Autoride® .....................................................4-50
Driving at Night ............................................4-25 Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-50
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-26 Trailer Recommendations ...............................4-72

4-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Your Driving, the Road, and Defensive Driving
the Vehicle Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively
is to wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They
Driving for Better Fuel Economy Are for Everyone on page 1-32.
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
• Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
{ CAUTION:
• Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops. Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
• Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time. bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
• When road and weather conditions are appropriate,
they might do and be ready. In addition:
use cruise control, if equipped.
• Allow enough following distance between you
• Always follow posted speed limits or drive more and the driver in front of you.
slowly when conditions require. • Focus on the task of driving.
• Keep vehicle tires properly inflated. Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
• Combine several trips into a single trip. injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
• Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Spec
number molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size.
• Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.

4-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Drunk Driving For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
{ CAUTION: The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. and then drive.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
judgment can be affected by even a small amount system can make crash injuries worse, especially
of alcohol. You can have a serious — or even injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Do not that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than
group, designate a driver who will not drink. if the person had not been drinking.

Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is

Control of a Vehicle
a global tragedy. The following three systems help to control the vehicle
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
attentiveness. ask more of those control systems than the tires and road
can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the vehicle.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6.
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
and driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annual vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with on page 5-3.
the use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured.

4-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Braking Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.
Hybrid manual for more information. This is a mistake. The brakes might not have time
to cool between hard stops. The brakes will wear out
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-40.
much faster with a lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace
Braking action involves perception time and reaction with the traffic and allowing realistic following distances
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception eliminates a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
time. Actually doing it is reaction time. better braking and longer brake life.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being
second. But that is only an average. It might be less driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes.
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or If the brakes are pumped, the pedal could get harder
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, to push down. If the engine stops, there will still be some
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, power brake assist but it will be used when the brake
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a is applied. Once the power assist is used up, it can
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an to push.
emergency, so keeping enough space between
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle and others is important.
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly on page 5-3.
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight
of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.

4-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a happens with ABS:
braking skid. A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
or clicking noise might be heard while this test is and at both rear wheels.
going on. This is normal. ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel,
as required, faster than any driver could. This can
If there is a problem with
help the driver steer around the obstacle while
ABS, this warning light
braking hard.
stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps receiving
Warning Light on updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
page 3-41. accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed
to get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
Along with ABS, the vehicle has a Dynamic Rear stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem, front of you, there will not be enough time to apply the
both the brake and ABS warning lights come on brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always
accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights and leave enough room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on
until the problem is repaired. See your dealer/retailer Using ABS
for service. Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. The brakes might
vibrate or some noise might be heard, but this is normal.

4-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Braking in Emergencies StabiliTrak® System
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same The vehicle has a vehicle stability enhancement
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than system called StabiliTrak. It is an advanced computer
even the very best braking. controlled system that assists the driver with directional
control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
Brake Assist
StabiliTrak activates when the computer senses a
This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to discrepancy between the intended path and the direction
assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
in emergency driving conditions. This feature uses the applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle’s
stability system hydraulic brake control module to brakes to assist the driver with keeping the vehicle
supplement the power brake system under conditions on the intended path.
where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down When the vehicle is started and begins to move, the
the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic brake control system performs several diagnostic checks to insure
module increases brake pressure at each corner of the there are no problems. The system may be heard or felt
vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor brake pedal while it is working. This is normal and does not mean
pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal there is a problem with the vehicle. The system should
and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).
as the driving situation dictates The Brake Assist feature In some cases, it may take approximately two miles of
will automatically disengage when the brake pedal is driving before the system initializes.
released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased. If cruise control is being used when StabiliTrak
activates, the cruise control automatically disengages.
The cruise control can be re-engaged when road
conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page 3-12.

4-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If the system fails to turn on or activate, the StabiliTrak The traction control disable
light along with one of the following messages will button is located on the
be displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC): instrument panel below
TRACTION CONTROL OFF, SERVICE TRACTION the climate controls.
CONTROL, STABILITRAK OFF, SERVICE
STABILITRAK. If these DIC messages appear, make
sure the StabiliTrak system has not been turned off
using the StabiliTrak on/off button. Then turn the steering
wheel clockwise from the nine o’clock position to the
three o’clock position. If this clears the message(s), the The traction control part of StabiliTrak can be turned off
vehicle does not need servicing. If this does not clear the by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak button if both
message(s), then turn the vehicle off, wait 15 seconds, systems (traction control and StabiliTrak) were previously
and then turn it back on again to reset the system. If any on. To disable both traction control and StabiliTrak, press
of these messages still appear on the Driver Information and hold the button for five seconds.
Center (DIC), the vehicle should be taken in for service. Traction control and StabiliTrak can be turned on by
For more information on the DIC messages, see Driver pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak button if not
Information Center (DIC) on page 3-51. automatically shut off for any other reason.

The StabiliTrak light will When the TCS or StabiliTrak system is turned off,
flash on the instrument the StabiliTrak light and the appropriate TCS off or
panel cluster when the StabiliTrak off message will be displayed on the DIC to
system is both on and warn the driver. The vehicle will still have brake-traction
activated. control when traction control is off, but will not be able
to use the engine speed management system. See
“Traction Control Operation” next for more information.
When the traction control system has been turned off,
system noises may still be heard as a result of the
The system may be heard or felt while it is working; this brake-traction control coming on.
is normal.

4-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 It is recommended to leave the system on for normal Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle is allowed to spin
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the excessively while the StabiliTrak, ABS and brake
system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or warning lights and any relevant DIC messages are
snow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt to displayed, the transfer case could be damaged.
free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
when driving in extreme off-road conditions where high warranty. Reduce engine power and do not spin
wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in the wheel(s) excessively while these lights and
Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-31. messages are displayed.
The traction control system may activate on dry
Traction Control Operation or rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
system. Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing of the transmission. When this happens, a reduction
engine power to the wheels (engine speed management) in acceleration may be noticed, or a noise or vibration
and by applying brakes to each individual wheel may be heard. This is normal.
(brake-traction control) as necessary. If cruise control is being used when the system
The traction control system is enabled automatically activates, the StabiliTrak light will flash and cruise
when the vehicle is started. It will activate and the control will automatically disengage. Cruise control
StabiliTrak light will flash if it senses that any of may be reengaged when road conditions allow.
the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction See Cruise Control on page 3-12.
while driving. If traction control is turned off, only StabiliTrak may also turn off automatically if it
the brake-traction control portion of traction control will determines that a problem exists with the system.
work. The engine speed management will be disabled. If the problem does not clear itself after restarting
In this mode, engine power is not reduced automatically the vehicle, see your dealer/retailer for service.
and the driven wheels can spin more freely. This can
cause the brake-traction control to activate constantly.

4-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Locking Rear Axle Steering Tips
Vehicles with a locking rear axle can give more It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
standard axle most of the time, but when traction is low, and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
this feature will allow the rear wheel with the most traction banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
to move the vehicle. the one factor that can be controlled.
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
Steering the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through
Power Steering the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed.
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Wait to accelerate until out of the curve, and then
Hybrid manual for more information. accelerate gently into the straightaway.
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops
or the system is not functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.

4-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. These problems
can be avoided by braking — if you can stop in time.
But sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is
no room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First, apply the brakes. See Braking on page 4-4.
It is better to remove as much speed as possible from a
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and
a quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turned
a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the
object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Off-Road Recovery Passing
The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
road onto the shoulder while driving. dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your
side of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.

Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the Let us review what driving experts say about what
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the happens when the three control systems — brakes,
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches, 8 to 13 cm, asked.
(about one-eighth turn) until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
straight down the roadway. and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.

4-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Skidding Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
those conditions. But skids are always possible. more limited.
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin. until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
Remember: StabiliTrak® helps avoid only the clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
acceleration skid. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6. the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
If the StabiliTrak® System is off, then an acceleration when you have any doubt.
skid is best handled by easing your foot off the Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
accelerator pedal. avoid only the braking skid.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for
a second skid if it occurs.

4-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Off-Road Driving Off-roading involves some new skills. That is why it is
very important that you read these driving tips and
Vehicles with four-wheel drive can be used for off-road suggestions to help make off-road driving safer
driving. Vehicles without four-wheel drive and vehicles and more enjoyable.
with 20-inch tire/wheel assemblies should not be driven
off-road except on a level, solid surface. Before You Go Off-Roading
The airbag system is designed to work properly under • Have all necessary maintenance and service
a wide range of conditions, including off-road usage. work done.
Always wear your safety belt and observe safe driving • Make sure there is enough fuel, that fluid levels are
speeds, especially on rough terrain.
where they should be, and that the spare tire, if the
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road vehicle has one, is fully inflated.
and this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the very
time you need special alertness and driving skills, your
• Be sure to read all the information about
reflexes, perceptions, and judgment can be affected by four-wheel-drive vehicles in this manual.
even a small amount of alcohol. You could have a serious • Make sure all underbody shields, if the vehicle has
— or even fatal — accident if you drink and drive or ride them, are properly attached.
with a driver who has been drinking.
• Know the local laws that apply to off-roading where
Off-roading can be great fun but has some definite you will be driving or check with law enforcement
hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself. people in the area.
When off-road driving, traffic lanes are not marked,
curves are not banked, and there are no road signs.
• Be sure to get the necessary permission if you will
Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill, or downhill. be on private land.

Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers. Failure If you think you will need some more ground clearance
to operate the vehicle correctly off-road could result at the front of your vehicle, you can remove the front
in loss of vehicle control or vehicle rollover. fascia lower air dam. The air dam is held in place by
two bolts and 10 snaps accessible from underneath
the front fascia.

4-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To remove the air dam: Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
1. Remove the two outboard air dam bolts. Driving
2. With a flat-blade tool, disengage the snaps.
3. After the bolts are removed and the snaps are
disengaged, push forward on the air dam until it { CAUTION:
is free.
Notice: Operating your vehicle for extended • Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the
periods without the front fascia lower air dam seatbacks can be thrown forward during a
installed can cause improper air flow to the engine. sudden stop. You or your passengers could
Always be sure to replace the front fascia air be injured. Keep cargo below the top of the
dam when you are finished off-road driving. seatbacks.
After off-roading, be sure to reinstall the air dam: • Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough terrain.
1. Line up the snaps and push the air dam rearward You or your passengers can be struck by
to engage the snaps. flying objects. Secure the cargo properly.
2. Install the two outboard bolts. • Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to roll
over. You can be seriously or fatally injured if
the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy loads inside
the cargo area, not on the roof. Keep cargo
in the cargo area as far forward and low as
possible.

4-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 There are some important things to remember about • Always carry a litter bag and make sure all refuse is
how to load your vehicle. removed from any campsite before leaving.
• The heaviest things should be on the floor, forward • Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted),
of the rear axle. Put heavier items as far forward camp stoves, and lanterns.
as you can.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
• Be sure the load is properly secured, so things are combustible materials that could catch fire from
not tossed around. the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
You will find other important information under Loading
the Vehicle on page 4-33 and Tires on page 5-61. Traveling to Remote Areas
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
Environmental Concerns to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your route.
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Check to see if
recreation. However, it also raises environmental there are any blocked or closed roads.
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the vehicle in case something happens to one of them.
environment:
For vehicles with a winch, be sure to read the winch
• Always use established trails, roads, and areas that instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be handy
have been specially set aside for public off-road if you get stuck but you will want to know how to use it
recreational driving and obey all posted regulations. properly.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage
shrubs, flowers, trees, or grasses or disturb wildlife.
This includes wheel-spinning, breaking down trees,
or unnecessary driving through streams or over soft
ground.

4-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe { CAUTION:
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-roading requires some new and different skills. When you are driving off-road, bouncing and quick
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your eyes changes in direction can easily throw you out of
need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected position. This could cause you to lose control and
obstacles. Your ears need to listen for unusual tire crash. So, whether you are driving on or off the
or engine sounds. Use your arms, hands, feet, and road, you and your passengers should wear
body to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce.
safety belts.
Controlling the vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control the vehicle
is to control the speed. At higher speeds: Scanning the Terrain
• You approach things faster and have less time to Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
react. of terrain. Be familiar with the terrain and its many
• There is less time to scan the terrain for obstacles. different features.
• The vehicle has more bounce when driving over Surface Conditions: Off-roading surfaces can be
obstacles. hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow,
• More braking distance is needed, especially on an or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the vehicle’s
steering, acceleration, and braking in different ways.
unpaved surface.
Depending on the surface, slipping, sliding, wheel
spinning, delayed acceleration, poor traction, and
longer braking distances can occur.

4-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
can be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
startle you if you are not prepared for them. Often these sudden turns, or sudden braking.
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow, or even Off-roading requires a different kind of alertness from
the rise and fall of the terrain itself. driving on paved roads and highways. There are no road
Some things to consider: signs, posted speed limits, or signal lights. Use good
judgment about what is safe and what is not.
• Is the path ahead clear?
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead? Driving on Hills
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill? Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or across
a hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction an understanding of what the vehicle can and cannot
quickly? do. There are some hills that simply cannot be driven,
When driving over obstacles or rough terrain, keep no matter how well built the vehicle.
a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or other
surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands.
When driving over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles, { CAUTION:
the wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you cannot control Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
the vehicle as well or at all. If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you cannot control your speed. If you
drive across them, you will roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness, do not drive the hill.

4-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Approaching a Hill Driving Uphill
When you approach a hill, decide if it is too steep to Once you decide it is safe to drive up the hill:
climb, descend, or cross. Steepness can be hard to • Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering
judge. On a very small hill, for example, there may be
wheel.
a smooth, constant incline with only a small change in
elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top. • Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as you near speed. Not using more power than needed can
the top, but you might not see this because the crest of avoid spinning the wheels or sliding.
the hill is hidden by bushes, grass, or shrubs.
Consider this as you approach a hill:
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
{ CAUTION:
sharply steeper in places?
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
surface cause tire slipping?
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you seriously injured or killed. When driving up hills,
will not have to make turning maneuvers? always try to go straight up.
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your
path, such as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an If the path twists and turns, you might want to
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and find another route.
walk the hill if you do not know. It is the smart
way to find out.
• Ease up on the speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed rocks because
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to be more visible to
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion. approaching traffic on trails or hills.

4-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill • If the engine has stopped running, you need to
to let opposing traffic know you are there. restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
• Use headlamps even during the day to make the parking brake still applied, shift the transmission
to P (Park) and restart the engine. Then, shift to
vehicle more visible to oncoming traffic.
R (Reverse), release the parking brake, and slowly
back down the hill as straight as possible in
R (Reverse).
{ CAUTION: • While backing down the hill, put your left hand on the
steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position so you can
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed tell if the wheels are straight and can maneuver as
can cause an accident. There could be a drop-off, you back down. It is best to back down the hill with
embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle. the wheels straight rather than in the left or right
You could be seriously injured or killed. As you direction. Turning the wheel too far to the left or
near the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert. right will increase the possibility of a rollover.
Things not to do if the vehicle stalls, or is about to stall,
when going up a hill:
If the vehicle stalls, or is about to stall, and you cannot
make it up the hill: • Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it N (Neutral) to rev-up the engine and regain forward
momentum. This will not work. The vehicle can roll
from rolling backwards and apply the parking brake.
backward very quickly and could go out of control.
• If the engine is still running, shift the transmission to • Never try to turn around if about to stall when going
R (Reverse), release the parking brake, and slowly
up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to stall the vehicle,
back down the hill in R (Reverse).
it is steep enough to cause it to roll over. If you
cannot make it up the hill, back straight down the hill.

4-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If, after stalling, you try to back down the hill and decide Driving Downhill
you just cannot do it, set the parking brake, put your
transmission in P (Park), and turn off the engine. Leave When off-roading takes you downhill, consider:
the vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill side • How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled vehicle control?
downhill. Do not shift the transfer case to Neutral when
you leave the vehicle. Leave it in some gear. • What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
{ CAUTION: Boulders?
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
Shifting the transfer case to Neutral can cause creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in If you decide you can go down a hill safely, try to keep
P (Park). This is because the Neutral position on the vehicle headed straight down. Use a low gear so
the transfer case overrides the transmission. You or engine drag can help the brakes so they do not have to
someone else could be injured. If you are going to do all the work. Descend slowly, keeping the vehicle
leave your vehicle, set the parking brake and shift under control at all times.
the transmission to P (Park). But do not shift the
transfer case to Neutral.

4-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Vehicles are much more likely to stall when going uphill,
but if it happens when going downhill:
{ CAUTION: 1. Stop the vehicle by applying the regular brakes and
apply the parking brake.
Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause
2. Shift to P (Park) and, while still braking, restart the
your brakes to overheat and fade. This could engine.
cause loss of control and a serious accident.
Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill 3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under
control. 4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.

Things not to do when driving down a hill:

• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down might be too steep to drive
across. The vehicle could roll over.
• Never go downhill with the transmission in
N (Neutral), called free-wheeling. The brakes
will have to do all the work and could overheat
and fade.

4-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Driving Across an Incline • Surface conditions can be a problem. Loose gravel,
muddy spots, or even wet grass can cause the
An off-road trail will probably go across the incline tires to slip sideways, downhill. If the vehicle slips
of a hill. To decide whether to try to drive across sideways, it can hit something that will trip it — a
the incline, consider the following: rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
{ CAUTION: incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the
uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut
or depression, the vehicle can tilt even more.
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
For these reasons, carefully consider whether to try
make your vehicle roll over. You could be to drive across an incline. Just because the trail goes
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt across the incline does not mean you have to drive
about the steepness of the incline, do not drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
across it. Find another route instead.
If you feel the vehicle starting to slide sideways, turn
downhill. This should help straighten out the vehicle
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down might and prevent the side slipping. The best way to prevent
be too steep to drive across. When going straight up this is to “walk the course” first, so you know what
or down a hill, the length of the wheel base — the the surface is like before driving it.
distance from the front wheels to the rear
wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehicle
will tumble end over end. But when driving across
an incline, the narrower track width — the distance
between the left and right wheels — might not
prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.
Driving across an incline puts more weight on the
downhill wheels which could cause a downhill slide
or a rollover.

4-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Stalling on an Incline It is best to use a low gear when in mud — the deeper
the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud,
keep the vehicle moving so it does not get stuck.
{ CAUTION: When driving on sand, wheel traction changes.
On loosely packed sand, such as on beaches or
sand dunes, the tires will tend to sink into the sand.
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle This affects steering, accelerating, and braking. Drive
stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt
vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed. maneuvers.
Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path. On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control. On wet
ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you will have
difficulty accelerating. And, if the vehicle does get
If the vehicle stalls when crossing an incline, be
moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause
sure you, and any passengers, get out on the uphill
it to slide out of control.
side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you get
out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll
over, you will be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
{ CAUTION:
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can be
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under
When you drive in mud, snow, or sand, the wheels do the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice.
not get good traction. Acceleration is not as quick, turning Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you
is more difficult, and braking distances are longer. and your passengers could drown. Drive your
vehicle on safe surfaces only.

4-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Driving in Water If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it.
At faster speeds, water splashes on the ignition system
and the vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you get
the tailpipe under water. If the tailpipe is under water, you
{ CAUTION: will never be able to start the engine. When going through
water, remember that when the brakes get wet, it might
Driving through rushing water can be dangerous. take longer to stop. See Driving in Rain and on Wet
Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream Roads on page 4-26.
and you and your passengers could drown. If it is After Off-Road Driving
only shallow water, it can still wash away the
ground from under your tires, and you could lose Remove any brush or debris that has collected
traction and roll the vehicle over. Do not drive on the underbody, chassis, or under the hood.
through rushing water. These accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
demand extreme caution. steering, suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaust system
Find out how deep the water is before driving through it. for damage and check the fuel lines and cooling system
Do not try it if it is deep enough to cover the wheel hubs, for any leakage.
axles, or exhaust pipe — you probably will not get The vehicle requires more frequent service due to
through. Deep water can damage the axle and other off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for
vehicle parts. additional information.

4-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Driving at Night • Watch for animals.

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving • When tired, pull off the road.
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by • Do not wear sunglasses.
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue. • Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.

Night driving tips include: • Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
• Drive defensively.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
• Do not drink and drive. curves.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
rearview mirror. But, as we get older, these differences increase.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
so much road ahead.

4-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Hydroplaning
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the water.
drive slower in these types of driving conditions This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are
and avoid driving through large puddles and going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
deep-standing or flowing water. it has little or no contact with the road.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
{ CAUTION: Other Rainy Weather Tips
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
work as well in a quick stop and could cause include:
pulling to one side. You could lose control of • Allow extra following distance.
the vehicle.
• Pass with caution.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until
the brakes work normally. • Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. • Have good tires with proper tread depth.
Driving through flowing water could cause your See Tires on page 5-61.
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you • Turn off cruise control.
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about
trying to drive through flowing water.

4-26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Before Leaving on a Long Trip Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing. while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
Things to check on your own include: safe place to park your vehicle and rest.

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows Other driving tips include:
clean — inside and outside? • Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Wiper Blades: In good shape? • Keep interior temperature cool.
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked? • Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean? and to the sides.

• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to

• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?

4-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different { CAUTION:
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include: Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition
• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape. off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the
work of slowing down and they could get so hot
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
that they would not work well. You would then
system, and transmission.
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a You could crash. Always have the engine running
lower gear. and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.

{ CAUTION: • Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut

across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then • Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
have poor braking or even none going down a hill. lane (stalled car, accident).
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine • Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope. area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
See Off-Road Driving on page 4-13 for information
about driving off-road.

4-28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Winter Driving The StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6 improves the
ability to accelerate on slippery roads, but slow down and
Driving on Snow or Ice adjust your driving to the road conditions. When driving
through deep snow, turn off the traction control part of the
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the StabiliTrak® System to help maintain vehicle motion at
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice lower speeds.
can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain begins The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-5 improves
to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid driving on wet vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads, but
ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated with salt apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement.
or sand.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the
the tires slick, so there is even less traction. surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too maneuvers and braking while on ice.
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
under the tires even more.

4-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Blizzard Conditions
CAUTION: (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation.
Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use the Roadside Assistance Program • Open a window about two inches (5 cm) on
on page 7-7. To get help and keep everyone in the the side of the vehicle that is away from the
vehicle safe: wind to bring in fresh air.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6. • Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
• Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror. • Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting.
{ CAUTION: See Climate Control System in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle. Engine Exhaust on page 2-50.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside. Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
unconsciousness and even death. You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: around the base of your vehicle, especially any
• Clear away snow from around the base of that is blocking the exhaust.
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
• Check again from time to time to be sure Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
snow does not collect there. keep warm, but be careful.

CAUTION: (Continued)

4-30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction
off and close the window most of the way to save heat. system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel really system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to keep warm and use the rocking method.
also helps.
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal { CAUTION:
slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed.
This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,
and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as they can explode, and you or others could be
little as possible to save fuel.
injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid
Mud, Ice, or Snow going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-32. For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-84.

4-31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out Recovery Hooks
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the
area around the front wheels. For four-wheel-drive
vehicles, shift into Four-Wheel High or Four-Wheel Low. { CAUTION:
For vehicles with StabiliTrak®, turn the traction control
part of the system off. Shift back and forth between These hooks, when used, are under a lot of force.
R (Reverse) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels Always pull the vehicle straight out. Never pull on
as little as possible. To prevent transmission wear,
the hooks at a sideways angle. The hooks could
wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting
gears. Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, break off and you or others could be injured from
and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the chain or cable snapping back.
the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning the
wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes
a rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that
does not get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might
need to be towed out. Recovery hooks can be used,
if the vehicle has them. If the vehicle does need
to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-43.

4-32

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Loading the Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it was designed to carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire
label.

{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts
Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the on the vehicle can break, and it can change
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it the way your vehicle handles. These could
would not be covered by warranty. cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle.
For vehicles with recovery hooks at the front of the
vehicle, you can use them if you are stuck off-road
and need to be pulled to some place where you can
continue driving.

4-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tire and Loading Information Label The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
Tires on page 5-61 and Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-70.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles.
See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
Label Example
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information vehicle.
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar).
With the driver’s door open, you will find the 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
label attached below the door lock post (striker). and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
The tire and loading information label shows
the number of occupant seating positions (A),
and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B)
in kilograms and pounds.

4-34

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4. Example 1
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the
load from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how Item Description Total
this reduces the available cargo and luggage Vehicle Capacity
A Weight for 1,000 lbs
load capacity of your vehicle. See Towing a (453 kg)
Trailer on page 4-50 for important information Example 1 =
on towing a trailer, towing safety rules and Subtract Occupant
trailering tips. B Weight 150 lbs 300 lbs (136 kg)
(68 kg) × 2 =
C Available Occupant 700 lbs (317 kg)
and Cargo Weight =

4-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Example 2 Example 3

Item Description Total Item Description Total

Vehicle Capacity Vehicle Capacity
A Weight for 1,000 lbs A Weight for 1,000 lbs
Example 2 = (453 kg) Example 3 = (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant Subtract Occupant
B Weight 150 lbs 750 lbs (136 kg) B Weight 200 lbs 1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
(68 kg) × 5 = (91 kg) × 5 =
C Available Cargo 250 lbs (113 kg) C Available Cargo 0 lbs (0 kg)
Weight = Weight =

4-36

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross
information label for specific information about weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called Gross
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR
positions. The combined weight of the driver, includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed fuel, and cargo.
your vehicle’s capacity weight. The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
Certification/Tire Label maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find
out the actual loads on your front and rear axles,
you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure
to spread out your load equally on both sides of the
centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found

on the rear edge of the driver’s door. The label
shows the size of your vehicle’s original tires and

4-37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Certification/Tire label also contains If you put things inside your vehicle — like
information about your Front Axle Reserve suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — they
Capacity. go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep
spread it out. going.

{ CAUTION: { CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle or in a crash.
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the • Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
your vehicle handles. These could cause you • Never stack heavier things, like
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
can shorten the life of the vehicle. of them are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause • When you carry something inside the
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle. • Do not leave a seat folded down unless
The label will help you decide how much cargo you need to.
and installed equipment your truck can carry.
Using heavier suspension components to There is also important loading information for
get added durability might not change your weight off-road driving in this manual. See “Loading Your
ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving” under Off-Road
vehicle the right way. Driving on page 4-13.

4-38

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Adding a Snow Plow or Similar The plow your vehicle can carry depends on many
things, such as:
Equipment • The options your vehicle came with, and the weight
Before installing a snow plow on your vehicle, here are of those options.
some things you will need to know: • The weight and number of passengers you intend
Notice: If your vehicle does not have the snow to carry.
plow prep package, adding a plow can damage your • The weight of items you have added to your
vehicle, and the repairs would not be covered by vehicle.
warranty. Unless your vehicle was built to carry a
snow plow, do not add one to your vehicle. If your • The total weight of any additional cargo you intend
vehicle has the snow plow prep package, called to carry.
RPO VYU, then the payload your vehicle can carry Say, for example, you have a 700 lb (318 kg) snow
will be reduced when a snow plow is installed. plow. The total weight of all occupants and cargo inside
Your vehicle can be damaged if either the front or the cab should not exceed 300 lb (135 kg). This means
rear axle ratings or the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) that you may only be able to carry one passenger.
are exceeded. But, even this may be too much if you have got other
Some vehicles are built with a special snow plow prep equipment already adding to the weight of your vehicle.
package, called RPO VYU. If your vehicle has this option,
you can add a plow to it, provided certain weights, such
as the weights on the vehicle’s axles and the Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW), are not exceeded.

4-39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Here are some guidelines for safely carrying a snow Front axle reserve capacity is the difference between
plow on your vehicle: your front Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) and
• Make sure the weight on the front and rear axles the front axle weight of your vehicle with full fuel and
passengers. Basically, it is the amount of weight you can
does not exceed the axle rating for each.
add to your front axle before reaching your front GAWR.
• For the front axle, if more cargo or passengers The front axle reserve capacity for your vehicle can be
must be carried, appropriate counter ballast must found in the lower right corner of the Certification/Tire
be installed rear of the rear axle. Counter ballast label, as shown.
must be properly secured so it will not move
during driving.
• Follow the snow plow manufacturer’s
recommendations regarding rear ballast.
Rear ballast may be required to ensure a
proper front and rear weight distribution ratio,
even though the actual weight at the front axle
may be less than the front axle rating.
• The snow plow manufacturer or installer can
assist you in determining the amount of rear ballast
required, to help make sure your snowplow/vehicle
combination does not exceed the GVW rating, the United States Canada
front and rear axle ratings, and the front and rear
weight distribution ratio.
• The total vehicle must not exceed the GVW rating.

4-40

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 In order to calculate the amount of weight any front For example, adding a 700 lb (318 kg) snow plow
accessory, such as a snow plow, is adding to the front actually adds more than 700 lbs (318 kg) to the front
axle, use the following formula: axle. Using the formula, if the snow plow is 4 ft (122 cm)
in front of the front axle and the wheel base is 10 ft
(305 cm), then:
W = 700 lb (318 kg)
A = 4 ft (122 cm)
W.B. = 10 ft (305 cm)
(W x (A + W.B.))/W.B. = (700 x (4 + 10))/10 =
980 lbs (445 kg)
So, if your vehicle’s front axle reserve capacity is more
than 980 lbs (445 kg), you could add the snow plow
without exceeding the front GAWR.

(W x (A + W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight the accessory is adding

to the front axle.
Where:
W = Weight of added accessory
A = Distance that the accessory is in front of the
front axle
W.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase

4-41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 You can add heavier equipment on the front of the
vehicle if you compensate for it by carrying fewer CAUTION: (Continued)
passengers, less cargo, or by positioning cargo towards
the rear. This has the effect of reducing the load on the
GAWR, and the total vehicle weight is less than
front. However, the front GAWR, rear GAWR, and the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) must never be the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR).
exceeded. Maintaining a proper front and rear weight
distribution ratio is necessary to provide proper
braking performance.
{ CAUTION:
Total vehicle reserve capacity is the difference between
On some vehicles that have certain front mounted your GVWR and the weight of your vehicle with full
equipment, such as a snow plow, it may be possible fuel and passengers. It is the amount of weight you
to load the front axle to the front gross axle weight can add to your vehicle before reaching your GVWR.
rating (GAWR) but not have enough weight on Keep in mind that reserve capacity numbers are
intended as a guide when selecting the amount of
the rear axle to have proper braking performance.
equipment or cargo your vehicle can carry. If you are
If your brakes can not work properly, you could unsure of your vehicle’s front, rear, or total weight,
have a crash. To help your brakes work properly go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle.
when a snow plow is installed, always follow Your dealer/retailer can also help you with this.
the snow plow manufacturer or installer’s
The total vehicle reserve capacity for your vehicle can
recommendation for rear ballast to ensure a proper
be found in the lower right corner of the Certification/Tire
front and rear weight distribution ratio, even though label as shown previously.
the actual front weight may be less than the front
See your dealer/retailer for additional advice and
CAUTION: (Continued) information about using a snow plow on your vehicle.
Also, see Loading the Vehicle on page 4-33.

4-42

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Emergency Roof Lamp Provisions Recreational Vehicle Towing
Vehicles with the RPO VYU snow plow prep package Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
also have an emergency roof lamp provision package, behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
RPO TRW. Wiring for the emergency roof lamp is The two most common types of recreational vehicle
provided above the overhead console. See Auxiliary towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
Roof-Mounted Lamp on page 3-18 for switch location. Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with
Towing two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
Here are some important things to consider before
Towing Your Vehicle recreational vehicle towing:
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be • What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
towed with all four wheels off the ground. Consult Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
your dealer/retailer or a professional towing service recommendations.
if the disabled vehicle must be towed. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 7-7.
• What is the distance that will be travelled? Some
vehicles have restrictions on how far and how
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for long they can tow.
recreational purposes, such as behind a motorhome,
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following. • Is the proper towing equipment going to be used?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Long Trip on page 4-27.

4-43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Dinghy Towing Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Use the following procedure to dinghy tow a

four-wheel-drive vehicle:
Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels 1. Position the vehicle being towed behind the tow
on the ground, the drivetrain components could vehicle and shift the transmission to P (Park).
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with 2. Turn the engine off and firmly set the parking brake.
all four wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed
with all four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.

4-44

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow 4. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “Shifting
vehicle. into Neutral” under Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-40
for the proper procedure to select the Neutral
position for the vehicle.
{ CAUTION: 5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle.
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer case 6. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF and remove the
into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even key — the steering wheel will still turn.
if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or After towing, see “Shifting Out of Neutral” under
others could be injured. Make sure the parking Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-40 for the proper procedure
brake is firmly set before the transfer case is to take the vehicle out of the Neutral position.
shifted to N (Neutral).

4-45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Dolly Towing Notice: If a two-wheel-drive vehicle is towed with
the rear wheels on the ground, the transmission
Front Towing could be damaged. The repairs would not be
(Front Wheels Off the Ground) covered by the vehicle warranty. Never tow the
vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground.
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed
with the rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
To dolly tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle, the vehicle
must be towed with the rear wheels on the dolly.
See “Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground)”
later in this section for more information.

4-46

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
{ CAUTION:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer case
into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even
if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or
others could be injured. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly set before the transfer case is
shifted to N (Neutral).

5. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “Shifting

into N (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel Drive on
page 2-40.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Use the following procedure to dolly tow a
four-wheel-drive vehicle from the front: 7. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle.
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer’s instructions. 8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the dolly. After towing, see “Shifting Out of N (Neutral)” under
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-40.
3. Shift the transmission to P (Park).
4. Firmly set the parking brake.

4-47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off 4. Put the transmission in P (Park).
the Ground) 5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for
towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked
into the straight position.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Use the following procedure to dolly tow a
four-wheel-drive vehicle from the rear:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly.
3. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on
page 2-45.
4. Put the transmission in P (Park).
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
Use the following procedure to dolly tow a manufacturer’s instructions.
two-wheel-drive vehicle from the rear:
6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked
dolly manufacturer’s instructions. into the straight position.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly.
3. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on
page 2-45.

4-48

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Level Control
{ CAUTION: Automatic Level Control
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer case The automatic level control rear suspension is available
into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even on light-duty vehicles and comes as a part of the
if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or Autoride® suspension, if equipped.
others could be injured. Make sure the parking This type of level control is fully automatic and will
brake is firmly set before the transfer case is provide a better leveled riding position as well as
shifted to N (Neutral). better handling under a variety of passenger and
loading conditions. An air compressor connected
to the rear shocks will raise or lower the rear of the
7. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “Shifting vehicle to maintain proper vehicle height. The system
into N (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel Drive on is activated when the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN
page 2-40. and will automatically adjust vehicle height thereafter.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. The system may exhaust (lower vehicle height) for up
to ten minutes after the ignition key has been turned off.
After towing, see “Shifting Out of N (Neutral)” under You may hear the air compressor operating when the
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-40. height is being adjusted.
If a weight-distributing hitch is being used, it is
recommended to allow the shocks to inflate, thereby
leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting the hitch.

4-49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Autoride® Towing a Trailer
With this feature, improved vehicle ride and handling is Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See New Vehicle
provided under a variety of passenger and loading Break-In on page 2-26 for more information.
conditions.
The system is fully automatic and uses a computer
controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed, wheel to { CAUTION:
body position, lift/dive and steering position of the vehicle.
The controller then sends signals to each shock absorber The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
to independently adjust the damping level to provide the the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
optimum vehicle ride.
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is too
Autoride also interacts with the tow/haul mode that, heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even at
when activated, will provide additional control of the all. The driver and passengers could be seriously
shock absorbers. This additional control results in better injured. The vehicle may also be damaged; the
ride and handling characteristics when the vehicle is
resulting repairs would not be covered by the
loaded or towing a trailer. See “Tow/Haul Mode” under
Towing a Trailer on page 4-50 for more information. vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only if all the steps
in this section have been followed. Ask your
dealer/retailer for advice and information about
towing a trailer with the vehicle.

4-50

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage Pulling A Trailer
the vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by the vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, Here are some important points:
follow the advice in this section and see your • There are many different laws, including speed limit
dealer/retailer for important information about restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
towing a trailer with the vehicle. the rig will be legal, not only where you live but
To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle, read also where you will be driving. A good source for
the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears this information can be state or provincial police.
later in this section. • Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by in this section.
itself. Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration, • Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
braking, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe
(800 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used
axle or other parts could be damaged.
properly.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a
The following information has many time-tested,
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
these are important for your safety and that of your
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in
passengers. So please read this section carefully
at the heavier loads.
before pulling a trailer.
• Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission
to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often
under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
• If the vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system and it doesn’t seem to be working properly
while pulling a trailer, turn the system off. See Side
Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on page 2-58 for more
information.

4-51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Three important considerations have to do with weight: depend on any special equipment on the vehicle,
• The weight of the trailer and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this section
• The weight of the trailer tongue for more information.
• And the weight on the vehicle’s tires Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
Weight of the Trailer trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,
Use the following chart to determine how much the
altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much
vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model
the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. It can
and options.

Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

1500 Series 2WD Short Wheel Base
4.8L V8 3.23 4,500 lbs (2 041 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
4.8L V8 3.73 4,800 lbs (2 177 kg) 10,300 lbs (4 672 kg)
5.3L V8 3.08 5,400 lbs (2 449 kg) 11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
5.3L V8 3.42 5,900 lbs (2 676 kg) 11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.42 8,400 lbs (3 810 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
6.2L V8 3.42 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
1500 Series 2WD Long Wheel Base
5.3L V8 3.08 5,100 lbs (2 313 kg) 11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
5.3L V8 3.42 5,600 lbs (2 540 kg) 11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)

4-52

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.42 8,100 lbs (3 674 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
6.0L V8 3.42 8,100 lbs (3 674 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
1500 Series 4WD Short Wheel Base
5.3L V8 3.42 5,700 lbs (2 586 kg) 11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.42 8,200 lbs (3 720 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
6.2L V8 3.42 8,100 lbs (3 674 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
1500 Series 4WD Long Wheel Base
5.3L V8 3.42 5,400 lbs (2 449 kg) 11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.42 7,900 lbs (3 583 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
6.0L V8 3.42 7,900 lbs (3 583 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
2500 Series 2WD Long Wheel Base
6.0L V8 3.73 9,600 lbs (4 355 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
2500 Series 4WD Long Wheel Base
6.0L V8 3.73 9,300 lbs (4 218 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.

Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information or

advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices.
See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6 for more
information.

4-53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight of the
vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and the
people who will be riding in the vehicle. If there are a lot of
options, equipment, passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it
will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which
will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow.
If towing a trailer, the tongue load must be added to the
GVW because the vehicle will be carrying that weight,
too. See for more information about the vehicle’s
maximum load capacity. The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up to a
maximum of 600 lbs (272 kg) with a weight carrying
hitch or up to a maximum of 1,000 lbs (453 kg) with a
weight distributing hitch. For more information, see
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight Carrying
Hitches later in this section.

4-54

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight Consider the following example:
for the vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight (1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs
on the rear axle. (3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of 14,000 lbs
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to carry
tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle
to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect
of additional weight may reduce the trailering capacity
more than the total of the additional weight.
Expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of
trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the weight
is applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on the
rear axle is greater than just the weight itself, as much
as 1.5 times as much. The weight at the rear axle could
be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since the
rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding
1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg).
This is very close to, but within the limit for RGAWR
as well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs
(3 856 kg).

4-55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If the vehicle has many options and there is a front Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of total
seat passenger and two rear seat passengers with some loaded trailer weight, expect that the largest trailer the
luggage and gear in the vehicle as well. 300 lbs (136 kg) vehicle can properly handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
could be added to the front axle weight and 400 lbs It is important that the vehicle does not exceed any of
(181 kg) to the rear axle weight. The vehicle now weighs: its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer
Rating or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure it
is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh
the vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle’s Tires

Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you see Loading Your Vehicle for more information. Make
might think 700 additional pounds (318 kg) should be sure not to go over the GVW limit for the vehicle, or the
subtracted from the trailering capacity to stay within GAWR, including the weight of the trailer tongue. If using
GCWR limits. The maximum trailer would only be a weight distributing hitch, make sure not to go over the
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think the rear axle limit before applying the weight distribution
tongue weight should be limited to less than 1,000 lbs spring bars.
(454 kg) to avoid exceeding GVWR. But the effect on the Hitches
rear axle must still be considered. Because the rear axle
now weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), 900 lbs (408 kg) can It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
be put on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR. Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
The effect of tongue weight is about 1.5 times the actual are a few reasons why the right hitch is needed.
weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves only
600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight that can be handled.

4-56

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight If a step-bumper hitch will be used, the bumper could be
damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there is ample room
Carrying Hitches when turning to avoid contact between the trailer and the
bumper.
If the loaded trailer being pulled will weigh more than
5,000 lbs (2 270 kg), be sure to use a properly mounted
weight-distributing hitch and sway control of the proper
size. This equipment is very important for proper vehicle
loading and good handling when driving. Always use a
sway control if the trailer will weigh more than these
limits. Ask a hitch dealer about sway controls.

Safety Chains
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the
trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road
if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about
safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer
or by the trailer manufacturer. If the trailer being towed
A: Body to Ground Distance weighs up to the vehicle’s trailer rating limit, safety chains
B: Front of Vehicle may be attached to the attaching point on the hitch
platform. Always leave just enough slack so the rig can
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must turn. Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
be adjusted so the distance (A) remains the same both
before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle.

4-57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tow/Haul Mode Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when the
vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent
Pressing this button at of the vehicle’s Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR).
the end of the shift lever See “Weight of the Trailer” earlier in the section. Tow/
turns on and off the Haul is most useful under the following driving conditions:
tow/haul mode. • When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load
through rolling terrain.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load
in stop and go traffic.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load
in busy parking lots where improved low speed
control of the vehicle is desired.
Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul when lightly loaded
This indicator light on the or with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However,
instrument panel cluster there is no benefit to the selection of Tow/Haul when the
comes on when the vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded
tow/haul mode is on. may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving
characteristics and reduced fuel economy. Tow/Haul is
recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a large
or heavy load.

Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy

trailer or a large or heavy load. See Tow/Haul Mode
on page 2-38 for more information.

4-58

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Trailer Brakes This symbol is located on the Trailer Brake Control
Panel on vehicles with an Integrated Trailer Brake Control
A loaded trailer that weighs more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg) System. The power output to the trailer brakes is based
needs to have its own brake system that is adequate for on the amount of brake pressure being applied by the
the weight of the trailer. Be sure to read and follow the vehicle’s brake system. This available power output to the
instructions for the trailer brakes so they are installed, trailer brakes can be adjusted to a wide range of trailering
adjusted and maintained properly. situations.
Since the vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, the The ITBC system is integrated with the vehicle’s brake,
trailer brakes cannot tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic anti-lock brake and StabiliTrak (if equipped) systems.
system. In trailering conditions that cause the vehicle’s anti-lock
brake or StabiliTrak systems to activate, power sent
Integrated Trailer Brake Control to the trailer’s brakes will be automatically adjusted
System to minimize trailer wheel lock-up. This does not imply
that the trailer has the StabiliTrak system.
The vehicle may have an If the vehicle’s brake, anti-lock brake or StabiliTrak
Integrated Trailer Brake systems are not functioning properly, the ITBC system
Control (ITBC) system may not be fully functional or may not function at all.
for electric trailer brakes. Make sure all of these systems are fully operational
to ensure full functionality of the ITBC system.

4-59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The ITBC system is powered through the vehicle’s When trailering, make sure of the following:
electrical system. Turning the ignition off will also turn • The ITBC system is used only with trailers that are
off the ITBC system. The ITBC system is fully functional
equipped with electric brakes.
only when the ignition is in ON or in RUN.
The ITBC system can only be used with trailers with
• All applicable local and federal laws and regulations
are followed.
electric brakes.
• All electrical and mechanical connections to the
trailer are made correctly.
{ CAUTION: • The trailer’s brakes are in proper working condition.
• The trailer and vehicle are properly loaded for
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the the towing condition.
ITBC system may result in reduced or complete
The ITBC system is a factory installed item.
loss of trailer braking. There may be an increase in
Out-of-factory installation of this system should not
stopping distance or trailer instability which could be attempted. GM is not responsible for warranty
result in personal injury or damage to the vehicle, or performance of the system resulting from
trailer, or other property. An aftermarket controller out-of-factory installation.
may be available for use with trailers with surge,
air or electric-over-hydraulic trailer brake systems.
To determine the type of brakes on the trailer and
the availability of controllers, check with your trailer
manufacturer or dealer/retailer.

4-60

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Trailer Brake Control Panel The ITBC system has a control panel located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column.
See Instrument Panel Overview on page 3-4 for more
information on location. The control panel allows
adjustment the amount of output, referred to as trailer
gain, available to the electric trailer brakes and allows
manual application the trailer brakes. The Trailer Brake
Control Panel is used along with the Trailer Brake Display
Page on the DIC to adjust and display power output to the
trailer brakes.

A. Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever

B. Trailer Gain Adjustment Buttons

4-61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Trailer Brake DIC Display Page The Trailer Brake Display Page can be displayed by
performing any of the following actions:
The ITBC system displays messages into the vehicle’s
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings • Scrolling through the DIC menu pages using the
and Messages on page 3-64 for more information. odometer trip stem or the DIC Vehicle Information
button (if equipped).
The display page indicates Trailer Gain setting, power
output to the electric trailer brakes, trailer connection • Pressing a Trailer Gain button – If the Trailer Brake
and system operational status. Display Page is not currently displayed, pressing a
Trailer Gain button will first recall the current Trailer
Gain setting. After the Trailer Brake Display Page
is displayed, each press and release of the gain
buttons will then cause the Trailer Gain setting to
change.
• Activating the Manual Trailer Brake Apply lever
• Connecting a trailer equipped with electric trailer
brakes
All DIC warning and service messages must first be
acknowledged by the driver by pressing the odometer trip
stem or the DIC Vehicle Information button (if equipped)
before the Trailer Brake Display Page can be displayed
and Trailer Gain can be adjusted.

A. Trailer Gain Setting

B. Power Output to Trailer Brakes
C. No trailer with electric brakes connected or fault
present

4-62

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TRAILER GAIN – This setting is displayed anytime the • A trailer with electric brakes has become
Trailer Brake Display Page is active. This setting can be disconnected (a CHECK TRAILER WIRING
adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either a trailer connected message will also be displayed on the DIC).
or disconnected. To adjust the Trailer Gain, press one of
the Trailer Gain adjustment buttons located on the Trailer • There is a fault present in the wiring to the electric
Brake Control Panel. Press and hold a gain button to trailer brakes (a CHECK TRAILER WIRING
cause the Trailer Gain to continuously adjust. To turn the message will also be displayed on the DIC).
output to the trailer off, adjust the Trailer Gain setting to • There is a fault in the ITBC system (a SERVICE
0.0 (zero). TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM message will also
0.0 (zero) gain is the factory default setting. To properly be displayed in the DIC).
adjust trailer gain, see the Trailer Gain Adjustment
Procedure later in this section.
Manual Trailer Brake Apply
TRAILER OUTPUT – This is displayed any time a The Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever is located on
trailer with electric brakes is connected. Output to the the Trailer Brake Control Panel and is used to apply
electric brakes is based on the amount of vehicle braking the trailer’s electric brakes independent of the vehicle’s
present and relative to the Trailer Gain setting. Output is brakes. This lever is used in the Trailer Gain Adjustment
displayed from 0 to 10 bars for each gain setting. Procedure to properly adjust the power output to the
trailer brakes. Sliding the lever to the left will apply only
The Trailer Output will indicate “- - - - - -“ on the Trailer the trailer brakes. The power output to the trailer is
Brake Display Page whenever the following occur: indicated in the Trailer Brake Display Page in the DIC.
• No trailer is connected. If the vehicle’s service brakes are applied while using
the Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever, the trailer output
• A trailer without electric brakes is connected power will be the greater of the two.
(no DIC message is displayed).
The trailer and the vehicle’s brake lamps will come on
when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes
are applied.

4-63

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure • In the Trailer Output display on the DIC, “- - - - - -“
will disappear if there is no error present.
Trailer Gain should be set for a specific trailering
Connecting a trailer without electric brakes
condition and must be adjusted any time vehicle loading,
will not clear the six dashed lines.
trailer loading or road surface conditions change.
4. Adjust the Trailer Gain by using the gain adjustment
Setting the Trailer Gain properly is needed for the best
(+ / −) buttons on the Trailer Brake Control Panel.
trailer stopping performance. A trailer that is over-gained
may result in locked trailer brakes. A trailer that is 5. Drive the vehicle with the trailer attached on a
under-gained may result in not enough trailer braking. level road surface representative of the towing
Both of these conditions may result in poorer stopping condition and free of traffic at about 20 to 25 mph
and stability of the vehicle and trailer. (32 to 40 km/h) and fully apply the Manual Trailer
Brake Apply lever.
Use the following procedure to correctly adjust Trailer
Gain for each towing condition: Adjusting trailer gain at speeds lower than
20 to 25 mph (32 to 40 km/h) may result in
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in proper working an incorrect gain setting.
condition.
6. Adjust the Trailer Gain to just below the point of
2. Connect a properly loaded trailer to the vehicle trailer wheel lock-up, indicated by trailer wheel
and make all necessary mechanical and electrical squeal or tire smoke when a trailer wheel locks.
connections. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-33
for more information. Trailer wheel lock-up may not occur if towing
a heavily loaded trailer. In this case, adjust the
3. After the electrical connection is made to a trailer Trailer Gain to the highest allowable setting for
equipped with electric brakes: the towing condition.
• A TRAILER CONNECTED message will be 7. Re-adjust Trailer Gain any time vehicle loading,
briefly displayed on the DIC display. trailer loading or road surface conditions change
• The Trailer Brake Display Page will appear on or if trailer wheel lock-up is noticed at any time
the DIC showing TRAILER GAIN and TRAILER while towing
OUTPUT.

4-64

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Other ITBC Related DIC Messages 2. There is an electrical fault in the wiring to the
electric trailer brakes. This message will continue
In addition to displaying TRAILER GAIN and TRAILER as long as there is an electrical fault in the trailer
OUTPUT through the DIC, trailer connection and wiring. This message will also turn off if the driver
ITBC system status is displayed in the DIC. acknowledges this message off.
TRAILER CONNECTED – This message will be To determine if the electrical fault is on the vehicle side
briefly displayed when a trailer with electric brakes or trailer side of the trailer wiring harness connection,
is first connected to the vehicle. This message will do the following:
automatically turn off in about ten seconds. The driver
can also acknowledge this message before it 1. Disconnect the trailer wiring harness from the
automatically turns off. vehicle.
CHECK TRAILER WIRING – This message will be 2. Turn the ignition OFF.
displayed if: 3. Wait ten seconds, then turn the ignition back
1. The ITBC system first determines connection to to RUN.
a trailer with electric brakes and then the trailer 4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING message
harness becomes disconnected from the vehicle. re-appears, the electrical fault is on the vehicle side.
If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING message only
stationary, this message will automatically turn re-appears when connecting the trailer wiring
off in about thirty seconds. This message will also harness to the vehicle, the electrical fault is on
turn off if the driver acknowledges this message the trailer side.
off or if the trailer harness is re-connected.
If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is moving,
this message will continue until the ignition is turned
off. This message will also turn off if the driver
acknowledges this message off or if the trailer
harness is re-connected.

4-65

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM – This message Driving with a Trailer
will be displayed when there is a problem with the
ITBC system. If this message persists over multiple
ignition cycles there is problem with the ITBC system.
Take the vehicle to an authorized dealer/retailer to have { CAUTION:
the ITBC system diagnosed and repaired.
If either the CHECK TRAILER WIRING or SERVICE When towing a trailer, exhaust gases may collect
TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM message is displayed while at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate,
driving the vehicle, power is no longer available to the trunk/hatch, or rear-most window is open.
trailer brakes. When traffic conditions allow, carefully Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
pull the vehicle over to the side of the road and turn the
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
ignition off. Check the wiring connection to the trailer and
turn the ignition back on. If either of these messages unconsciousness and even death.
continues, either the vehicle or trailer needs service. To maximize safety when towing a trailer:
An authorized dealer/retailer may be able to diagnose • Have the exhaust system inspected for
and repair problems with the trailer. However, any leaks and make necessary repairs before
diagnosis and repair of the trailer is not covered under starting a trip.
the vehicle warranty. Please contact your trailer dealer • Never drive with the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or
for assistance with trailer repairs and trailer warranty rear-most window open.
information. • Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 2-50.

4-66

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of Passing
experience. Get to know the rig before setting out
for the open road. Get acquainted with the feel of More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
handling and braking with the added weight of the Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to
are driving is now longer and not as responsive as the the lane.
vehicle is by itself.
Backing Up
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
lamps, tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand
electric brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
to be sure the brakes are working. This checks have someone guide you.
the electrical connection at the same time.
Making Turns
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
are still working. could cause the trailer to come in contact with
the vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
Following Distance making very sharp turns while trailering.
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer. normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft
This can help to avoid situations that require heavy shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
braking and sudden turns. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.

4-67

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission to
a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the The tow/haul mode may be used if the transmission
vehicle is turning, changing lanes or stopping. shifts too often. See Tow/Haul Mode Light on page 3-49.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
burned out. For this reason you may think other drivers temperature than at normal altitudes. If the engine is
are seeing the signal when they are not. It is important to turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on
check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still steep uphill grades, the vehicle may show signs similar
working. to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run
while parked, preferably on level ground, with the
Driving On Grades automatic transmission in P (Park) for a few minutes
before turning the engine off. If the overheat warning
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting comes on, see Engine Overheating on page 5-35.
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is
not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.

4-68

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Parking on Hills 5. If the vehicle is four-wheel-drive, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear and not in
N (Neutral).
{ CAUTION: 6. Release the brake pedal.

Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer

attached can be dangerous. If something goes
{ CAUTION:
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
flat surface. brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
If the engine has been left running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be injured.
If parking the rig on a hill:
To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park) on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill. Always put the shift lever fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels. If the transfer case on a four-wheel-drive vehicle is
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the in N (Neutral), the vehicle will be free to roll, even
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load. if the shift lever is in P (Park). Be sure the transfer
case is in a drive gear — not in N (Neutral).
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
brake and shift into P (Park).

4-69

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Leaving After Parking on a Hill Trailer Wiring Harness
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you: The vehicle is equipped with the following wiring
• Start the engine harnesses for towing a trailer.

• Shift into a gear Basic Trailer Wiring

• Release the parking brake The trailer wiring harness, with a seven-pin connector,
is located at the rear of the vehicle and is tied to the
2. Let up on the brake pedal. vehicle’s frame. The harness connector can be plugged
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. into a seven-pin universal heavy-duty trailer connector
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the available through your dealer/retailer.
chocks. The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer
circuits:
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling
a trailer. See this manual’s Maintenance Schedule or
• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Index for more information. Things that are especially • Brown: Taillamps
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission
fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system
• White: Ground
and brake system. It is a good idea to inspect • Light Green: Back-up Lamps
these before and during the trip.
• Red: Battery Feed*
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight. • Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
*The fuses for these two circuits are installed in the
underhood electrical center, but the wires are not
connected. They should be connected by your
dealer/retailer or a qualified service center.

4-70

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Harness The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer
Package circuits:
• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
• Brown: Taillamps
• White: Ground
• Light Green: Back-up Lamps
• Red: Battery Feed*
The vehicle is equipped with the seven-wire trailer • Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
towing harness. This harness with a seven-pin universal *The fuses for these two circuits are installed in the
trailer connector is attached to a bracket on the hitch underhood electrical center, but the wires are not
platform. connected. They should be connected by your
dealer/retailer or a qualified service center.
If charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery, press the
Tow/Haul mode button, if equipped, located at the end of
the shift lever. This will boost the vehicle system voltage
and properly charge the battery. If the trailer is too light
for Tow/Haul mode, or the vehicle is not equipped with
Tow/Haul, turn on the headlamps as a second way to
boost the vehicle system and charge the battery.

4-71

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Electric Brake Control Wiring Trailer Recommendations
Provisions Subtract the hitch loads from the Cargo Weight Rating
These wiring provisions are included with the vehicle (CWR). CWR is the maximum weight of the load the
as part of the trailer wiring package. These provisions vehicle can carry. It does not include the weight of the
are for an electric brake controller. The instrument panel people inside, but you can figure about 150 lbs. (68 kg)
contains blunt cut wires near the data link connector for each passenger. The total cargo load must not be
for the trailer brake controller. The harness contains the more than the vehicles CWR.
following wires: Weigh the vehicle with the trailer attached, so
• Dark Blue: Brake Signal to Trailer Connector the GVWR or GAWR are not exceeded. If using a
weight-distributing hitch, weigh the vehicle without
• Red/Black: Battery the spring bars in place.
• Light Blue/White: Brake Switch The best performance is obtained by correctly spreading
• White: Ground out the weight of the load and choosing the correct
hitch and trailer brakes.
It should be installed by your dealer/retailer or a
qualified service center. For more information see Towing a Trailer on page 4-50.
If the vehicle is equipped with an ITBC, the blunt cuts
exist, but are not connected further in the harness.
If an aftermarket trailer brake controller is installed,
the ITBC must be disconnected. Do not power
both ITBC and aftermarket controllers to control
the trailer brakes at the same time.

4-72

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3 Engine Coolant .............................................5-29
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3 Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-34
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-4 Engine Overheating .......................................5-35
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....5-4 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ...5-37
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4 Engine Fan Noise .........................................5-37
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-38
the Vehicle .................................................5-5 Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-39
Fuel ................................................................5-5 Brakes ........................................................5-40
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5 Battery ........................................................5-43
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-6 Jump Starting ...............................................5-44
California Fuel ...............................................5-6 Rear Axle .......................................................5-49
Additives .......................................................5-6 Four-Wheel Drive ............................................5-51
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) ..................................5-7 Front Axle ......................................................5-52
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-8 Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-53
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-9 Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-56
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-11 Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-56
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-12 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Hood Release ..............................................5-13 Back-up Lamps .........................................5-57
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-14 License Plate Lamp ......................................5-58
Engine Oil ...................................................5-15 Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-58
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-18 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-59
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-20
Tires ..............................................................5-61
Automatic Transmission Fluid (6-Speed
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-62
Transmission) ...........................................5-22
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-67
Automatic Transmission Fluid (4-Speed
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-70
Transmission) ...........................................5-25
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-71
Cooling System ............................................5-28
5-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................5-73 Washing Your Vehicle ..................................5-110
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-76 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................5-110
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-77 Finish Care ................................................5-110
Buying New Tires .........................................5-78 Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades .......5-111
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-80 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-81 and Trim ................................................5-112
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-82 Tires .........................................................5-112
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-82 Sheet Metal Damage ...................................5-113
Tire Chains ..................................................5-84 Finish Damage ...........................................5-113
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-85 Underbody Maintenance ...............................5-113
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-86 Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................5-113
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-87 Vehicle Identification .....................................5-114
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................5-114
Spare Tire ................................................5-92 Service Parts Identification Label ...................5-114
Secondary Latch System ...............................5-99
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...........5-102 Electrical System ..........................................5-114
Spare Tire .................................................5-106 Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................5-114
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-115
Appearance Care ..........................................5-106 Power Windows and Other Power Options ......5-115
Interior Cleaning .........................................5-106 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-115
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................5-108 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........................5-116
Leather ......................................................5-108 Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..............5-118
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic Underhood Fuse Block ................................5-119
Surfaces .................................................5-109
Care of Safety Belts ....................................5-109 Capacities and Specifications ........................5-122
Weatherstrips .............................................5-109

5-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Service Accessories and Modifications
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer. When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
supported service people. safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability,
ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes,
traction control, and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause malfunction or damage
not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, are not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer/
retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 1-96.

5-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 California Proposition 65 Warning Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or If this vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause Hybrid manual for more information.
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including
some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some
component wear by-products contain and/or emit these
{ CAUTION:
chemicals.
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
California Perchlorate Materials without knowing enough about it.
Requirements • Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts, and
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag tools before attempting any vehicle
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries maintenance task.
contained in remote keyless transmitters, may contain
perchlorate materials. Special handling may be • Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
necessary. For additional information, see other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off. You
could be hurt.

If doing some of your own service work, use the proper

service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order
the proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-15.

5-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to If the vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 0), the
do your own service work, see Servicing Your 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 3), or the 6.2L V8 engine
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-96. (VIN Code 2–), you can use either unleaded gasoline or
ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). See
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on page 5-7. In all other engines,
and the date of any service work performed. See
use only unleaded gasoline. See Gasoline Octane on
Maintenance Record on page 6-17.
page 5-5.

Adding Equipment to the Outside of Gasoline Octane

the Vehicle
For all vehicles except those with the 6.2L V8 engine
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the (VIN Code 2), use regular unleaded gasoline with
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can a posted octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance. rating is less than 87, you might notice an audible
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment knocking noise when you drive, commonly referred to
to the outside of the vehicle. as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If you are using
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear
Fuel heavy knocking, the engine needs service.
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine (VIN Code 2),
proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance, rating of 91 or higher. You can also use regular unleaded
we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but the vehicle’s
TIER Detergent Gasoline. acceleration could be slightly reduced, and you might
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) notice a slight audible knocking noise, commonly referred
shows the code letter or number that identifies the to as spark knock. If the octane is less than 87, you
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the might notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive.
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 5-114.

5-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the
as soon as possible. Otherwise, you could damage the vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
engine. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or Indicator Lamp on page 3-43. If this occurs, return to your
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined
service. that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Gasoline Specifications
Additives
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing are now required to contain additives that help prevent
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of the emission control system to work properly. In most
gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-6 for cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
additional information. However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
California Fuel and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiences
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
California specifications. See the underhood emission For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
California emissions standards, the vehicle will operate Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
emission control system performance might be affected. and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is
the only gasoline additive recommended by General
Motors.

5-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in shows the code letter or number that identifies the
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines, vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
if they comply with the specifications described earlier. instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing (VIN) on page 5-114.
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that If the vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (Code 0), the
were not designed for those fuels. 5.3L V8 engine (Code 3), or the 6.2L V8 engine (Code 2),
you can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel on
that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing page 5-5. In all other engines, use only the unleaded
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel gasoline described under Gasoline Octane on page 5-5.
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the vehicle Only vehicles that have the 5.3L V8 engine (Code 0), the
warranty. 5.3L V8 engine (Code 3), or the 6.2L V8 engine (Code 2)
can use 85% ethanol fuel (E85). We encourage the use
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low of E85 in vehicles that are designed to use it. The ethanol
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive in E85 is a “renewable” fuel, meaning it is made from
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl renewable sources such as corn and other crops.
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can fuel (E85) pump available. The U. S. Department
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of of Energy has an alternative fuels website
the emission control system could be affected. The (www.eere.energy.gov/afdc/infrastructure/locator.html)
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs, that can help you find E85 fuel. Those stations that
return to your dealer/retailer for service. do have E85 should have a label indicating ethanol
content. Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content
is greater than 85%.

5-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM Specification Notice: Some additives are not compatible with
D 5798. By definition, this means that fuel labeled E85 E85 fuel and can harm the vehicle’s fuel system.
will have an ethanol content between 70% and 85%. Do not add anything to E85. Damage caused by
Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet additives would not be covered by the vehicle
ASTM specifications can affect driveability and could warranty.
cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel
To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E85 fuel that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
must be formulated properly for your climate according to methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
ASTM specification D 5798. If you have trouble starting system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
on E85, it could be because the E85 fuel is not properly That damage would not be covered under the
formulated for your climate. If this happens, switching to vehicle warranty.
gasoline or adding gasoline to the fuel tank can improve
starting. For good starting and heater efficiency below
32°F (0°C), the fuel mix in the fuel tank should contain Fuels in Foreign Countries
no more than 70% ethanol. It is best not to alternate If you plan on driving in another country outside the
repeatedly between gasoline and E85. If you do switch United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
fuels, it is recommended that you add as much fuel as to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
possible — do not add less than three gallons (11 L) recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
when refueling. You should drive the vehicle immediately caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by
after refueling for at least seven miles (11 km) to allow the the vehicle warranty.
vehicle to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so you will contact a major oil company that does business in the
need to refill the fuel tank more often when using E85 country where you will be driving.
than when you are using gasoline. See Filling the
Tank on page 5-9.

5-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Filling the Tank

{ CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the pump island. Turn off the engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel. The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver side of the vehicle. If the vehicle has
E85 fuel capability, the fuel cap will be yellow and
state that E85 or gasoline can be used. See Fuel E85
(85% Ethanol) on page 5-7.

5-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 { CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the

tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
To open the fuel door, push the rearward center edge in pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
and release and it will open. painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing Your
Vehicle on page 5-110.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released When replacing the fuel cap, insert the tether in its hole
too soon, it will spring back to the right. before tightening the cap. Turn the fuel cap clockwise
until it clicks. It will require more effort to turn the fuel cap
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the on the last turn as you tighten it. Make sure the cap is
hook on the fuel door. fully installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This
would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-43.

5-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If the vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC), the Filling a Portable Fuel Container
TIGHTEN GAS CAP message displays if the fuel cap is
not properly installed.

{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
attendant. Leave the area immediately. occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or on
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one any surface other than the ground.
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit • Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
properly. This may cause the malfunction indicator
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and
Contact should be maintained until the filling
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
is complete.
on page 3-43.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.

5-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Checking Things Under
the Hood { CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
{ CAUTION: start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
injure you even when the engine is not running.
that will burn onto a hot engine.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.

5-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Hood Release
To open the hood:

1. Pull the handle with

this symbol on it. It is
located inside the
vehicle to the lower left
of the steering wheel.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and locate the

secondary hood release, near the center of the
grille.
3. Push the secondary hood release to the right.
4. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then bring the hood from full open to
within 6 inches (152 mm) from the closed position,
pause, then push the front center of the hood with a
swift, firm motion to fully close the hood.

5-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Engine Compartment Overview
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information.
When you open the hood on the 5.3L engine (4.8L, 6.0L and 6.2L similar), here is what you will see:

5-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20. L. Underhood Fuse Block on page 5-119.
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling M. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
System on page 5-28. Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on on page 5-39.
page 5-44.
D. Battery on page 5-43. Engine Oil
E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15. Checking Engine Oil
F. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See “Checking the It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
Fluid Level” under Automatic Transmission Fluid fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
(6-Speed Transmission) on page 5-22 or Automatic be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
Transmission Fluid (4-Speed Transmission) on
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
page 5-25.
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for
G. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Out of View). See the location of the engine oil dipstick.
Jump Starting on page 5-44.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, the
Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-15. oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
I. Engine Cooling Fan. See Cooling System on 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
page 5-28. or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
Fluid on page 5-38.
K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-40.

5-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When to Add Engine Oil See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-14 for
the location of the engine
oil fill cap.

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the

dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the recommended
oil. This section explains what kind of oil to use. For Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
Specifications on page 5-122. when through.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has so

much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.

5-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 What Kind of Engine Oil to Use • American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
Look for three things: Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).

Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting

GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.

Cold Temperature Operation

• GM6094M If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M. below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic
• SAE 5W-30 oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide easier cold
starting for the engine at extremely low temperatures.
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers Always use an oil that meets the required specification,
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine Oil to Use” for
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50. more information.

5-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
Flushes A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on.
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64. Change
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard the oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance (1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under the best
and engine protection. conditions, the oil life system might not indicate that an oil
change is necessary for over a year. However, the engine
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer
warranty. has trained service people who will perform this work
using genuine parts and reset the system. It is also
Engine Oil Life System important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
When to Change Engine Oil If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
the oil is changed.
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work properly, the system must
be reset every time the oil is changed.

5-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to Reset the Engine Oil Life If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes
back on when the vehicle is started, the Engine Oil Life
System System has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever What to Do with Used Oil
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
where the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
SOON message coming on, reset the system. your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
change. It will not reset itself. To reset the Engine rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
Oil Life System: warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC. Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
If the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the vehicle change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
must be in P (Park) to access this display. See DIC filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
page 3-52 or DIC Operation and Displays (Without streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
DIC Buttons) on page 3-58. place that collects used oil.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on the DIC,
or the trip odometer reset stem if the vehicle does
not have DIC buttons, for more than five seconds.
The oil life will change to 100%.

5-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for 1. Locate the air cleaner/
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter. filter assembly. See
Engine Compartment
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
Overview on
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
page 5-14.
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If driving
on dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each engine
oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine Air

Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the engine air
cleaner/filter from the vehicle by following Steps 1
through 6. When the engine air cleaner/filter is removed, 2. Loosen the four screws on the cover of the housing
lightly shake it to release loose dust and dirt. If the engine and lift up the cover.
air cleaner/filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter is
required.

5-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.

{ CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.

3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the

housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as
little dirt as possible.
4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces
and the housing.

5-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Automatic Transmission Fluid How to Check Automatic Transmission
(6-Speed Transmission) Fluid
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage your
When to Check and Change Automatic transmission. Too much can mean that some of the
Transmission Fluid fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts
or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little
It is usually not necessary to check the transmission fluid fluid could cause the transmission to overheat.
level. The only reason for fluid loss is a transmission leak Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check
or overheating the transmission. If you suspect a small your transmission fluid.
leak, then use the following checking procedures to check
the fluid level. However, if there is a large leak, then it Before checking the fluid level, prepare the vehicle as
may be necessary to have the vehicle towed to a dealer/ follows:
retailer service department and have it repaired before 1. Start the engine and park the vehicle on a level
driving the vehicle further. surface. Keep the engine running.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission 2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages P (Park).
may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty. 3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in lever through each gear range, pausing for about
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13. three seconds in each range. Then, move the shift
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in the lever back to P (Park).
Maintenance Schedule. See Scheduled Maintenance on 4. Allow the engine to idle (500 – 800 rpm) for at least
page 6-4. Be sure to use the transmission fluid listed one minute. Slowly release the brake pedal.
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.

5-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5. Keep the engine running and press the Trip/Fuel The hot check procedure is the most accurate method
button or trip odometer reset stem until TRANS to check the fluid level. Perform the hot check procedure
TEMP (Transmission Temperature) displays on the at the first opportunity. Use this cold check procedure
Driver Information Center (DIC). to check fluid level when the transmission temperature is
6. Using the TRANS TEMP reading, determine and between 80°F and 90°F (27°C and 32°C).
perform the appropriate check procedure. If the 1. Locate the transmission
TRANS TEMP reading is not within the required dipstick at the
temperature ranges, allow the vehicle to cool, rear of the engine
or operate the vehicle until the appropriate compartment, on the
transmission fluid temperature is reached. passenger side of
Cold Check Procedure the vehicle.

Use this procedure only as a reference to determine

if the transmission has enough fluid to be operated
safely until a hot check procedure can be made. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14
for more information.
2. Flip the handle up, and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way,
wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower
level. Repeat the check procedure to verify the
reading.

5-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Hot Check Procedure
Use this procedure to check the transmission fluid level
when the transmission fluid temperature is between
160°F and 200°F (71°C and 93°C).
The hot check is the most accurate method to check the
fluid level. The hot check should be performed at the first
opportunity in order to verify the cold check. The fluid
level rises as fluid temperature increases, so it is
important to ensure the transmission temperature is
within range.
1. Locate the transmission
5. If the fluid level is below the COLD check band, add dipstick at the
only enough fluid as necessary to bring the level rear of the engine
into the COLD band. It does not take much fluid, compartment, on the
generally less than one pint (0.5L). Do not overfill. passenger side of the
6. Perform a hot check at the first opportunity after vehicle.
the transmission reaches a normal operating
temperature between 160°F to 200°F (71°C to 93°C).
7. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14
dipstick back in all the way, then flip the handle for more information.
down to lock the dipstick in place.
2. Flip the handle up, and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way,
wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower
level. Repeat the check procedure to verify the
reading.

5-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least twice using the
procedure described previously. Consistency (repeatable
readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid level. If
readings are still inconsistent, contact your dealer/retailer.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

(4-Speed Transmission)
When to Check and Change Automatic
5. Safe operating level is within the HOT cross hatch Transmission Fluid
band on the dipstick. If the fluid level is not within the
HOT band, and the transmission temperature is A good time to check the automatic transmission fluid
between 160°F and 200°F (71°C and 93°C), add or level is when the engine oil is changed.
drain fluid as necessary to bring the level into the Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
HOT band. If the fluid level is low, add only enough Additional Required Services on page 6-6 and be sure
fluid to bring the level into the HOT band. It does not to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5L). Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Do not overfill.
6. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way, then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.

5-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to Check Automatic Transmission Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
Fluid (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), drive the vehicle
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may in 3 (Third) until the engine temperature gage moves
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
department. A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick. but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine run at
idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 50°F
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage your (10°C) or more. If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you may
transmission. Too much can mean that some of the have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts low during this cold check, you must check the fluid hot
or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot will give you a
fluid could cause the transmission to overheat. more accurate reading of the fluid level.
Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid. Checking the Fluid Level
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the Prepare the vehicle as follows:
transmission fluid level if you have been driving: 1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C). running.
• At high speed for quite a while. 2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in P (Park).
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
• While pulling a trailer. lever through each gear range, pausing for about
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal three seconds in each range. Then, position
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F the shift lever in P (Park).
(82°C to 93°C). 4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.

5-26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
1. Locate the transmission
dipstick handle with this
graphic which is located
at the rear of the engine
compartment, on the
passenger side of the
vehicle.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14

for more information on location. 4. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
2. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or
3. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and in the HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check.
then pull it back out again. Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an
accurate reading.
5. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down
to lock the dipstick in place.
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least twice using the
procedure described previously. Consistency (repeatable
readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid level. If
readings are still inconsistent, contact your dealer/retailer.

5-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to Add Automatic Transmission Cooling System
Fluid If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what Hybrid manual for more information.
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13. correct working temperature.
Using a funnel, add fluid down the transmission dipstick
tube only after checking the transmission fluid while it is
hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If the fluid
level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring
the level up to the HOT area for a hot check. It does
not take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L).
Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described
under “How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid,”
earlier in this section. 5.3L Engine shown, 4.8L, 6.0L and 6.2L Engine
• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the similar
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down
to lock the dipstick in place. A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fan(s)

5-28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
{ CAUTION: corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 miles)
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
start up even when the engine is not running and would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
the vehicle.
away from any underhood electric fan.

Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
{ CAUTION: DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you The following explains the cooling system and how to
can be burned. check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run Overheating on page 5-35.
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.

5-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
{ CAUTION: • Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
outside temperature.
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can • Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid engine temperature.
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant • Protects against rust and corrosion.
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system • Will not damage aluminum parts.
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get • Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
too hot but you would not get the overheat Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used, the
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant. warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could
be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of
the engine coolant listed in this manual for the
cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-13 for more information.

5-30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do
not do anything else until it cools down. If coolant is
visible but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL
COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank,
but be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done.

The coolant surge tank is located in the engine

compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for
more information on location.
The coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD
mark. If it is not, you may have a leak in the cooling
system.

5-31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to Add Coolant to the Surge Tank
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION: Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and pressure cap — even a little — they can come out
it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine. cooling system, including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could the pressure cap.
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.

{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.

5-32

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:

1. You can remove the

coolant surge tank
pressure cap when
the cooling system,
including the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise

about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for 3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture
that to stop. A hiss means there is still some to the FULL COLD mark.
pressure left.

2. Keep turning the pressure cap slowly and

remove it.

5-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5. Replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure
cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
6. Verify coolant level after engine is shut off and the
coolant is cold. If necessary, repeat coolant fill
procedure Steps 1 through 6.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap

If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
cooling fan. installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for more
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add information on location.
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark.

5-34

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Engine Overheating Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine be running. If they are not, do not continue to run
overheating. the engine and have the vehicle serviced.
There is a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle’s Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
instrument panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
Gage on page 3-42. Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on
In addition, ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE, page 5-37 for information on driving to a safe place
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE, and a ENGINE in an emergency.
POWER IS REDUCED message comes on in the Driver Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving with
Information Center (DIC) on the instrument panel. See no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged.
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64. The costly repairs would not be covered by
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning the vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine
appears, but instead get service help right away. Protection Operating Mode on page 5-37 for
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7. information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.

5-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If Steam Is Coming From The Engine If No Steam Is Coming From The
Compartment Engine Compartment
The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message, along
{ CAUTION: with a low coolant condition, can indicate a serious
problem.
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the when the vehicle:
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign • Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
• Stops after high-speed driving.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
• Idles for long periods in traffic.
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if it • Tows a trailer. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-50.
overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of
engine is cool. steam:
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode 1. Turn the air conditioning off.
on page 5-37 for information on driving to a safe 2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
place in an emergency. to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let
the engine idle.

5-36

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays, protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive the vehicle allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair.
slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle distance The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the
from the car in front of you. If the warning does not come cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the oil
back on, continue to drive normally. life system. See Engine Oil on page 5-15.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away. Engine Fan Noise
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for If the vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan, when the
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide more air
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down. to cool the engine. In most everyday driving conditions,
Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is not fully
Mode” later in this section. engaged. This improves fuel economy and reduces fan
noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing, and/or
Overheated Engine Protection high outside temperatures, the fan speed increases as
the clutch more fully engages, so you may hear an
Operating Mode increase in fan noise. This is normal and should not be
mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
shifts. It is merely the cooling system functioning properly.
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED message is displayed,
The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not
an overheat protection mode which alternates firing
required and the clutch disengages.
groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this
mode, you will notice a loss in power and engine You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
performance. This operating mode allows the vehicle to engine. It will go away as the fan clutch partially
be driven to a safe place in an emergency. Driving disengages.
extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.

5-37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If the vehicle has electric cooling fans, you may hear the When to Check Power Steering Fluid
fans spinning at low speed during most everyday driving.
The fans may turn off if no cooling is required. Under It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing, and/or high outside unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
temperatures, or if you are operating the air conditioning you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
system, the fans may change to high speed and you could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
may hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal and and repaired.
indicates that the cooling system is functioning properly.
The fans will change to low speed when additional How to Check Power Steering Fluid
cooling is no longer required. To check the power steering fluid:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
Power Steering Fluid cool down.
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode 2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
Hybrid manual for more information. 3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-14 for 4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
reservoir location. 5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the
level up to the mark.

5-38

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 What to Use Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see Add washer fluid until the
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13. tank is full. See Engine
Always use the proper fluid. Compartment Overview on
page 5-14 for reservoir
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the
location.
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
the vehicle’s warranty. Always use the correct fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-13. Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
Windshield Washer Fluid the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
What to Use
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
When windshield washer fluid needs to be added, be Water can cause the solution to freeze and
sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
Use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing of the washer system. Also, water does not
in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing. clean as well as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid • Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
The vehicle has a low washer fluid message in the DIC expansion if freezing occurs, which could
that comes on when the washer fluid is low. The message damage the tank if it is completely full.
is displayed for 15 seconds at the start of each ignition
cycle. When the WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID • Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
message displays, you will need to add washer fluid to windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
the windshield washer fluid reservoir. windshield washer system and paint.

5-39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Brakes Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings
Brake Fluid are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake
linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done on the brake
The brake master
hydraulic system.
cylinder reservoir is filled
with DOT 3 brake fluid.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-14 for { CAUTION:
the location of the reservoir.
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the
engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and the vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system. See
“Checking Brake Fluid” in this section.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
• The brake fluid level goes down because of normal When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed, warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning
the fluid level goes back up. Light on page 3-40.
• A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic to check the brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner on page 6-4.
or later the brakes will not work well.

5-40

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Checking Brake Fluid What to Add
Check brake fluid by looking at the brake fluid reservoir. Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
The fluid level should be area around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
above MIN. If it is not, dirt from entering the reservoir.
have the brake hydraulic
system checked to
see if there is a leak. { CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.

Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
MAX mark. brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 5-110.

5-41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Brake Wear Brake Pedal Travel
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all might be required.
the time the vehicle is moving, except when applying
the brake pedal firmly. Brake Adjustment
Every brake stop, the disc brakes adjust for wear.
{ CAUTION: Replacing Brake System Parts
The brake wear warning sound means that soon The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
accident. When the brake wear warning sound is the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
heard, have the vehicle serviced. was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
pads could result in costly brake repair. replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake not work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes. between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help worse. The braking performance expected can change in
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in are installed.
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-122.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.

5-42

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Battery Vehicle Storage
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
{ CAUTION:
This vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for
one that has the replacement number shown on the Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that
original battery’s label. See Engine Compartment can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not
Overview on page 5-14 for battery location. careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-44 for tips
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related on working around a battery without getting hurt.
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,
handling. remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This helps keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or
use a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain the
charge of the battery over an extended period of time.

5-43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Jump Starting Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode by the warranty.
Hybrid manual for more information. Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
If the vehicle’s battery (or batteries) has run down, you will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables 1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to battery with a negative ground system.
do it safely.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
{ CAUTION: be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
because: each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
• They contain acid that can burn you. connection you do not want. You would not be able
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite. to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
• They contain enough electricity to burn you. damage the electrical systems.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the
all of these things can hurt you. parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the
jump start procedure. Put the automatic transmission
in P (Park) or a manual transmission in N (Neutral)
before setting the parking brake. If you have a
four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer
case is in a drive gear, not in N (Neutral).

5-44

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all the lamps that are not needed. This
avoids sparks and helps save both batteries. And
it could save the radio!
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting
terminal and a remote negative (−) jump starting The remote negative (−) terminal is a stud located
terminal. You should always use these remote on the right front of the engine, where the negative
terminals instead of the terminals on the battery. battery cable attaches.
If the vehicle has a remote positive (+) terminal, it is See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for
located under a red plastic cover at the positive more information on the location of the remote
battery post. To uncover the remote positive (+) positive (+) and remote negative (−) terminals.
terminal, open the red plastic cover.

5-45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CAUTION: (Continued)
{ CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the engine Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your
clothing and tools away from any underhood eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water
electric fan. and get medical help immediately.

{ CAUTION: { CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if once the engine is running.
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not 5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
need to add water to the battery installed in your missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, Before you connect the cables, here are some
add water to take care of that first. If you do not, basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
explosive gas could be present. positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
CAUTION: (Continued) unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.

5-46

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you 8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
will get a short that would damage the battery negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on Do not let the other end touch anything until the
the dead battery because this can cause sparks. next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
6. Connect the red
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to the remote
positive (+) cable to the
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
positive (+) terminal of
battery.
the vehicle with the
dead battery. Use a 9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
remote positive (+) the remote negative (−) terminal, on the vehicle with
terminal if the vehicle the dead battery.
has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to

the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

5-47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote

Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

5-48

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do
the following:
Rear Axle
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the When to Check Lubricant
vehicle that had the bad battery.
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
vehicle with the good battery. unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the Have it inspected and repaired.
vehicle with the good battery. All axle assemblies are filled by volume of fluid during
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other production. They are not filled to reach a certain level.
vehicle. When checking the fluid level on any axle, variations in
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover, if the the readings can be caused by factory fill differences
vehicle has one, to its original position. between the minimum and the maximum fluid volume.
Also, if a vehicle has just been driven before checking the
fluid level, it may appear lower than normal because fluid
has traveled out along the axle tubes and has not drained
back to the sump area. Therefore, a reading taken five
minutes after the vehicle has been driven will appear to
have a lower fluid level than a vehicle that has been
stationary for an hour or two. Remember that the rear
axle assembly must be supported to get a true reading.

5-49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to Check Lubricant

2500 Series

1500 Series To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a

level surface.
• For all 4.8L, 5.3L 1500 series and all 6.2L all wheel
drive 1500 series luxury model applications, the
proper level is from 0.04 inch to 0.75 inch (1.0 mm to
19.0 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the rear axle. Add only enough fluid to
reach the proper level.

5-50

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • For all 6.0L 1500 series and all 6.2L non-all wheel How to Check Lubricant
drive 1500 series luxury model applications, the
proper level is from 0.6 inch to 1.6 inches (15 mm to
40 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the rear axle. Add only enough fluid to
reach the proper level.
• The proper fill level for the 2500 series is from 0 to
1/2 inch (0 to 13 mm) below the bottom of the filler
plug hole, located at the front of the axle. Add only
enough fluid to reach the proper level.

Four-Wheel Drive
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles. There are two additional systems that need
lubrication.
Active Transfer Case
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant A. Fill Plug
B. Drain Plug
It is not necessary to regularly check transfer case fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak, or you hear an To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. level surface.
Have it inspected and repaired. If the level is below the bottom of the fill plug hole, you
will need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the fill plug hole. Use
care not to overtighten the plug.

5-51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When to Change Lubricant How to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
often to change the lubricant. See Scheduled level surface.
Maintenance on page 6-4.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-13.

Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
1500 Series

A: Fill Plug
B: Drain Plug

5-52

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-13.

Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim of the headlamps have been preset at
the factory and should need no further adjustment.
However, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the aim
of the headlamps can be affected and adjustment
can be necessary.
All except 1500 Series If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
can mean the vertical aim of your headlamps needs
to be adjusted.
A: Fill Plug
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
B: Drain Plug dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need to be
• When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant adjusted. It is possible however, to re-aim the
to raise the level from 0 (0 mm) to 1/8 inch headlamps as described.
(3.2 mm) below the filler plug hole.
• When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler plug hole.

5-53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The vehicle should: To adjust the vertical aim:
• Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from 1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-13
a light colored wall. for more information.
• Have all four tires on a level surface which is level
all the way to the wall.
• Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall.
• Not have any snow, ice, or mud on it.
• Be fully assembled and all other work stopped while
headlamp aiming is being performed.
• Be normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one
person or 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on the driver seat.
• Have tires properly inflated.
• Have the spare tire is in its proper location in the
vehicle.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly 2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of the low-beam
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly. headlamp.
3. Record the distance from the ground to the aim dot
on the low-beam headlamp.

5-54

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. At a wall measure from the ground upward (A) to
the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall or flat
surface the width of the vehicle at the height of the 7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
mark in Step 4. are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam The adjustment screw can be turned with a E8 Torx®
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may socket.
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause 8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
damage to the headlamp. beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the angle of the beam.
headlamp not being adjusted. This allows only the
beam of light from the headlamp being adjusted
to be seen on the flat surface.

5-55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-58.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.

Halogen Bulbs

9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is

{ CAUTION:
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape
line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
incorrect headlamp aim. others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite the instructions on the bulb package.
headlamp.

5-56

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps To replace one of these bulbs:

and Back-up Lamps 1. Open the liftgate. See Power Liftgate on page 2-15
for more information.
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information. 2. Remove the two
A. Taillamp/Stoplamp screws from the
taillamp assembly.
B. Back-up Lamp
C. Turn Signal
Lamp/Taillamp

3. Pull the taillamp assembly rearward until the inner

pins on the taillamp assembly are disengaged from
the vehicle.
4. Press the release tab, if bulb socket has one, and
turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the taillamp assembly.
5. Pull the old bulb straight out from the bulb socket.

5-57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6. Press a new bulb into the bulb socket and insert it 3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
into the taillamp assembly. Turn the bulb socket bulb straight out of the socket.
clockwise into the taillamp assembly until it clicks. 4. Install the new bulb.
7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly. When reinstalling,
make sure to line up the pins on the taillamp 5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the license
assembly with the vehicle. If this is not done the plate lamp.
taillamp assembly cannot be correctly installed.
Replacement Bulbs
License Plate Lamp If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.

Exterior Lamp Bulb Number

License Plate Lamp 168
Rear Turn Signal Lamp, Taillamp, 3047
and Stoplamp
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.

1. Remove the two screws holding each of the license

plate lamps to the molding that is part of the liftgate.
2. Twist and pull the license plate lamp forward
through the molding opening.

5-58

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
Replacement blades come in different types and
are removed in different ways. To replace the wiper
blade assembly:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from
the windshield.
3. Install the new blade onto the arm connector and
make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the
locked position.
For the proper type and size, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 6-15.

2. Squeeze the grooved areas on each side of the

blade, and turn the blade assembly away from
the arm connector.

5-59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement
1. Lift the wiper blade assembly up and out of the park
rest position.

4. Replace the wiper blade.

5. Return the wiper blade assembly to the park rest
position.

2. Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the

backglass. The backglass wiper blade will not
lock in a vertical position, so care should be used
when pulling it away from the vehicle.
3. Turn the wiper blade assembly, and pull it off of the
wiper arm. Hold the wiper arm in position and push
the blade away from the wiper arm.

5-60

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever • Underinflated tires pose the same danger
have questions about your tire warranty and where as overloaded tires. The resulting
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty booklet accident could cause serious injury.
for details. For additional information refer to the tire Check all tires frequently to maintain the
manufacturer. recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your vehicle’s
tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
{ CAUTION: Pressure on page 5-70.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
are dangerous. impact — such as when you hit a
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can pothole. Keep tires at the recommended
cause overheating as a result of too pressure.
much flexing. You could have an air-out • Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
and a serious accident. See Loading the the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if your
Vehicle on page 4-33. vehicle’s tires have been damaged,
replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)

5-61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 20-Inch Tires
If your vehicle has the optional 20-inch
P275/55R20 size tires, they are classified as
touring tires and are designed for on road use. The
low-profile, wide tread design is not recommended
for off-road driving. See Off-Road Driving on
page 4-13, for additional information.

Tire Sidewall Labeling

Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples
of a typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination

of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type, and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.

5-62

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 (B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria (E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
Specification): Original equipment tires designed number of plies in the sidewall and under
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have the tread.
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all (F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
federal safety guidelines. Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: treadwear,
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The traction, and temperature resistance. For more
Department of Transportation (DOT) code information, see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the page 5-81.
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. (G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters maximum pressure needed to support that load.
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire For information on recommended tire pressure
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-70
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the and Loading the Vehicle on page 4-33.
tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.

5-63

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 (B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used in a dual
configuration. For information on recommended
tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-70 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4-33.
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire Safety Standards.
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
of letters and numbers used to define a particular Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the
type, and service description. See the “Tire Size” tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
illustration later in this section for more detail. sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.

5-64

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 (F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number (B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
of plies in the sidewall and under the tread. the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure (C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
needed to support that load when used as a indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
single. For information on recommended For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as
tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on shown in item C of the tire illustration, it would
page 5-70 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4-33. mean that the tire’s sidewall is 75 percent as high
as it is wide.
Tire Size
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
The following examples show the different parts of indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
a tire size. letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States carry a load.
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set
by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.

5-65

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 (D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire inches.
(F) Load Range: Load Range.
(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United
States version of a metric tire sizing system. The (G) Service Description: The service description
letters LT as the first two characters in the tire size indicates the load index and speed rating of a
means a light truck tire engineered to standards set tire. If two numbers are given as in the example,
by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association. 120/116, then this represents the load index
for single versus dual wheel usage (single/dual).
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates The speed rating is the maximum speed a
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall tire is certified to carry a load.
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as
shown in item C of the light truck (LT-Metric) tire
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
75 percent as high as it is wide.

5-66

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tire Terminology and Definitions Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per on page 5-70.
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa). Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
Accessory Weight: This means the combined standard and optional equipment including the
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
optional accessories are, automatic transmission, but without passengers and cargo.
power steering, power brakes, power windows, DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
power seats, and air conditioning. of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
to its width. motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
located between the plies and the tread. Cords the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
may be made from steel or other reinforcing and date of production.
materials.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped Loading the Vehicle on page 4-33.
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-33.
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.

5-67

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-33. occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of page 4-33.
an asymmetrical tire, that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle. Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The
vehicles. side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
Load Index: An assigned number ranging white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper
carrying capacity of a tire. than the same moldings on the other sidewall of
the tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall. passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
for that tire. manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-70 and Loading
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity the Vehicle on page 4-33.
weight, and production options weight.

5-68

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at Standards): A tire information system that
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which determined by tire manufacturers using
the tire beads are seated. government testing procedures. The ratings are
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
and the bead. Tire Quality Grading on page 5-81.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
tire can operate. (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
the Vehicle on page 4-33.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided. Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
contact with the road.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
called wear bars, that show across the tread of and the original equipment tire size and
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on Loading Information Label” under Loading
page 5-77. the Vehicle on page 4-33.

5-69

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Inflation - Tire Pressure A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information. correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
to operate effectively. amount of air pressure needed to support your
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is For additional information regarding how much
not. If your tires do not have enough air weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
(under-inflation), you can get the following: the Tire and Loading Information label, see Loading
• Too much flexing the Vehicle on page 4-33. How you load your
• Too much heat vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort.
Never load your vehicle with more weight than it
• Tire overloading was designed to carry.
• Premature or irregular wear When to Check
• Poor handling
Check your tires once a month or more.
• Reduced fuel economy
Do not forget to check the pressure of the spare
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), tire. See Spare Tire on page 5-106 for additional
you can get the following: information.
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards

5-70

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to Check Tire Pressure Monitor System
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle’s
may look properly inflated even when they are tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver
underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure located in the vehicle.
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
inflation pressure matches the recommended should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information those tires.)
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
pressure is low, add air until you reach the As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
recommended amount. equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
and moisture. causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.

5-71

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper Federal Communications Commission
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has (FCC) and Industry and Science
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS Canada
low tire pressure telltale.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator conditions:
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will 1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
flash for approximately one minute and then remain 2. This device must accept any interference received,
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue including interference that may cause undesired
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the operation.
malfunction exists.
Vehicles with TPMS operate on a radio frequency and
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system comply with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of 1. This device may not cause interference.
reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the 2. This device must accept any interference received,
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS including interference that may cause undesired
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or operation of the device.
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or Changes or modifications to this system by other than
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to an authorized service facility could void authorization to
function properly. use this equipment.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-73 for
additional information.

5-72

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tire Pressure Monitor Operation Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed by the
driver. For additional information and details about the
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and
Hybrid manual for more information. Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-52 or DIC
Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
page 3-58 and DIC Warnings and Messages on
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when
page 3-64.
a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires and transmit turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
vehicle. low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
When a low tire pressure
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
condition is detected, the
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
TPMS illuminates the low
your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading the
tire pressure warning light
Vehicle on page 4-33, for an example of the Tire and
located on the instrument
Loading Information label and its location on your
panel cluster.
vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-70.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center page 5-76 and Tires on page 5-61.
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and the
DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure. Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not covered
by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire sealants.

5-73

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TPMS Malfunction Light and Message • One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the sensors are installed and the sensor matching
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light process is performed successfully. See your dealer/
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the retailer for service.
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC • Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can and wheels other than those recommended for your
cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
on are: properly. See Buying New Tires on page 5-78.
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the • Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
message should go off once you re-install the road If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal a
tire containing the TPMS sensor. low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service if
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started but the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on
not completed or not completed successfully after and stays on.
rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message and
TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS
sensor matching process is performed successfully.
See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in this
section.

5-74

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TPMS Sensor Matching Process The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one or 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes engine off.
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position. 3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger approximately five seconds. The horn sounds twice
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC
dealer/retailer for service. screen.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each tire/ 4. Start with the driver side front tire.
wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s air
pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do not 5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
tire’s sidewall. decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the which may take up to 30 seconds to sound,
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure confirms that the sensor identification code has
gage, or a key. been matched to this tire and wheel position.
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel 6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
position, and five minutes overall to match all four the procedure in Step 5.
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes, to
match the first tire and wheel, or more than five minutes 7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
to match all four tire and wheel positions the matching the procedure in Step 5.
process stops and you need to start over.

5-75

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to tires as soon as possible and check wheel
indicate the sensor identification code has been alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-77
sensor matching process is no longer active. and Wheel Replacement on page 5-82.
The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC
display screen goes off.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

Tire Inspection and Rotation

We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always use the
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New correct rotation pattern shown here.
Tires on page 5-77 for more information.
Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
on page 6-4. and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This Pressure on page 5-70 and Loading the Vehicle on
page 4-33.
will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-73.

5-76

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly When It Is Time for New Tires
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-122. Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions,
influence when you need new tires.
{ CAUTION: One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to check the treadwear
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts indicators, which appear
become loose after time. The wheel could when your tires have only
come off and cause an accident. When you 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from of tread remaining. Some
places where the wheel attaches to the commercial truck tires may
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a not have treadwear
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure indicators.
to use a scraper or wire brush later, if
needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-86.

Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push,

pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it
moves, tighten the cable. See Storing a Flat or
Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-102.

5-77

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 You need new tires if any of the following statements Buying New Tires
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
around the tire. vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on your
vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet General
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC
tire’s rubber. spec) system rating. If you need replacement tires,
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the
deep enough to show cord or fabric. same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle will
continue to have tires that are designed to give the
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split. same performance and vehicle safety, during normal use,
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that as the original tires.
cannot be repaired well because of the size or GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
location of the damage. dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
size. If the tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
spec number will be followed by an MS for mud and
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5-62 for
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
additional information.
about the need to replace your tires as they get older,
consult the tire manufacturer for more information. GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep
your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires
were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect
the braking and handling performance of your vehicle.
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-76 for
information on proper tire rotation.

5-78

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 { CAUTION: { CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes, brands, wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
might not handle properly, and you could have a could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
crash. Using tires of different sizes, brands, or radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.
types could also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size, brand, and type If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that do
tires on all wheels. not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the
same size, load range, speed rating, and construction
Your vehicle may have a different size spare than type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s
the road tires (those originally installed on your original tires.
vehicle). When new, your vehicle included a spare
tire and wheel assembly with a similar overall Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system may
give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if non-TPC spec
diameter as your vehicle’s road tires and wheels,
rated tires are installed on your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec
so it is all right to drive on it. Because this spare rated tires may give a low-pressure warning that is higher
was developed for use on your vehicle, it will not or lower than the proper warning level you would get with
affect vehicle handling. TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 5-71.

5-79

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information Label. See Loading
the Vehicle on page 4-33, for more information about { CAUTION:
the Tire and Loading Information Label and its location
on your vehicle. If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may
not provide an acceptable level of performance and
Different Size Tires and Wheels safety if tires not recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase the chance that you
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
your original equipment wheels and tires, this could
specific wheel and tire systems developed for your
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle certified technician.
has electronic systems such as anti-lock brakes,
rollover airbags, traction control, and electronic stability
See Buying New Tires on page 5-78 and Accessories
control, the performance of these systems can be
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.
affected.

5-80

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and on the wear rate of the tire when tested under
maximum section width. For example: controlled conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would
Treadwear 200 Traction AA wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the
Temperature A government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the
The following information relates to the system actual conditions of their use, however, and may
developed by the United States National Highway depart significantly from the norm due to variations
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which in driving habits, service practices, and differences
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and in road characteristics and climate.
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are Traction – AA, A, B, C
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare controlled conditions on specified government test
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some may have poor traction performance.
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.

5-81

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Temperature – A, B, C Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
when tested under controlled conditions on a wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
high temperature can cause the material of the tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive alignment might need to be checked. If you notice your
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires
grade C corresponds to a level of performance and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your
which all passenger car tires must meet under the dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the Wheel Replacement
minimum required by law. It should be noted that Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
the temperature grade for this tire is established for or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
loading, either separately or in combination, can aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.

5-82

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need. Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
the same way as the one it replaces.
clearance to the body and chassis.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-86 for more
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
information.
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the Used Replacement Wheels
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS
sensors for your vehicle.

{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts, You cannot know how it has been used or how far
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
could affect the braking and handling of your cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, use
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you a new GM original equipment wheel.
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.

5-83

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tire Chains
CAUTION: (Continued)
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive
slowly, readjust or remove the device if it is
contacting your vehicle, and do not spin your
{ CAUTION: vehicle’s wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
If your vehicle has P265/65R18 or P275/55R20 size
them on the rear tires.
tires, do not use tire chains. They can damage your
vehicle because there is not enough clearance. Tire
chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount Notice: If your vehicle has P265/70R17 size tires,
of clearance can cause damage to the brakes, use tire chains only where legal and only when you
suspension, or other vehicle parts. The area must. Use chains that are the proper size for your
damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose vehicle’s tires. Install them on the rear tires only.
control of your vehicle and you or others may be Do not use chains on the front tires.
injured in a crash.
Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends
Use another type of traction device only if its securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer recommends it for use on your manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
vehicle and tire size combination and road chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions. them. If the contact continues, slow down until
it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
CAUTION: (Continued) chains on will damage your vehicle.

5-84

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving, { CAUTION:
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do: appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. you or others could be badly injured or killed if the
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

5-85

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Changing a Flat Tire
CAUTION: (Continued)
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information. 3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage be sure the transfer case is in a drive
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard gear — not in N (Neutral).
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6. 4. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
5. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
{ CAUTION: vehicle.
6. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear of
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle the tire farthest away from the one being
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or changed. That would be the tire on the other
other people. You and they could be badly injured side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
1. Set the parking brake firmly. example as a guide to assist you in the placement
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park). of wheel blocks (A).
CAUTION: (Continued)

5-86

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will need to change a flat tire is
stored under the storage tray, which is located on the
driver side trim panel (over the rear wheelhouse).

A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
Regular Wheelbase shown, Extended Wheelbase
similar

1. Remove the tray to access the tools by pulling up

on the finger depression under the jack symbol.

5-87

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. Remove the wing nut (B) used to retain the tool bag The tools you will be using include the following:
by turning it counterclockwise. A. Jack D. Jack Handle
3. Turn the knob (A) on the jack counterclockwise to B. Wheel Blocks Extensions
release the jack and wheel blocks from the bracket. C. Jack Handle E. Wheel Wrench
4. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheel block
retainer by turning the wing nut (C)
counterclockwise.

5-88

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To access the spare tire, refer to the following graphics 1. Open the hoist shaft access door (C) on the
and instructions: bumper to access the spare tire lock (K).
2. To remove the spare tire lock, insert the ignition
key, turn it clockwise and then pull it straight out.

3. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (D) and

wheel wrench (E) as shown.

A. Hoist Assembly G. Tire/Wheel Retainer

B. Hoist Shaft H. Spare Tire (Valve
C. Hoist Shaft Access Stem Pointed Down)
Cover/Hole I. Hoist Shaft
D. Jack Handle Access Hole
Extensions J. Hoist End of
E. Wheel Wrench Extension Tool
F. Hoist Cable K. Spare Tire Lock

5-89

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. Insert the open end If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the
of the extension (J) secondary latch is engaged causing the tire
through the hole in the not to lower. See Secondary Latch System on
rear bumper (I) (hoist page 5-99 for more information.
shaft access hole).
6. Use the wheel wrench
hook that allows you to
pull the hoist cable
towards you, to assist
in reaching the
spare tire.

Be sure the hoist end (J) of the extension (D)

connects to the hoist shaft (B). The ribbed square
end of the extension is used to lower the spare tire.

5. Turn the wheel wrench (E) counterclockwise to

lower the spare tire (H) to the ground. Continue
to turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be
pulled out from under the vehicle.

5-90

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Once the retainer is separated from the guide pin,
tilt the retainer and pull it through the center of
the wheel along with the cable and latch.
8. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
7. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle with some slack in the
cable to access the tire/wheel retainer. Separate the
retainer from the guide pin by sliding the retainer up
the pin while pressing down on the latch.

5-91

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing
a Flat Tire on page 5-86 for more information.

3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.

Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen
the wheel nuts. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet.

2. If your vehicle has a center cap that covers the wheel

fasteners, place the chisel end of the wheel wrench
in the slot on the wheel and gently pry the cap out.
If the wheel has a bolt-on hub cap, loosen
the plastic nut caps by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. The plastic nut caps will be
retained in the hub cap after it is removed from the
wheel.

5-92

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Jacking Locations (Overall View)

A. Front Position
B. Rear Position Front Position — 1500 Models

4. Position the jack under the vehicle as shown.

5-93

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Front Position – 2500 Models Rear Position – 1500 Models

Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a front tire of the

vehicle, you will need to use the jack handle and only
one jack handle extension. Attach the wheel wrench
to the jack handle extension. Attach the jack handle
to the jack (A). Position the jack on the frame behind
the flat tire where the frame sections overlap. Turn
the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle.
Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there
is enough room for the spare tire to clear the ground.

5-94

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 { CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

{ CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury
Rear Position – All Other Models and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location before raising the
Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a rear tire of the vehicle.
vehicle, you will need to use the jack handle (B) and
both jack handle extensions (C). Attach the wheel
wrench (D) to the jack handle extensions (C). Attach
the jack handle (B) to the jack (A). Use the jacking
pad provided on the rear axle. Turn the wheel
wrench (D) clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise the
vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough
room for the spare tire to clear the ground.

5-95

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5. Remove all of the 7. Remove any rust or dirt
wheel nuts. from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.

6. Take off the flat tire.

5-96

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end
of the nuts toward the wheel after mounting the
{ CAUTION: spare tire.

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is

fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after { CAUTION:
time. The wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel
vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a paper could fall off, causing a crash.
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-86. 9. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then use the
wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until the wheel
is held against the hub.

5-97

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 10. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the vehicle. Lower the jack completely. CAUTION: (Continued)
11. Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as
shown by turning the wheel wrench clockwise. after replacing. Follow the torque specification
supplied by the aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel nuts. See
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-122 for
original equipment wheel nut torque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can

lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque
specification. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-122 for the wheel nut torque specification.
When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire, you must
also reinstall either the center cap or the bolt-on hub
{ CAUTION: cap, depending on which your vehicle has.
• For center caps, line up the tab on the center cap
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly with the slot in the wheel. The cap only goes in
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or one way. Place the cap on the wheel and press until
come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened with it snaps into place.
a torque wrench to the proper torque specification • For bolt-on hub caps, line up the plastic nut caps
CAUTION: (Continued) with the wheel nuts and tighten clockwise by
hand to get them started. Then tighten with the
wheel wrench until snug.

5-98

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Secondary Latch System To release the spare tire from the secondary latch:

Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist 1. Check under the

assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is vehicle to see if the
designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling off cable end is visible. If
your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work, the spare the cable is not visible
must be installed with the valve stem pointing down. See proceed to Step 6.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-102.

{ CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly and
you and others could get hurt. Read and follow the 2. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning
instructions listed next. the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks
or feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.

5-99

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If the spare
tire lowers to the ground, continue with Step 5 of
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-87.
5. If the spare does not lower, turn the wrench
counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches
(15 cm) of cable is exposed.
6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends, with
the backs facing each other.

7. Place the bottom edge

of the jack (A) on the
wheel blocks (B),
separating them so that
the jack is balanced
securely.
8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel
wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel
blocks) under the vehicle toward the front of the rear
bumper.

5-100

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 { CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the procedure
could be injured by the jack. If the spare tire does
not slide off the jack completely, make sure no
one is behind you or on either side of you as you
pull the jack out from under the spare.

13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and

carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
9. Position the center lift point of the jack under the If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert the
center of the spare tire. hoist end of extension, and wheel wrench into the
hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn the wheel
10. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare the rest
lifts the end fitting. of the way.
11. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops 14. Turn the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the
moving upward and is held firmly in place. The bumper clockwise to raise the cable back up if the
secondary latch has released and the spare tire is cable is hanging under the vehicle.
balancing on the jack. Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
12. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using the
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the hoist assembly until it has been inspected and/or
spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by replaced.
the cable. To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the
Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-92.

5-101

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare
tire carrier. Refer to the following graphics and
Tools instructions to help you:

{ CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.

Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire

under your vehicle for an extended period of time or
with the valve stem pointing up can damage the
wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve stem
pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired A. Hoist Assembly H. Spare Tire/Flat
as soon as possible. B. Hoist Shaft Tire (Valve Stem
C. Hoist Shaft Access Pointed Down)
Cover/Hole I. Hoist Shaft
D. Jack Handle Access Hole
Extensions J. Hoist End of
E. Wheel Wrench Extension Tool
F. Hoist Cable K. Spare Tire Lock
G. Tire/Wheel Retainer

5-102

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1. Put the tire (H) on the ground at the rear of the
vehicle with the valve stem pointed down, and to
the rear.

3. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (D) and

wheel wrench (E) as shown.

2. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle. Separate the

tire/wheel retainer (G) from the guide pin. Pull
the pin through the center of the wheel. Tilt
the retainer down through the center wheel opening.
Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the
underside of the wheel.

5-103

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. Insert the open end of
the extension (J)
through the hole in the
rear bumper (I) (hoist
shaft access hole).

5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure the

retainer is seated in the wheel opening.
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise 7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves,
cannot overtighten the cable. use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.
8. Reinstall the spare tire lock.
9. Reinstall the hoist shaft access cover.

5-104

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To store the tools, do the following: 3. Position the jack (E) and wheel blocks (A) in the
driver’s side trim panel over the wheelhouse.
4. Turn the jack knob (G) clockwise until the jack is
secured tight in the mounting bracket. Be sure to
position the holes in the base of the jack onto
the pin in the mounting bracket.
5. Use the retaining bracket (C) to fasten the tool
bag (B) on the stud and turn the wing nut (D)
clockwise to secure.

A. Wheel Blocks E. Jack

B. Tool Bag with F. Wing Nut Retaining
Jack Tools Wheel Blocks
C. Retaining Bracket G. Jack Knob
D. Wing Nut Retaining
Tool Bag
1. Return the tools (wheel wrench, jack handle, and
jack handle extensions) to the tool bag (B).
2. Assemble wheel blocks (A) and jack (E) together 6. Return the storage tray to its original stored
with the wing nut (F). position.

5-105

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Spare Tire After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire. correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road tire
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its inflation repaired or replaced as soon as you can and installed
pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on back onto your vehicle. This way, the spare tire will be
page 5-70 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4-33 for available in case you need it again.
information regarding proper tire inflation and loading Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes, because
your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install they will not fit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel
or store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire and together. If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not
Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-92 and Storing a Flat match your vehicle’s original road tires and wheels in size
or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-102. and type, do not include the spare in the tire rotation.
Notice: If the vehicle has four-wheel drive and the
different size spare tire is installed on the vehicle,
do not drive in four-wheel drive until you can
Appearance Care
have your flat tire repaired and/or replaced. You
could damage the vehicle, and the repair costs Interior Cleaning
would not be covered by your warranty. Never use
four-wheel drive when the different size spare The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
tire is installed on the vehicle. cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than the carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
road tires originally installed on your vehicle. This spare vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the
tire was developed for use on your vehicle, so it is all right upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery from
to drive on it. If your vehicle has four-wheel drive and the becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be
different size spare tire is installed, keep the vehicle in removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior
two-wheel drive. may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains
to set rapidly.

5-106

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s upholstery
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments and clean the vehicle’s glass can be obtained from your
that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer dealer/retailer.
color to the vehicle’s interior. Do not clean the vehicle using:
When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners • A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
from any interior surface.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass • A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray interior surfaces.
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, • Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch the glass of soil removal.
and/or cause damage to the rear window defogger. • Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
When cleaning the glass on the vehicle, use only a degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
soft cloth and glass cleaner. attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Use
concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions • Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s • Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
doors and windows. can damage the vehicle’s interior.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.

5-107

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Fabric/Carpet If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a small
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally cleaned
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used area gives any impression that a ring formation may
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil, result, clean the entire surface.
always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda. After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
possible using one of the following techniques: fabric or carpet.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel Leather
until no more can be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove
then vacuum. dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a soft
cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used.
To clean: Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot lifters
club soda. or spot removers on leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture. protect leather may permanently change the appearance
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub and feel of the leather and are not recommended. Do not
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled. organic solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior because
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a
cleaning cloth remains clean. non-uniform manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild

soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.

5-108

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Care of Safety Belts
Plastic Surfaces Keep belts clean and dry.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a clean
soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be { CAUTION:
used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters
or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
the appearance and feel of the interior and are not
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform Weatherstrips
manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
difficult to see through the windshield under certain damp weather frequent application may be required. See
conditions. Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.

5-109

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Washing Your Vehicle High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
it clean by washing it often. Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it
on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
not be covered by the warranty. washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car page 5-110.
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the Finish Care
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’ hand may be necessary to remove residue from
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any obtained from your dealer/retailer.
vehicle care product.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain. non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton finish.
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.

5-110

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
paint finish on the vehicle. bright metal parts.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted Blades
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If Clean the outside of the windshield and backglass with
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked glass cleaner.
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when you
period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking clean the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a buildup of
new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper
possible. streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts damaged.

Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep Wipers can be damaged by:
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually • Extreme dusty conditions
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
• Sand and salt
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal

5-111

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because they could damage the surface. Do not
and Trim use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome-plated Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
wheels. could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
polish on chrome wheels only.
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
be applied. avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic
on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium, car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
calcium or sodium chloride. These chlorides are brushes, could damage the aluminum or
used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust. chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be
Always wash the vehicle’s chrome with soap and covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive
water after exposure. a vehicle that has aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels through an automatic car wash that uses
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes.
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs Tires
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels. Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps, wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, on the vehicle.

5-112

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sheet Metal Damage Underbody Maintenance
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
replaced to restore corrosion protection. underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and
exhaust system even though they have corrosion
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle protection.
warranty. At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the
Finish Damage frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system can
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode do this.
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up Chemical Paint Spotting
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop. chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.

5-113

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Vehicle Identification Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) very helpful if parts need to be ordered. The label has
the following information:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for the vehicle. It appears on a
plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on Electrical System
the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield
from outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on
the Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels and the Add-On Electrical Equipment
certificates of title and registration.
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle
Engine Identification unless you check with your dealer/retailer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and the
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This damage would not be covered by the vehicle’s
code helps identify the vehicle’s engine, specifications, warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications” keep other components from working as they should.
under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-122 for
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle’s engine code.
the vehicle is not operating.

5-114

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to Fuses and Circuit Breakers
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-96. If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
Windshield Wiper Fuses The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed. band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
Power Windows and Other Power
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
Options a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other that you can get along without – like the radio or
power accessories. If the current load is too heavy, cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct
the circuit breaker opens and then closes after a cool amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
down period, protecting the circuit until the problem
is fixed or goes away.

5-115

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel fuse
block access door is
located on the driver side
edge of the instrument
panel.

Pull off the cover to access the fuse block.

The vehicle may not use all of the fuses shown.

Fuses Usage
1 Rear Seats
2 Rear Accessory Power Outlet
3 Steering Wheel Controls Backlight

5-116

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
4 Driver Door Module 22 Driver Information Center (DIC)
5 Dome Lamps, Driver Side Turn 23 Rear Wiper
Signal 24 Cooled Seats
6 Driver Side Turn Signal, Stoplamp Driver Seat Module, Remote
7 Instrument Panel Back Lighting 25 Keyless Entry System
8 Passenger Side Turn Signal, 26 Driver Power Door Lock (Unlock
Stoplamp Feature)
Passenger Door Module, Driver
9
Unlock Circuit Breaker Usage
10 Power Door Lock 2 (Unlock Feature) Driver Side Power Window Circuit
11 Power Door Lock 2 (Lock Feature) LT DR
Breaker
Stoplamps, Center-High Mounted
12 Stoplamp
Harness Usage
13 Rear Climate Controls Connector
14 Power Mirror LT DR Driver Door Harness Connection
15 Body Control Module (BCM) BODY Harness Connector
16 Accessory Power Outlets BODY Harness Connector
17 Interior Lamps
18 Power Door Lock 1 (Unlock Feature)
19 Rear Seat Entertainment
20 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist,
Power Liftgate
21 Power Door Lock 1 (Lock Feature)

5-117

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block Harness
Usage
Connector
The center instrument panel fuse block is located HEADLINER 3 Headliner Harness Connector 3
underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering column. HEADLINER 2 Headliner Harness Connector 2
HEADLINER 1 Headliner Harness Connector 1
Top View
SEO/UPFITTER Special Equipment Option Upfitter
Harness Connector

Circuit Breaker Usage

Passenger Side Power Window
CB1
Circuit Breaker
CB2 Passenger Seat Circuit Breaker
CB3 Driver Seat Circuit Breaker
CB4 Rear Sliding Window

Harness
Usage
Connector
BODY 2 Body Harness Connector 2
BODY 1 Body Harness Connector 1
BODY 3 Body Harness Connector 3

5-118

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Underhood Fuse Block

The underhood fuse block is located in the engine

compartment, on the driver side of the vehicle. Lift the
cover for access to the fuse/relay block. Fuses Usage
1 Right Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Electronic Stability Suspension
Hybrid manual for more information. 2 Control, Automatic Level Control
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components Exhaust
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the 3 Left Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
covers on any electrical component. 4 Engine Controls
To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your Engine Control Module, Throttle
5 Control
thumb and index finger and pull straight out.

5-119

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
6 Trailer Brake Controller 26 Driver Side Park Lamps
7 Front Washer 27 Passenger Side Park Lamps
8 Oxygen Sensors 28 Fog Lamps
9 Antilock Brakes System 2 29 Horn
10 Trailer Back-up Lamps 30 Passenger Side High-Beam
11 Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp Headlamp
12 Engine Control Module (Battery) 31 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils 32 Driver Side High-Beam Headlamp
13 (Right Side) 33 Daytime Running Lamps 2
Transmission Control Module 34 Sunroof
14 (Battery)
35 Key Ignition System, Theft Deterrent
15 Vehicle Back-up Lamps System
Passenger Side Low-Beam 36 Windshield Wiper
16
Headlamp 37 SEO B2 Upfitter Usage (Battery)
17 Air Conditioning Compressor 38 Electric Adjustable Pedals
18 Oxygen Sensors 39 Climate Controls (Battery)
19 Transmission Controls (Ignition) 40 Airbag System (Ignition)
20 Fuel Pump 41 Amplifier
21 Fuel System Control Module 42 Audio System
22 Headlamp Washer Miscellaneous (Ignition), Cruise
43
23 Rear Windshield Washer Control
24 Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils 44 Liftgate Release
(Left Side) 45 Airbag System (Battery)
25 Trailer Park Lamps 46 Instrument Panel Cluster

5-120

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Fuses Usage J-Case Fuses Usage
47 Not Used 65 Electric Running Boards
48 Auxiliary Climate Control (Ignition) 66 Heated Windshield Washer System
49 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp 67 Transfer Case
(CHMSL) Stud 1 (Trailer Connector Battery
50 Rear Defogger 68 Power)
51 Heated Mirrors 69 Mid-Bussed Electrical Center 1
52 SEO B1 Upfitter Usage (Battery) 70 Climate Control Blower
Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary Power 71 Power Liftgate Module
53 Outlet 72 Left Bussed Electrical Center 2
Automatic Level Control Compressor
54 Relay
Relays Usage
55 Climate Controls (Ignition)
FAN HI Cooling Fan High Speed
Engine Control Module, Secondary
56 FAN LO Cooling Fan Low Speed
Fuel Pump (Ignition)
FAN CNTRL Cooling Fan Control
J-Case Fuses Usage HDLP LO/HID Low-Beam Headlamp
57 Cooling Fan 1 FOG LAMP Front Fog Lamps
58 Automatic Level Control Compressor A/C CMPRSR Air Conditioning Compressor
59 Heavy Duty Antilock Braking System STRTR Starter
60 Cooling Fan 2 PWR/TRN Powertrain
61 Antilock Brake System 1 FUEL PMP Fuel Pump
62 Starter PRK LAMP Parking Lamps
63 Stud 2 (Trailer Brakes) REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger
64 Left Bussed Electrical Center 1 RUN/CRANK Switched Power

5-121

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Capacities and Specifications
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information.
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-13 for more information.

Capacities
Application
English Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Cooling System
4.8L V8 17.8 qt 16.9 L
5.3L V8 18.3 qt 17.3 L
6.0L V8 1500 Series 17.9 qt 16.9 L
6.0L V8 2500 Series 17.4 qt 16.5 L
6.2L V8 17.6 qt 16.7 L
Engine Oil with Filter 6.0 qt† 5.7 L†

5-122

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Capacities
Application
English Metric
Fuel Tank
Regular 26.0 gal 98.4 L
Extended 1500 Series 31.5 gal 119.2 L
Extended 2500 Series 39.0 gal 147.6 L
Transmission Fluid
4L60-E Electronic Transmission 5.0 qt 4.7 L
6L80-E Transmission 6.0 qt 5.7 L
6L90-E Transmission 6.3 qt 6.0 L
Transfer Case Fluid 1.6 qt 1.5 L
Wheel Nut Torque 140 lb ft 190 Y
†Oil filter should be changed at every oil change.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

5-123

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
4.8L V8 C Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)
5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel with
Active Fuel Management™ 0 Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)
(Iron Block)
5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel with
Active Fuel Management™ 3 Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)
(Aluminum Block)
5.3L V8 with Active Fuel
J Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)
Management™ (Iron Block)
6.0L V8 (Iron Block) K Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)
6.0L V8 with Active
Fuel Management™ Y Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)
(Aluminum Block)
6.2L V8 Flexible Fuel
2 Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)
(Aluminum Block)

5-124

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Section 6 Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2 Owner Checks and Services ..........................6-10
Introduction ...................................................6-2 At Each Fuel Fill ..........................................6-10
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2 At Least Once a Month .................................6-10
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2 At Least Once a Year ...................................6-11
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-3 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-13
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4 Maintenance Replacement Parts .....................6-15
Additional Required Services ............................6-6 Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-16
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-8 Maintenance Record .....................................6-17

6-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
Introduction replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and to keep this vehicle in good working condition.
change as recommended. Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.

Your Vehicle and the Environment

Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
the vehicle in good working condition, but also helps
the environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or
supplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warranty the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer from the vehicle. To help protect the environment, and to
for details. keep the vehicle in good condition, be sure to maintain
the vehicle properly.

6-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Using the Maintenance Schedule The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
We want to help keep this vehicle in good working Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive Footnotes on page 6-8 for further information.
it. You might drive very short distances only a few times
a week. Or you might drive long distances all the time in
very hot, dusty weather. You might use the vehicle in
making deliveries. Or you might drive it to work, to do
{ CAUTION:
errands, or in many other ways.
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
Because of all the different ways people use their dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
more frequent checks and replacements. So please
read the following and note how you drive. If you have only if you have the required know-how and the
any questions on how to keep the vehicle in good proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have
condition, see your dealer/retailer. any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing
This schedule is for vehicles that:
Your Own Service Work on page 5-4.
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-33. Some maintenance services can be complex.
So, unless you are technically qualified and have
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal the necessary equipment, have your dealer/retailer
driving limits. do these jobs.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner. When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trained
See Off-Road Driving on page 4-13. and supported service technicians will perform the
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane work using genuine parts.
on page 5-5. To purchase service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-15.

6-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Owner Checks and Services on page 6-10 tells what If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
should be checked, when to check it, and what can easily service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
be done to help keep the vehicle in good condition. since the last service. Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
Life System on page 5-18 for information on the Engine
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Oil Life System and resetting the system.
on page 6-13 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-15. When the vehicle is serviced, make sure When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all appears, certain services, checks, and inspections
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else are required. Required services are described in the
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”
parts from your dealer/retailer. Generally, it is recommended that the first service be
Maintenance I, the second service be Maintenance II,
and then alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
Scheduled Maintenance thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message may be required more often.
displays, service is required for the vehicle. Have the Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next ENGINE OIL SOON message displays within 10 months
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
the best conditions, the engine oil life system may not performed.
indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year.
However, the engine oil and filter must be changed at Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the
least once a year and at this time the system must be previous service performed was Maintenance I.
reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service technicians Always use Maintenance II whenever the message
who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset displays 10 months or more since the last service or
the system. if the message has not come on at all for one year.

6-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Scheduled Maintenance
Service Maintenance I Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-15. Reset oil life
• •
system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18. An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #. • •
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •
Inspect engine air cleaner filter or change indicator (if equipped). If necessary,
•
replace filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20. See footnote (l).
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 5-76 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month • •
on page 6-10.
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
• •
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
• •
this section.
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. •

6-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000 125,000 150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(40 000) (80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • •
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
• • • • • •
damaged components.
Vehicles without a filter restriction
indicator: Replace engine air cleaner
• • •
filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
on page 5-20.
Change automatic transmission fluid and
• • •
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid and
•
filter (normal service).
Four-wheel drive: Change transfer case
fluid (severe service). See footnotes (g) • • •
and (n).

6-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000 125,000 150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(40 000) (80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Four-wheel drive: Change transfer case
•
fluid (normal service). See footnote (g).
Inspect evaporative control system.
An Emission Control Service. • • •
See footnotes † and (k).
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control •
Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
•
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. •
See footnote (m).

6-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Maintenance Footnotes (c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
California Air Resources Board has determined that the needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, recommended at least once a year.
urge that all recommended maintenance services be (d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, if
be recorded. contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or
# Lubricate the front suspension, steering linkage, and damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on
parking brake cable guides. Control arm ball joints on page 5-59 and Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
2500 series vehicles require lubrication but should not Blades on page 5-111 for more information.
be lubricated unless their temperature is 10°F (−12°C) (e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
or higher, or they could be damaged. Control arm ball belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any other
joints on 1500 series vehicles are maintenance-free. loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint Systems
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers, on page 1-98.
parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts,
signs of wear, or lack of lubrication. Inspect power
steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually check constant
velocity joints, rubber boots, and axle seals for leaks.

6-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 (f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assembly, − When doing frequent trailer towing.
secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, − Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
rear compartment hinges, outer liftgate handle pivot service.
points, rear door detent link, roller mechanism, liftgate
handle pivot points, latch bolt, fuel door hinge, cargo (i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
door hinge, locks, and folding seat hardware. More can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to perform this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-29
a corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. test the cooling system and pressure cap.
(g) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and (j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
proper installation. Check to be sure vent hose is problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
unobstructed, clear, and free of debris. During any the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
maintenance, if a power washer is used to clean mud (k) Inspect system. Check all fuel and vapor lines
and dirt from the underbody, care should be taken to and hoses for proper hook-up, routing, and condition.
not directly spray the transfer case output seals. High Check that the purge valve works properly, if equipped.
pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate Replace as needed.
the transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease
the life of the transfer case and should be replaced. (l) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspect the
filter at each engine oil change.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these (m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
conditions: obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature (n) Severe Service: Change transfer case fluid if the
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. vehicle is mainly used for trailer towing or driven in city
traffic, wet environment, or high ambient temperatures.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.

6-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Owner Checks and Services Engine Coolant Level Check
These owner checks and services should be performed Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety, coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
dependability, and emission control performance. Your on page 5-29.
dealer/retailer can assist with these checks and services.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the proper
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13. fluid if necessary.

At Each Fuel Fill At Least Once a Month

It is important to perform these underhood checks at Tire Inflation Check
each fuel fill.
Inspect the vehicle’s tires and make sure they are
Engine Oil Level Check inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
the spare tire, if the vehicle has one. See Inflation - Tire
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil Pressure on page 5-70. If the vehicle has a spare tire,
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to check to make sure it is stored securely. See Changing
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause a Flat Tire on page 5-86.
damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle
warranty. Tire Wear Inspection
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-15. drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-76.

6-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 At Least Once a Year Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
Starter Switch Check

{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured.
others could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough

1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
room around the vehicle. level surface.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-45. on page 2-45.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
turn off the engine immediately if it starts. the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle 3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the but do not start the engine. Without applying the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
your dealer/retailer for service. of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.

6-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Ignition Transmission Lock Check Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn set the parking brake.
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only the engine running and transmission in N (Neutral),
when the shift lever is in P (Park). slowly remove foot pressure from the regular
• The ignition key should come out only in brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by
LOCK/OFF. the parking brake only.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required. • To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to P (Park).
Parking Brake and Automatic Then release the parking brake followed by
the regular brake.
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Check
Hood and Liftgate Support Gas Strut
Service
{ CAUTION:
Visually inspect gas strut for signs of wear, corrosion,
cracks, loss of lubricant, or other damage. Check the
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could hold open ability of gas strut. If necessary, replace with
begin to move. You or others could be injured and genuine parts from your dealer/retailer.
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll. Underbody Flushing Service
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
the vehicle begin to move. corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.

6-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Recommended Fluids and Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Lubricants Power Steering GM Power Steering Fluid
System (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part in Canada 89021186).
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer. Automatic DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock
Cylinders (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Engine oil which meets GM in Canada 10953474).
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute Chassis Lubricant
Engine Oil Certified for Gasoline Engines (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
starburst symbol. To determine the Chassis Canada 88901242) or lubricant
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s Lubrication
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
engine, see Engine Oil on page 5-15. Category LB or GC-LB.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable Front Axle
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant Coolant. (1500 Series SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant
See Engine Coolant on Vehicles with (GM Part No. U.S. 89021671,
page 5-29. Four-Wheel in Canada 89021672).
Drive)
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
Hydraulic Brake
System (GM Part No. U.S. 12377967, Front Axle SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
in Canada 89021320). (2500 Series Axle Lubricant
Vehicles with (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, in
Windshield Optikleen® Washer Solvent. Four-Wheel Canada 89021678) meeting GM
Washer Drive) Specification 9986115.

6-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Usage Fluid/Lubricant Usage Fluid/Lubricant
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Axle Lubricant Hood Hinges (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Rear Axle (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, in Canada 10953474).
in Canada 89021678) meeting
GM Specification 9986115. Outer Tailgate Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Handle Pivot (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Transfer Case Points in Canada 10953474).
(Four-Wheel DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Weatherstrip Lubricant
Drive)
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Front Axle Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Propshaft Conditioning Dielectric Silicone Grease
Spline or Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
One-Piece (GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, in in Canada 992887).
Propshaft Canada 10953511) or lubricant
Spline meeting requirements of Synthetic Grease with
(Two-Wheel GM 9985830. Weatherstrip Teflon, Superlube
Drive with Auto. Squeaks (GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,
Trans.) in Canada 10953437).

6-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.

Maintenance Replacement Parts

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Standard Filter 15908916* A3086C*
High Capacity Filter 15908915 A3085C
Oil Filter 89017524 PF48
Spark Plugs 12609877 41-985
Wiper Blades
Front – 21.6 in (55.0 cm) 25877402 —
Rear – 11.8 in (30.0 cm) 25820122 —
*15908915 (A3085C) high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted.

6-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Engine Drive Belt Routing

If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode

Hybrid manual for more information.

6-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and
the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-10 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II

6-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II

6-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II

6-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II

6-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Section 7 Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2 Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-14
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2 Reporting Safety Defects to the
Online Owner Center ......................................7-5 United States Government ..........................7-14
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Reporting Safety Defects to the
(TTY) Users ...............................................7-6 Canadian Government ................................7-15
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-6 Reporting Safety Defects to
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-7 General Motors .........................................7-15
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-7 Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-15
Scheduling Service Appointments ....................7-10 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................7-16
Courtesy Transportation Program ....................7-10 Event Data Recorders ...................................7-17
Collision Damage Repair ................................7-11 OnStar® ......................................................7-18
Navigation System ........................................7-18
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ..............7-18

7-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Customer Assistance and STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
Information resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, call General Motors of
Customer Satisfaction Procedure Canada Customer Communication Centre at
1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to
with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following
will be resolved by the dealer’s sales or service information available to give the Customer Assistance
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best Representative:
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken: top left of the instrument panel and visible through
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of the windshield.
dealership management. Normally, concerns can • Dealership name and location.
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts • Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the When contacting Chevrolet, remember that your concern
general manager. will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That is why we
suggest following Step One first.

7-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if address:
you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the BBB Auto Line Program
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line 4200 Wilson Boulevard
Program to enforce your rights. Suite 800
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program Arlington, VA 22203-1838
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or dr.bbb.org/goauto
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. This program is available in all 50 states and the District
Although you may be required to resort to this informal of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage,
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action, and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to
use of the program is free of charge and your case will change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree participation in this program.
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.

7-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event For further information concerning eligibility in the
that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2, toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
Program. General Motors of Canada Limited has The Mediation/Arbitration Program
committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes c/o Customer Communication Centre
involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The General Motors of Canada Limited
program provides for the review of the facts involved by Mail Code: CA1-163-005
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
designed so that the entire dispute settlement process,
from the time you file your complaint to the final decision, Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
should be completed in about 70 days. We believe our Identification Number (VIN).
impartial program offers advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of
charge.

7-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Online Owner Center My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
Online Owner Center (U.S.) — www.gm.ca where you can save information on
www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place. Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
• Digital owner manual, warranty information,
and more • My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• Online service and maintenance records
• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address
• Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide and phone number for each of your preferred GM
• Exclusive privileges and offers dealers/retailers.
• Recall notices for your specific vehicle • My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and
service estimates, check trade-in values, or
• OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings schedule a service appointment by adding the
summaries vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
Other Helpful Links: • My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com and forms with greater ease.

Chevrolet Merchandise — www.chevymall.com To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/helpcenter
• FAQ
• Contact Us

7-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Customer Assistance for Text From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
Telephone (TTY) Users 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, From U.S. Virgin Islands:
or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones 1-800-496-9994
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Canada — Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user in
the U.S. can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing: General Motors of Canada Limited
1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in Canada can dial Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1-800-263-3830.) 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Customer Assistance Offices gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free 1-800-263-7854 (French)
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes 1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
addressed to: Overseas — Customer Assistance
United States — Customer Assistance Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)

7-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Mexico, Central America and The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
Caribbean Islands/Countries details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Islands) — Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V. General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Customer Assistance Center
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000 Roadside Assistance Program
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1-800-CHEV-USA
GM Mobility Reimbursement (1-800-243-8872); (Text telephone (TTY):
1-888-889-2438).
Program For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
This program, available to qualified applicants, can • Telephone number of your location
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible • Location of the vehicle
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.

7-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Model, year, color, and license plate number of the Services Provided
vehicle
• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the
• Description of the problem vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar®. For security
Coverage reasons, the driver must present identification
Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles before this service is given.
(160 000 km), whichever comes first. • Emergency Tow From a Public Road or
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. In Highway: Tow to the nearest Chevrolet dealer for
Canada, a person driving the vehicle without permission warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash
from the owner is not covered. and cannot be driven. Assistance is also given when
the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of • Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at equipped, must be in good condition and properly
any time without notification. inflated. It is the owner’s responsibility for the repair
or replacement of the tire if it is not covered by
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited the warranty.
reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner
or driver if they decide the claims are made too often, • Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
or the same type of claim is made many times. start a dead battery.

7-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Services Not Included in Roadside • Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must
Assistance be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was
started to qualify. General Motors of Canada Limited
• Impound towing caused by violation of any laws. requires pre-authorization, original detailed receipts,
and a copy of the repair orders. Once authorization
• Legal fines. has been received, the Roadside Assistance advisor
• Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires, will help you make arrangements and explain how to
chains, or other traction devices. receive payment.
• Towing or services for vehicles driven on a • Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
non-public road or highway. provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
Services Specific to Canadian emergency road service. You will receive payment,
Purchased Vehicles up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately covered, however any cost for parts and labor for
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted. repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner
Propane and other fuels are not provided through responsibility.
this service.
• Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
• Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either with the
most direct route or the most scenic route. There is a
limit of six requests per year. Additional travel
information is also available. Allow three weeks for
delivery.

7-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Scheduling Service Appointments Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact repairs are required.
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment. Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
service consultant of your transportation needs, your and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience. each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service information.
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is Transportation Options
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer, Warranty service can generally be completed while you
let them know this, and ask for instructions. wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
day as possible to allow for the same day repair. your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Courtesy Transportation Program
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
To enhance your ownership experience, we and Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you with
our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy shuttle service to get you to your destination with
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
period in Canada) and extended powertrain, and time and distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
hybrid specific warranty in both the U.S. and Canada.

7-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Public Transportation or Fuel charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
Reimbursement usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by courtesy rental.
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum Additional Program Information
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by Transportation arrangements will be administered
original receipts. See your dealer for information by appropriate dealer personnel.
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
fuel or other transportation costs.
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
Courtesy Rental Vehicle any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy herein at its sole discretion.
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight
warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited Collision Damage Repair
and must be supported by original receipts. This If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle the proper equipment and quality replacement parts.
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your vehicle’s
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, resale value, and safety performance can be
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage compromised in subsequent collisions.

7-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Collision Parts Repair Facility
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with We recommend that you choose a collision repair
the same materials and construction methods as facility that meets your needs before you ever need
the parts with which your vehicle was originally built. collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
to ensure that your vehicle’s designed appearance, state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
durability, and safety are preserved. The use of Genuine a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle and comparable equipment.
Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for Insuring Your Vehicle
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections are significant differences in the quality of coverage
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your insurance policies provide reduced protection to your GM
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by
performance, however, the history of these parts is not using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts.
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures When purchasing insurance, we recommend that you
are not covered by that warranty. assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is
made by companies other than GM and may not have not available from your current insurance carrier,
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may consider switching to another insurance carrier.
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions. require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
to such parts are not covered by that warranty. your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end of
your lease for poor quality repairs.
7-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If a Crash Occurs • Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash. number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
• Check to make sure that you are all right. If you are plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
uninjured, make sure that no one else in your Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured. policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all • If possible, call your insurance company from the
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
only if its position puts you in danger or you are information they will need. If they ask for a police
instructed to move it by a police officer. report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
• Give only the necessary and requested information the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
to police and other parties involved in the crash. Do with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
not discuss your personal condition, mental frame of necessary. This is especially true if there are no
mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
help guard against post-crash legal action.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
page 7-7 for more information. make sure you are comfortable with them.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the their work for a long time.
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name, • Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
the service’s name, and the phone number. make sure you understand what work will be
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
information and registration if you keep these items this opportunity.
in your vehicle.

7-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Reporting Safety Defects
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs, Reporting Safety Defects to the
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
United States Government
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
Specify to the facility that any required replacement could cause a crash or could cause injury or death,
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new you should immediately inform the National
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts. Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your addition to notifying General Motors.
GM vehicle warranty.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
insurance company may initially value the repair recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair cannot become involved in individual problems
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember between you, your dealer/retailer, or General
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the Motors.
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to safercar.gov; or
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair write to:
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with Administrator, NHTSA
that company. In such cases, you can have control of 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within Washington D.C., 20590
reasonable limits. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from safercar.gov.

7-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Reporting Safety Defects to the Service Publications Ordering
Canadian Government Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada Service Manuals
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
write to: brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch Service Bulletins
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9 Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service General
Reporting Safety Defects to Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
General Motors your vehicle.
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in Owner Information
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write: Owner publications are written specifically for owners
Chevrolet Motor Division and intended to provide basic operational information
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
P.O. Box 33170 Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Detroit, MI 48232-5170 In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or Warranty Booklet.
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write: RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005 Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
1908 Colonel Sam Drive RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

7-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Current and Past Model Order Forms Vehicle Data Recording and
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available Privacy
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
the vehicle. computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123 your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM control engine and transmission performance, to monitor
Eastern Time the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy
airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide
For Credit Card Orders Only antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle.
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. These modules may store data to help your
on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some
Or you can write to: modules may also store data about how you operate the
vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average
Helm, Incorporated
speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207 personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat
positions, and temperature settings.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.

7-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Event Data Recorders Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle crash investigation.
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
designed to record such data as: needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts to the vehicle or the EDR.
were buckled/fastened
GM will not access this data or share it with others
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
accelerator and/or brake pedal vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
• How fast the vehicle was traveling response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
This data can help provide a better understanding of the through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.

7-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OnStar® Radio Frequency
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the Identification (RFID)
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
use. See also OnStar® System on page 2-68 in this such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
manual for more information. security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
Navigation System openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the GM system containing personal information.
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.

7-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A Airbags
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-38
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3 Readiness Light .......................................... 3-37
Accessory Power ............................................ 2-28 System Check ............................................. 1-81
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-20 Antenna
Active Fuel Management™ ............................... 2-31 Rear Side Window ..................................... 3-140
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment ......... 4-39 Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
Additional Required Services, Scheduled System ..................................................... 3-140
Maintenance ................................................. 6-6 Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 4-5
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6 Warning Light ............................................. 3-41
Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-114 Appearance Care
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .................. 2-30 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ............. 5-112
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-20 Care of Safety Belts ................................... 5-109
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-22 Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 5-113
Airbag Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................. 5-110
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Fabric/Carpet ............................................ 5-108
Vehicle ................................................... 1-96 Finish Care ............................................... 5-110
Airbag System Finish Damage .......................................... 5-113
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-88 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-90 Surfaces ............................................... 5-109
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-96 Interior Cleaning ........................................ 5-106
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-87 Leather .................................................... 5-108
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-88 Sheet Metal Damage .................................. 5-113
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-86 Tires ........................................................ 5-112
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-83 Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-113

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Appearance Care (cont.)
Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 5-110 B
Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-109 Battery .......................................................... 5-43
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ...... 5-111 Electric Power Management .......................... 3-19
Ashtray ......................................................... 3-21 Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-20
Assistance Program, Roadside ........................... 7-7 Belt Routing, Engine ....................................... 6-16
Audio System ................................................. 3-83 Bench Seat, Split (60/40) ................................. 1-14
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-138 Bluetooth® .................................................... 3-115
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation Brake
Manual ................................................. 3-115 Emergencies ................................................ 4-6
Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-84 Pedal and Adjustable Throttle ........................ 2-30
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-140 Brakes .......................................................... 5-40
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-86 Antilock ....................................................... 4-5
Audio Systems Parking ...................................................... 2-45
Radio Reception ........................................ 3-139 System Warning Light .................................. 3-40
Rear Seat (RSA) ....................................... 3-136 Braking ........................................................... 4-4
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-138 Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-6
Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-16 Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-26
Automatic Transmission Bucket Seats, Rear ......................................... 1-20
Fluid .................................................. 5-22, 5-25 Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-58
Operation ................................................... 2-32 Fog Lamps ................................................. 3-17
Autoride® ....................................................... 4-50 Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-56
Auxiliary Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-53
Roof Mounted Lamp .................................... 3-18 Headlamps ................................................. 5-56
Axle, Rear ..................................................... 5-49 License Plate Lamps .................................... 5-58
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ........................................ 5-57
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-78

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 C Child Restraints (cont.)
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Calibration ..................................................... 3-61 Seat Position ........................................... 1-73
California Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Perchlorate Materials Requirements ................. 5-4 Front Seat Position ................................... 1-77
Warning ....................................................... 5-4 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6 Front Seat Position ................................... 1-77
Camera, Rear Vision ....................................... 2-62 Systems ..................................................... 1-61
Canadian Owners ............................................... iii Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-63
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-122 Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-21
Carbon Monoxide ................................... 2-13, 2-15 Circuit Breakers ............................................ 5-115
Engine Exhaust ........................................... 2-50 Cleaning
Winter Driving ............................................. 4-29 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ............. 5-112
Care of Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................ 5-110
Safety Belts .............................................. 5-109 Fabric/Carpet ............................................ 5-108
Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-80 Finish Care ............................................... 5-110
CD, MP3 ............................................ 3-105, 3-109 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Center Console Storage ................................... 2-79 Surfaces ............................................... 5-109
Center Seat ................................................... 1-13 Interior ..................................................... 5-106
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-84 Leather .................................................... 5-108
Charging System Light .................................... 3-39 Tires ........................................................ 5-112
Check Engine Lamp ........................................ 3-43 Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-113
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-12 Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 5-110
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5-113 Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-109
Child Restraints Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ...... 5-111
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-57
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 1-65
Older Children ............................................. 1-54

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Climate Control System ................................... 3-22
Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-24 D
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-30 Damage Repair, Collision ................................. 7-11
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System ...... 3-31 Data Recorders
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System, Event ......................................................... 7-17
Electronic ................................................ 3-32 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ......................... 3-16
Clock, Setting ................................................. 3-84 Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-11 Delayed Locking ............................................. 2-11
Compass ....................................................... 3-61 DIC Compass ................................................. 3-61
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-22 Disc, MP3 .......................................... 3-105, 3-109
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-3 Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Coolant Dome Lamp Override ...................................... 3-19
Engine ....................................................... 5-29 Dome Lamps ................................................. 3-18
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-42 Door
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-34 Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-11
Cooled Seats ................................................... 1-8 Locks ........................................................ 2-10
Cooling System .............................................. 5-28 Power Locks ............................................... 2-10
Courtesy Transportation Program ...................... 7-10 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-11
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-12 Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-11
Light .......................................................... 3-49 Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-51
Cupholders .................................................... 2-78 DIC Operation and Displays .................. 3-52, 3-58
Customer Assistance ......................................... 7-6 DIC Vehicle Customization ............................ 3-74
Offices ......................................................... 7-6 DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-64
Text Telephone (TTY) Users ........................... 7-6 Driving
Customer Information At Night ..................................................... 4-25
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-15 Before a Long Trip ...................................... 4-27
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ........................ 7-2 Better Fuel Economy ..................................... 4-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Driving (cont.) Electrical System (cont.)
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2 Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 5-115
Drunk .......................................................... 4-3 Electronic Immobilizer
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-27 PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-24
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-28 Electronic Immobilizer Operation
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-26 PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-24
Loss of Control ........................................... 4-11 Engine
Off-Road .................................................... 4-13 Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-20
Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 4-11 Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp ........... 3-43
Recovery Hooks .......................................... 4-32 Compartment Overview ................................ 5-14
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-32 Coolant ...................................................... 5-29
Winter ........................................................ 4-29 Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-30
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-24 Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-42
DVD Cooling System ........................................... 5-28
Rear Seat Entertainment System .................. 3-127 Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-16
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-50
Fan Noise .................................................. 5-37
E Oil ............................................................. 5-15
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 5-37
E85 Fuel ......................................................... 5-7
Overheating ................................................ 5-35
EDR ............................................................. 7-16
Starting ...................................................... 2-28
Electrical Equipment
Engine Oil
Add-On Equipment ..................................... 5-114
Life System ................................................ 5-18
Electrical System
Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-19
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............. 5-118
Event Data Recorders ..................................... 7-17
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-115
Exit Lighting ................................................... 3-19
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-116
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-53
Power Windows and Other Power Options .... 5-115
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-14
Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-119

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 F Fuel (cont.)
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-6
Filter Low Fuel Warning Light ................................ 3-51
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-20 Management, Active ..................................... 2-31
Finish Damage ............................................. 5-113 Fuses
Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-6 Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............. 5-118
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-115
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-85 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-116
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-86 Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-119
Flat Tire, Storing ........................................... 5-102 Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-115
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ........................ 5-22, 5-25
Power Steering ........................................... 5-38
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-39
G
Fog Lamps Gages
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 3-17 Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-42
Light .......................................................... 3-49 Fuel .......................................................... 3-50
Four-Wheel Drive .................................... 2-40, 5-51 Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-46
Front Axle ...................................................... 5-52 Speedometer .............................................. 3-36
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5 Tachometer ................................................. 3-36
Additives ...................................................... 5-6 Trip Odometer ............................................. 3-36
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6 Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 3-39
E85 (85% Ethanol) ........................................ 5-7 Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-71
Economy Driving ........................................... 4-2 Gasoline
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-11 Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Filling the Tank ............................................. 5-9 Specifications ............................................... 5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-8 Glove Box ..................................................... 2-78
Gage ......................................................... 3-50 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-7
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 H I
Halogen Bulbs ................................................ 5-56 Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-26
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6 Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-57
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-2 Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-70
Headlamps Instrument Panel
Aiming ....................................................... 5-53 Brightness .................................................. 3-18
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-56 Cluster ....................................................... 3-35
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ..................... 3-16 Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-14 Introduction ...................................................... 6-2
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
On Reminder .............................................. 3-15
Heated Seats ............................................ 1-7, 1-8
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-44
Heater ........................................................... 3-22
Engine Coolant ........................................... 2-30
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-49
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-27 K
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-28 Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4
Hood Keys ............................................................... 2-3
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-12
Release ..................................................... 5-13
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 L Lights (cont.)
Fog Lamps ................................................. 3-49
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ..................................... 5-62 Highbeam On ............................................. 3-49
Lamps High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp ........................ 3-18 Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-51
Daytime Running (DRL) ................................ 3-16 Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-48
Dome ........................................................ 3-18 On Reminder .............................................. 3-15
Dome Lamp Override ................................... 3-19 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-38
License Plate .............................................. 5-58 Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 3-36
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-43 Security ..................................................... 3-48
Reading ..................................................... 3-19 StabiliTrak® Indicator .................................... 3-42
Lap Belt ........................................................ 1-52 Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-43
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 1-45 Tow/Haul Mode ........................................... 3-49
LATCH System for Child Restraints ................... 1-65 Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-33
Level Control .................................................. 4-49 Locking Rear Axle ............................................ 4-9
Liftgate, Power ............................................... 2-15 Locks
Liftgate/Liftglass .............................................. 2-13 Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-11
Liftglass/Liftgate .............................................. 2-13 Door .......................................................... 2-10
Lighting Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-12
Entry ......................................................... 3-19 Power Door ................................................ 2-10
Exit ........................................................... 3-19 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-11
Lights Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-11
Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-37 Loss of Control ............................................... 4-11
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning ............ 3-41 Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-51
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-40 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ............. 1-65
Charging System ......................................... 3-39 Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-79
Cruise Control ............................................. 3-49 Lumbar
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-14 Manual Controls ............................................ 1-6
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8 Power Controls ............................................. 1-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 M Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview ........................ 2-52
Maintenance Manual Rearview ......................................... 2-52
Footnotes ..................................................... 6-8 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 2-54
Schedule, Additional Required Services ............ 6-6 Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-55
Maintenance Schedule Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-55
At Each Fuel Fill ......................................... 6-10 Outside Manual Mirrors ................................ 2-52
At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-10 Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .................... 2-54
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-11 Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-53
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-17 Outside Towing Mirrors ................................. 2-53
Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 6-15 Park Tilt ..................................................... 2-55
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2 MP3 .................................................. 3-105, 3-109
Owner Checks and Services ......................... 6-10
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-13
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using .......................................................... 6-3
N
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2 Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-18
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................... 3-43 Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-6 Manual ..................................................... 3-115
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-4 New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-26
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals ...................... 1-8
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-64

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 O Outside (cont.)
Power Foldaway Mirrors ............................... 2-54
Object Detection, Side Blind Zone Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-53
Alert (SBZA) ............................................... 2-58 Towing Mirrors ............................................ 2-53
Odometer ...................................................... 3-36 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ..... 5-37
Trip ........................................................... 3-36 Owner Checks and Services ............................. 6-10
Off-Road ....................................................... 4-13 Owners, Canadian .............................................. iii
Driving ....................................................... 4-13
Recovery .................................................... 4-11
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-15
P
Engine Oil Life System ................................. 5-18 Paint, Damage .............................................. 5-113
Pressure Gage ............................................ 3-46 Park
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-48 Shifting Into ................................................ 2-47
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-54 Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-49
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-5 Park Aid ........................................................ 2-56
OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 7-18 Park Tilt Mirrors .............................................. 2-55
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-68 Parking
Operation, Universal Home Remote System ........ 2-72 Assist ........................................................ 2-56
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-30 Brake ........................................................ 2-45
Outlets Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-49
Accessory Power ......................................... 3-20 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-38
Outside Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-90
Automatic Dimming Mirror ............................. 2-54 Passing ......................................................... 4-11
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-55 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............... 2-24
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-55 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Manual Mirrors ............................................ 2-52 Operation ................................................... 2-24
Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California ...... 5-4

10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Phone
Bluetooth® ................................................ 3-115 R
Power Radio Frequency
Door Locks ................................................. 2-10 Identification (RFID) ..................................... 7-18
Electrical System ....................................... 5-115 Radio(s) ........................................................ 3-86
Liftgate ...................................................... 2-15 Radios
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-6 Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-28 Manual ................................................. 3-115
Seat ............................................................ 1-5 Reception ................................................. 3-139
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-38 Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-84
Windows .................................................... 2-20 Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-138
Power Assist Steps ......................................... 2-18 Rainsense™ II Wipers ....................................... 3-9
Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts .......................... 1-52 Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-19
Privacy .......................................................... 7-16 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System ......... 3-31
Navigation System ....................................... 7-18 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and
OnStar ....................................................... 7-18 Electronic Climate Controls ........................... 3-32
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ............. 7-18 Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-49
Program Locking ........................................................ 4-9
Courtesy Transportation ................................ 7-10 Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-11
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-11 Rear Heated Seats ......................................... 1-14
Proposition 65 Warning, California ....................... 5-4 Rear Seat Armrest .......................................... 2-80
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) System ....................... 3-136

11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rear Seat Entertainment System ..................... 3-127 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-28
Rear Side Window Antenna ............................ 3-140 Roadside Assistance Program ............................ 7-7
Rear Storage ................................................. 2-80 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-32
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) .............................. 2-62 Roof
Rear Window Washer/Wiper ............................. 3-11 Sunroof ...................................................... 2-81
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-52 Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................... 2-51
Automatic Dimming ...................................... 2-52
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................ 1-10
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-13
Recovery Hooks ............................................. 4-32
S
Safety Belts
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-43
Care of .................................................... 5-109
Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility ................. 7-7
Extender .................................................... 1-53
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 2-4
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-37
Remote Vehicle Start ........................................ 2-8
Lap Belt ..................................................... 1-52
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-45
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-92
Reminders .................................................. 3-36
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-87
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-32
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-58
Use During Pregnancy ................................. 1-52
Replacement Parts
Safety Defects Reporting
Maintenance ............................................... 6-15
General Motors ........................................... 7-15
Reporting Safety Defects
U.S. Government ......................................... 7-14
General Motors ........................................... 7-15
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iv
U.S. Government ......................................... 7-14
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Restraint System Check
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-98
Scheduling Appointments ................................. 7-10
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash ..................................................... 1-99

12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Seats Service (cont.)
60/40 Split Bench Seat ................................. 1-14 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-96
Bucket Seats, Rear ...................................... 1-20 Setting the Clock ............................................ 3-84
Center Seat ................................................ 1-13 Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 5-113
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-2 Shifting
Heated and Cooled Seats .............................. 1-8 Out of Park ................................................ 2-49
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-7 Shifting Into Park ............................................ 2-47
Heated Seats - Rear .................................... 1-14 Side Blind Zone Alert ...................................... 2-58
Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-6 Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-7
Memory, Mirrors and Pedals ........................... 1-8 Snow Plow .................................................... 4-39
Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-6 Spare Tire .................................................... 5-106
Power Seats ................................................. 1-5 Installing .................................................... 5-92
Reclining Seatbacks ..................................... 1-10 Removing ................................................... 5-87
Third Row Seat ........................................... 1-27 Storing ..................................................... 5-102
Secondary Latch System ................................. 5-99 Specifications and Capacities .......................... 5-122
Securing a Child Restraint Speedometer .................................................. 3-36
Center Front Seat Position ............................ 1-77 Split Bench Seat (60/40) .................................. 1-14
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-73 StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ............................... 3-42
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-77 StabiliTrak® System .......................................... 4-6
Security Start Vehicle, Remote ....................................... 2-8
Light .......................................................... 3-48 Starting the Engine ......................................... 2-28
Service ........................................................... 5-3 Steering .......................................................... 4-9
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3 Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-138
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6
Vehicle ..................................................... 5-5 Steps
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4 Power Assist ............................................... 2-18
Engine Soon Lamp ...................................... 3-43 Storage Areas
Parts Identification Label ............................. 5-114 Center Console ........................................... 2-79
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-15 Cupholders ................................................. 2-78
Scheduling Appointments .............................. 7-10 Glove Box .................................................. 2-78

13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Storage Areas (cont.) Tires ............................................................. 5-61
Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-79 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Rear .......................................................... 2-80 Cleaning ............................................... 5-112
Rear Seat Armrest ....................................... 2-80 Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-78
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-31 Chains ....................................................... 5-84
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-21 Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-86
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-81 Cleaning ................................................... 5-112
Different Size .............................................. 5-80
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-85
T Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-70
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-76
Tachometer .................................................... 3-36
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-92
Taillamps
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-43
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps .... 5-57
Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-73
Text Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-6
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-71
Theft-Deterrent Feature .................................. 3-138
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-92
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-22
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-87
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-22
Secondary Latch System .............................. 5-99
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............ 2-24
Sidewall Labeling ......................................... 5-62
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Spare Tire ................................................ 5-106
Operation ................................................ 2-24
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools .......... 5-102
Third Row Seat .............................................. 1-27
Terminology and Definitions ........................... 5-67
Throttle, Adjustable .......................................... 2-30
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-81
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6
Time, Setting .................................................. 3-84

14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tires (cont.)
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-82 U
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-82 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............... 2-56
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-77 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-81
Tow/Haul Mode ............................................... 2-38 Universal Home Remote System ....................... 2-71
Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................... 3-49 Operation ................................................... 2-72
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-43
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-50
Trailer Recommendations .............................. 4-72
V
Vehicle
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-43 Control ........................................................ 4-3
Traction Loading ...................................................... 4-33
StabiliTrak® System ....................................... 4-6 Remote Start ................................................ 2-8
Trailer Running While Parked .................................. 2-51
Towing Recommendations ............................. 4-72 Symbols ......................................................... iv
Transmission Vehicle Customization, DIC .............................. 3-74
Fluid, Automatic .................................. 5-22, 5-25 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-16
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-32 Vehicle Identification
Transportation Program, Courtesy ...................... 7-10 Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-114
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-36 Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-114
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-7 Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-30
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7 Visors ........................................................... 2-21
Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-39

15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 W Windshield (cont.)
Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-39
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............... 3-34 Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-59
Warnings Wiper Fuses ............................................. 5-115
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-64 Wipers ......................................................... 3-9
Hazard Flashers ............................................ 3-6 Winter Driving ................................................ 4-29
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iv Wipers
Wheels Rear Washer .............................................. 3-11
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-82
Different Size .............................................. 5-80
Replacement ............................................... 5-82
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................... 5-77
X
Where to Put the Child Restraint ....................... 1-63 XM Radio Messages ..................................... 3-114
Windows ....................................................... 2-19 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-140
Power ........................................................ 2-20
Windshield
Backglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning ........ 5-111 Y
Rainsense™ II Wipers ................................... 3-9 Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
Washer ...................................................... 3-10

16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine